I 

109TH CONGRESS 

2D SESSION H. R. 4707 

To amend the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 to restructure and replace 

the income tax system of the United States to meet national priorities, 

and for other purposes. 

IN THE HOUSE OF REPRESENTATIVES 

FEBRUARY 8, 2006 

Mr. ENGLISH of Pennsylvania introduced the following bill; which was referred 

to the Committee on Ways and Means 

A BILL 

To amend the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 to restructure 

and replace the income tax system of the United States 

to meet national priorities, and for other purposes. 

1 Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representa2 tives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, 

3 SECTION 1. SHORT TITLE; AMENDMENT OF 1986 CODE; 

4 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 

5 (a) SHORT TITLE.—This Act may be cited as the 

6 ‘‘Simplified USA Tax Act of 2006’’. 

7 (b) AMENDMENT OF 1986 CODE.—Except as other8 wise expressly provided, whenever in this Act a reference 

9 is made to the Code or to a section or provision of the 
2 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 Code, the reference shall be considered to be made to the 

2 Internal Revenue Code of 1986 or to a section or provision 

3 thereof. 

4 (c) TABLE OF CONTENTS.— 

Sec. 1. Short title; amendment of 1986 Code; table of contents. 

TITLE I—FINDINGS; NEED TO REPLACE THE INCOME TAX 

Sec. 101. Replacing the income tax of the United States. 

TITLE II—SIMPLIFIED USA TAX FOR INDIVIDUALS 

Sec. 201. Simplified USA Tax for individuals. 

Sec. 202. Reorganization of the Code. 

TITLE III—SIMPLIFIED USA TAX FOR BUSINESSES 

Sec. 301. Repeal of present corporate income tax; new tax paid by corporations 

and other businesses. 

Sec. 302. Repeal of chapter 6. 

TITLE IV—DEFERRED COMPENSATION PLANS 

Sec. 401. Provisions saved. 

Sec. 402. Clerical Amendments. 

Sec. 403. Clerical Amendments. 

TITLE V—REPEAL OF ESTATE AND GIFT TAXES 

Sec. 501. Repeal of gratuitous transfer taxes. 

Sec. 502. Effective Date. 

TITLE VI—TECHNICAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGES; 

EFFECTIVE DATES 

Sec. 601. USA Tax Code. 

Sec. 602. Revisions to the Code. 

Sec. 603. Application of subtitle F. 

Sec. 604. Clerical amendment. 

5 TITLE I—FINDINGS; NEED TO 

6 REPLACE THE INCOME TAX 

7 SEC. 101. REPLACING THE INCOME TAX OF THE UNITED 

8 STATES. 

9 (a) FINDINGS.—The Congress finds that— 
3 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 (1) the current Tax Code is irreparably flawed 

2 and must be replaced; 

3 (2) to enhance the liberty and protect the pri4 vacy of individuals, the Tax Code must be made sim5 pler and nonintrusive, and it must be applied 

6 evenhandedly to all; 

7 (3) to be fair and to provide for the prosperity 

8 of current and future generation, the Tax Code must 

9 give all individuals at all income levels an oppor10 tunity to save, invest and raise their standard of liv11 ing and that of their children; and 

12 (4) future economic growth requires a tax sys13 tem that facilitates successful competition in the 

14 global marketplace. 

15 (b) MAIN FEATURES OF SIMPLIFIED USA TAX SYS16 TEM.— 

17 (1) REPLACEMENT OF OLD TAX SYSTEM.— 

18 Chapter 1 of subtitle A (related to income taxes) of 

19 the Code is repealed and replaced for years begin20 ning after 2006. 

21 (2) Estate and gift tax repealed. 

22 (3) NEW TAX SYSTEM.—The Simplified USA 

23 Tax consists of— 

24 (A) a simplified tax collected from individ25 uals, that for years after 2006 replaces the in-
4 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 come tax imposed on individuals by section 1 of 

2 the Code, and 

3 (B) a simplified tax collected from corpora4 tions and other businesses, that for years after 

5 2006 replaces the income tax imposed on cor6 porations by section 11 of the Code. 

7 (4) SIMPLIFIED USA TAX ON GROSS PROFITS.— 

8 Corporations and other businesses pay tax on their 

9 annual gross profits from business conducted in the 

10 United States, except that— 

11 (A) export revenues are excluded, and 

12 (B) imports are taxed. 

13 (5) SIMPLIFIED USA TAX ON INCOME.—Individ14 uals pay tax on their annual income from wages, 

15 dividends, interest, and other financial income (in16 cluding sales of property), except that— 

17 (A) investment earnings on previously 

18 taxed income that is placed in a Roth IRA is 

19 exempt from further taxation, 

20 (B) a portion of each family’s income is ex21 empt from tax, and 

22 (C) deductions are allowed for— 

23 (i) education costs, 

24 (ii) religious, charitable, and other 

25 philanthropic donations, 
5 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 (iii) home mortgage interest pay2 ments, and 

3 (iv) contributions to qualified IRAs. 

4 (6) CREDIT FOR FICA PAYROLL TAXES PAID.— 

5 The amount of tax due is reduced by the payroll tax 

6 that is— 

7 (A) in the case of an employee, withheld 

8 from wages, or 

9 (B) in the case of a corporation or other 

10 business, paid by the employer. 

11 (c) CONCEPTS AND STRUCTURE OF NEW TAX SYS12 TEM.— 

13 (1) GUIDING PRINCIPLES OF THE SIMPLIFIED

14 USA TAX SYSTEM.—The Simplified USA Tax is 

15 based on the following principles: 

16 (A) National wealth and well-being depend 

17 on the work, skill, and savings and investment 

18 of people. 

19 (B) Businesses are people and their capital 

20 working together. 

21 (C) Capital makes people more productive. 

22 (D) Everyone benefits from a growing 

23 stock of national savings which in turn allows 

24 for a growing stock of physical and human cap25 ital. 
6 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 (E) Under the Simplified USA Tax, the 

2 deferral of taxation on investments in human 

3 capital represents an investment by the Federal 

4 government in the nation’s capital stock and 

5 the Federal government shares in the return on 

6 its investment in the form of higher economic 

7 output and revenues in the future. 

8 (2) SINGLE TAX IN 2 PARTS.—The Simplified 

9 USA Tax is composed of a business tax and an indi10 vidual tax which are 2 parts of a single tax system 

11 that subjects all income produced and received to 

12 taxation once and only once. The 2 parts are as fol13 lows: 

14 (A) BUSINESS TAX AT THE SOURCE OF IN15 COME.—Tax is paid by corporations and other 

16 businesses which produce and sell goods and 

17 services that are— 

18 (i) the source of nearly all the gross 

19 domestic product of the United States, and 

20 (ii) the ultimate source of income re21 ceived by individuals. 

22 (B) INDIVIDUAL TAX ON INCOME RE23 CEIVED.—Tax is paid by individuals when they 

24 receive wages and salaries as compensation for 

25 gross domestic product created by their work. 
7 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 (3) SAVING AND INVESTMENT.—The Simplified 

2 USA Tax allows people to save and businesses to in3 vest as follows: 

4 (A) FAIR OPPORTUNITY FOR PEOPLE TO

5 SAVE.— 

6 (i) OPTIONAL ELIMINATION OF DOU7 BLE TAXATION.—When an individual earns 

8 income and is taxed on that income, the 

9 individual can save that income in a Roth 

10 IRA and not pay income taxes on the in11 vestment earnings. 

12 (ii) DEDUCTIBLE AND EXCLUDABLE

13 SAVINGS.—The Simplified USA Tax con14 tinues provisions of present law that 

15 allow— 

16 (I) lower income individuals and 

17 certain others to make deductible con18 tributions to individual retirement ac19 counts, and 

20 (II) encourage employer spon21 sored savings and retirement plans 

22 that defer taxation of income through 

23 use of 401(k) plans and other quali24 fied retirement plans. 
8 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 (B) FAIR OPPORTUNITY FOR BUSINESSES

2 TO INVEST.— 

3 (i) NO PREPAYMENT OF TAX.—When 

4 a business invests in plant and equip5 ment— 

6 (I) a deduction is allowed for the 

7 cost, and 

8 (II) tax is deferred. 

9 (ii) TAX ON EARNINGS AND RECOVERY

10 OF COST.—When recovered out of business 

11 revenues, both the cost of the investment 

12 and the earnings on the investment are in13 cluded in gross profit subject to tax. 

14 (iii) EXPENSING.—The deduction for 

15 investment is the equivalent of allowing the 

16 cost of plant and equipment to be expensed 

17 instead of depreciated. 

18 (4) FAIR OPPORTUNITY TO COMPETE IN THE

19 GLOBAL MARKETPLACE.—The Simplified USA Tax 

20 serves the strategic interests of the United States in 

21 international markets as follows: 

22 (A) BORDER ADJUSTABLE TAX.— 

23 (i) AMERICAN-MADE EXPORTS.— 

24 Goods and services produced in the United 
9 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 States can be sold into world markets free 

2 of tax. 

3 (ii) FOREIGN-MADE IMPORTS.—Goods 

4 and services imported into the United 

5 States bear a fair and proportionate share 

6 of the tax burden in the United States. 

7 (iii) LEVELING THE INTERNATIONAL

8 PLAYING FIELD.—Border adjustments for 

9 exports and imports are consistent with 

10 international standards and practice. 

11 (5) A SIMPLE AND UNDERSTANDABLE TAX.— 

12 The Simplified USA Tax for individuals— 

13 (A) is written in a simple, understandable 

14 form, 

15 (B) contains only a few exemptions, deduc16 tions, and credits, and can be reported on a tax 

17 return only a small fraction the size of Form 

18 1040. 

19 (6) A NONINTRUSIVE, EVENHANDED TAX.— 

20 (A) TAXPAYERS ARE IN CONTROL.—When 

21 the rules are few and clear, taxpayers can cal22 culate their own tax correctly and file their own 

23 returns without fear of mistake or of getting 

24 caught up in an argument with the IRS. 
10 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 (B) LIMITED ROLE FOR IRS.—When the 

2 rules are few and clear, the IRS does not have 

3 the broad interpretive power that puts tax4 payers at risk of being treated unfairly and un5 evenly. 

6 (C) RESTORING VOLUNTARY COMPLI7 ANCE.—When the rules are few and clear, the 

8 IRS can concentrate on helping taxpayers vol9 untarily pay their correct share of tax revenues 

10 for public use and benefit under a tax system 

11 that is understood and respected. 

12 (7) MAINTAINING TAX PROGRESSIVITY FOR IN13 DIVIDUALS.— 

14 (A) GRADUATED TAX.—Like the tax im15 posed by section 1 of the current Code, the 

16 Simplified USA Tax for individuals is a grad17 uated tax. 

18 (B) FAMILY AND WORK CREDITS.—The 

19 Simplified USA Tax recognizes that every fam20 ily’s budget includes necessities. The Simplified 

21 USA Tax provides a family credit for all fami22 lies as well as a refundable work credit, quali23 fying families to maintain a basic standard of 

24 living. 
11 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 (8) BUSINESSES AND INDIVIDUAL SHARE THE

2 TAX BURDEN.— 

3 (A) BUSINESS PORTION OF TAX BUR4 DEN.—Corporations and other businesses pay 

5 about the same portion of the total tax as 

6 under the current Code. 

7 (B) INDIVIDUAL PORTION OF TAX BUR8 DEN.—Individuals pay about the same portion 

9 of the total tax as under the current Code. 

10 (9) EMPHASIZING PERSONAL INDEPENDENCE

11 AND RESPONSIBILITY.— 

12 (A) REINFORCING A CULTURE OF WORK

13 AND THRIFT.—Instead of being solely a calcula14 tion of how much they must pay to the govern15 ment, the Simplified USA Tax converts the in16 come tax into an annual calculation of how 

17 much people produce and contribute to the 

18 economy. 

19 (B) GREATER CONTROL AND RESPONSI20 BILITY.—Because people are not double taxed 

21 on their saving, they have— 

22 (i) more control over their own income 

23 and taxes, 

24 (ii) a greater ability to plan and pro25 vide for their own future, and 
12 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 (iii) a fair opportunity to do so. 

2 (10) MORE OPPORTUNITY FOR WAGE EARNERS

3 AT LOWER INCOME LEVELS.— 

4 (A) REFUNDABLE CREDIT FOR EMPLOYEE

5 PAYROLL TAX.—The amount of the payroll tax 

6 paid or withheld under the Code from an em7 ployee’s wages (and paid into the Social Secu8 rity and Hospital Insurance Trust Funds) is— 

9 (i) credited against the employee’s in10 come tax, and 

11 (ii) refunded to the employee to the 

12 extent in excess of the employee’s income 

13 tax. 

14 (B) NO EFFECT ON TRUST FUND OR BEN15 EFITS.—The income tax credit allowed for pay16 roll taxes deposited in the Social Security Trust 

17 Fund does not— 

18 (i) reduce the amount in such fund, or 

19 (ii) reduce the payment of any per20 son’s benefits from the fund. 

21 TITLE II—SIMPLIFIED USA TAX 

22 FOR INDIVIDUALS 

23 SEC. 201. SIMPLIFIED USA TAX FOR INDIVIDUALS. 

24 (a) IN GENERAL.—Chapter 1 of the Code is amended 

25 to read as follows: 
13 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘CHAPTER 1—SIMPLIFIED USA TAX FOR 

2 INDIVIDUALS 

‘‘Subchapter A. Basic rules. 

‘‘Subchapter B. Roth IRA and other savings provisions. 

‘‘Subchapter C. Basis, business transactions, and nonrecognition transactions. 

‘‘Subchapter D. Rules for exclusions from gross income. 

‘‘Subchapter E. Rules relating to deductions. 

‘‘Subchapter F. Special business activities. 

‘‘Subchapter G. Accounting methods. 

‘‘Subchapter H. Nonresident aliens. 

‘‘Subchapter I. Trusts and estates. 

‘‘Subchapter J. Definitions and rules of application. 

3 ‘‘Subchapter A—Basic Rules 

‘‘Sec. 1. Simplified USA tax for individuals. 

‘‘Sec. 2. Persons liable for the Simplified USA for individuals. 

‘‘Sec. 3. Gross income. 

‘‘Sec. 4. Exclusions from gross income. 

‘‘Sec. 5. Alimony and child support deductions. 

‘‘Sec. 6. USA deductions. 

‘‘Sec. 7. Homeowner deduction. 

‘‘Sec. 8. Education deduction. 

‘‘Sec. 9. Philanthropic transfer deduction. 

‘‘Sec. 10. Limitation on deductions. 

‘‘Sec. 15. Tax rates. 

‘‘Sec. 16. Kiddie tax. 

‘‘Sec. 17. Rules for filing status and rate tables. 

‘‘Sec. 20. USA tax credits. 

‘‘Sec. 21. Family tax credit. 

‘‘Sec. 22. Work tax credit. 

‘‘Sec. 23. Payroll tax credit. 

‘‘Sec. 24. Taxes-paid tax credit. 

‘‘Sec. 25. Indexing for inflation. 

4 ‘‘SEC. 1. SIMPLIFIED USA TAX FOR INDIVIDUALS. 

5 ‘‘(a) IMPOSITION OF TAX.—An income tax is imposed 

6 on each individual described in section 2. The income tax 

7 shall equal the amount determined by applying the tax 

8 schedules in section 15 to the taxable income of the tax9 payer for the taxable year and reducing the tax so deter10 mined by the USA tax credits for the taxable year. 
14 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(b) TAXABLE INCOME.—‘Taxable income’ means 

2 adjusted gross income, reduced by the USA deductions, 

3 including— 

4 ‘‘(1) the homeowner deduction, 

5 ‘‘(2) the education deduction, and 

6 ‘‘(3) the philanthropic transfer deduction. 

7 ‘‘(c) ADJUSTED GROSS INCOME.—‘Adjusted gross in8 come’ means gross income, reduced by— 

9 ‘‘(1) the alimony and child support deductions, 

10 and 

11 ‘‘(2) the qualified IRA deduction. 

12 ‘‘(d) NAME.—The tax imposed by this chapter shall 

13 be known as the ‘Simplified USA Tax for Individuals’. 

14 ‘‘SEC. 2. PERSONS LIABLE FOR THE SIMPLIFIED USA TAX 

15 FOR INDIVIDUALS. 

16 ‘‘(a) INDIVIDUALS ONLY.—The Simplified USA Tax 

17 for Individuals shall apply only to individuals. 

18 ‘‘(b) CITIZENS AND RESIDENT ALIENS.—The Sim19 plified USA Tax for Individuals shall apply to all citizens 

20 of the United States and to all resident aliens of the 

21 United States. Except as specifically provided in this chap22 ter, the Simplified USA Tax for Individuals shall not 

23 apply to nonresident aliens. 

24 ‘‘(c) NONRESIDENT ALIENS.—For rules applicable to 

25 the compensation income of nonresident aliens, see sub-
15 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 chapter H (sections 131 and 132). For rules on the with2 holding of tax on nonresident aliens, see chapter 5 (sec3 tions 1441–1464). 

4 ‘‘(d) TAXPAYER.—For purposes of this chapter, ‘tax5 payer’ means an individual, or, in the case of a joint re6 turn, the husband and the wife. 

7 ‘‘SEC. 3. GROSS INCOME. 

8 ‘‘(a) GENERAL DEFINITION.—Except as otherwise 

9 provided in this chapter, ‘gross income for the taxable 

10 year’ means all income from whatever source derived by 

11 a taxpayer during the taxable year, including (but not lim12 ited to) the following items: 

13 ‘‘(1) Compensation for services, including (but 

14 not limited to)— 

15 ‘‘(A) salaries, 

16 ‘‘(B) wages, 

17 ‘‘(C) commissions, 

18 ‘‘(D) tips, and 

19 ‘‘(E) distributions from business entities 

20 (as defined in section 171). 

21 ‘‘(2) Fringe benefits (except as specifically ex22 cluded by section 4(a)), including (but not limited 

23 to)— 

24 ‘‘(A) the cost of health, disability, life or 

25 other similar insurance paid by an employer if 
16 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the taxpayer is indirectly or directly the bene2 ficiary of the policy or has the right to name 

3 the beneficiary of the policy, 

4 ‘‘(B) employer-paid parking (unless the 

5 employee uses the automobile parked in the 

6 space regularly on employer business), 

7 ‘‘(C) employer-paid educational benefits, 

8 ‘‘(D) employer-paid housing (other than 

9 housing provided for the convenience of the em10 ployer), 

11 ‘‘(E) employer-paid meals (other than 

12 meals provided for the convenience of the em13 ployer or reimbursement for the reasonable cost 

14 of meals incurred on overnight travel), 

15 ‘‘(F) amounts contributed by an employer 

16 on behalf of an employee to a group legal serv17 ices plan, and 

18 ‘‘(G) dependent care assistance received 

19 from an employer. 

20 ‘‘(3) Distributions from business entities (as de21 fined in section 171) constituting— 

22 ‘‘(A) compensation for use of capital, in23 cluding interest, or 

24 ‘‘(B) shares of profits (including divi25 dends). 
17 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(4) Interest not described in paragraph (3)(A). 

2 ‘‘(5) Rents. 

3 ‘‘(6) Royalties. 

4 ‘‘(7) Alimony, child support, and separate 

5 maintenance payments. 

6 ‘‘(8) Includible social security benefits. 

7 ‘‘(9) Income from the discharge of indebted8 ness. 

9 ‘‘(10) Gains on the sale or disposition of assets. 

10 ‘‘(11) Amounts stolen or embezzled. 

11 ‘‘(12) Distributions from retirement plans and 

12 annuities (other than USA Roth IRAs) to the extent 

13 not previously included as income, as determined in 

14 accordance with section 33. 

15 ‘‘(13) Amounts received through health, acci16 dent or disability insurance to the extent that— 

17 ‘‘(A) the cost of such insurance was paid 

18 by an employer and not included in the employ19 ee’s taxable income and 

20 ‘‘(B) such amounts exceed the actual med21 ical expenses incurred and not paid or treated 

22 as paid with amounts otherwise excluded from 

23 income. 

24 ‘‘(b) DEFINITIONS.—For purposes of subsection (a) 

25 and section 4— 
18 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(1) EMPLOYER.—‘Employer’ includes— 

2 ‘‘(A) in the case of a partner who provides 

3 services for a partnership, the partnership, 

4 ‘‘(B) in the case of a proprietor, the pro5 prietorship, and 

6 ‘‘(C) in the case of an independent con7 tractor, any business or individual that hires 

8 the independent contractor. 

9 ‘‘(2) SOCIAL SECURITY BENEFITS.— 

10 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—‘Social Security bene11 fits’ means any amount received by the tax12 payer by reason of entitlement to— 

13 ‘‘(i) a monthly benefit under title II of 

14 the Social Security Act, or 

15 ‘‘(ii) a tier 1 railroad retirement ben16 efit. The amount received by a taxpayer 

17 shall be determined as if the Social Secu18 rity Act did not contain section 203(i) 

19 thereof. 

20 ‘‘(B) TIER 1 RAILROAD RETIREMENT BEN21 EFIT.—‘Tier 1 railroad retirement benefit’ 

22 means— 

23 ‘‘(i) the amount of the annuity under 

24 the Railroad Retirement Act of 1974 equal 

25 to the amount of the benefit to which the 
19 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 taxpayer would have been entitled under 

2 the Social Security Act if all of the service 

3 after December 31, 1936, of the employee 

4 (on whose record the annuity is being 

5 paid) has been included in the term ‘em6 ployment’ as defined in the Social Security 

7 Act, and 

8 ‘‘(ii) a monthly annuity amount under 

9 section 3(f)(3) of the Railroad Retirement 

10 Act of 1974. 

11 ‘‘(C) WORKERS’ COMPENSATION SUB12 STITUTES.—If by reason of section 224 of the 

13 Social Security Act or section 3(a)(1) of the 

14 Railroad Retirement Act of 1974, any social se15 curity benefit is reduced because of the receipt 

16 of a benefit under a workers’ compensation act, 

17 the term ‘social security benefit’ includes that 

18 portion of such benefit which equals such reduc19 tion. 

20 ‘‘(D) EFFECT OF EARLY PAYMENT.—If so21 cial security benefits checks are delivered before 

22 the end of the calendar month for which they 

23 are issued and are not deposited until the 

24 month for which they are issued, they will be 
20 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 treated as received in the month for which they 

2 are issued. 

3 ‘‘(3) INCLUDIBLE SOCIAL SECURITY BENE4 FITS.—‘Includible social security benefits’ means the 

5 portion of social security benefits that would be in6 cluded in gross income under section 86(a) of the 

7 Internal Revenue Code of 1986, except that for pur8 poses of applying such section, the term ‘modified 

9 adjusted gross income’ means adjusted gross income 

10 (as defined in section 1(c)), determined without re11 gard to the inclusion of any social security benefits. 

12 ‘‘(c) PROPERTY RECEIVED FOR SERVICES.— 

13 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—If, in connection with the 

14 performance of services, property is transferred to 

15 any person other than the person for whom such 

16 services are performed, the excess of— 

17 ‘‘(A) the fair market value of such prop18 erty (determined without regard to any restric19 tion other than a restriction which by its terms 

20 will never lapse) at the first time the rights of 

21 the person having the beneficial interest in such 

22 property are transferable or are not subject to 

23 a substantial risk of forfeiture, whichever oc24 curs earlier, over 
21 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) the amount (if any) paid for such 

2 property, shall be included in the gross income 

3 of the person who performed such services in 

4 the first taxable year in which the rights of the 

5 person having the beneficial interest in such 

6 property are transferable or are not subject to 

7 a substantial risk of forfeiture, whichever is ap8 plicable. The preceding sentence shall not apply 

9 if such person sells or otherwise disposes of 

10 such property in an arm’s length transaction 

11 before his rights in such property become trans12 ferable or not subject to a substantial risk of 

13 forfeiture. 

14 ‘‘(2) RULES AND REGULATIONS.—The Sec15 retary shall prescribe rules and regulations similar 

16 to those applicable under section 83 of the Internal 

17 Revenue Code of 1986 for purposes of implementing 

18 this subsection. 

19 ‘‘SEC. 4. EXCLUSIONS FROM GROSS INCOME. 

20 ‘‘(a) GENERAL RULE.—Gross income does not in21 clude: 

22 ‘‘(1) RETURNS OR BENEFITS FROM PRE23 VIOUSLY TAXED INCOME.— 
22 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(A) Social security benefits (as defined in 

2 section 3(b)(2)), other than includible social se3 curity benefits (as defined in section 3(b)(3)). 

4 ‘‘(B) Amounts received under accident or 

5 health benefit plans (except as provided in sec6 tion 3(a)(13)). 

7 ‘‘(C) Value of services provided pursuant 

8 to a group legal service plan (but only if the 

9 cost of such services was paid by the employee 

10 or paid by the employer and included in the 

11 gross income of the employee). 

12 ‘‘(D) Amounts received under an insurance 

13 contract for certain living expenses in the case 

14 of an individual whose principal residence is 

15 damaged or destroyed or who is denied access 

16 because of the threat of such occurrence. 

17 ‘‘(E) Amounts treated as recovery of basis 

18 under any other provision of chapter 1. 

19 ‘‘(2) COMPENSATION FOR SPECIAL KINDS OF

20 SERVICE.— 

21 ‘‘(A) In the case of a minister of the gos22 pel— 

23 ‘‘(i) the rental value of a home fur24 nished to him, or 
23 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(ii) the rental allowance paid to him 

2 as part of his compensation, to the extent 

3 used by him to rent or provide a home. 

4 ‘‘(B) Certain combat pay of members of 

5 the Armed Forces of the United States (as pro6 vided in section 92). 

7 ‘‘(C) Certain reduced uniform services re8 tirement pay (as defined in section 122 of the 

9 Internal Revenue Code of 1986). 

10 ‘‘(D) Qualified military benefits (as defined 

11 in section 93). 

12 ‘‘(E) Moving allowances for active military 

13 personnel (as defined in section 217(g) of the 

14 Internal Revenue Code of 1986). 

15 ‘‘(F) Certain foster care payments (as de16 fined in section 94). 

17 ‘‘(3) GRATUITOUS, CHARITABLE, AND GOVERN18 MENTAL TRANSFERS.— 

19 ‘‘(A) Gifts. 

20 ‘‘(B) Inheritances. 

21 ‘‘(C) Supplemental security income, aid to 

22 families with dependent children, food stamps, 

23 section 8 low-income rental assistance, benefits 

24 under the low-income home energy assistance 

25 program, and benefits under other similar Fed-
24 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 eral and State assistance programs for low-in2 come individuals and families. 

3 ‘‘(D) Benefits or assistance received from 

4 a charitable organization as the result of a dis5 aster or by reason of financial need. 

6 ‘‘(4) TAX-EXEMPT BOND INTEREST.—Interest 

7 on State and local bonds (as provided in section 91); 

8 ‘‘(5) COMPENSATION FOR INJURY AND SICK9 NESS.— 

10 ‘‘(A) Amounts received as compensation 

11 for personal injury or sickness (as provided in 

12 section 95). 

13 ‘‘(B) Reimbursement and direct payments 

14 under Medicare and Medicaid. 

15 ‘‘(6) BENEFITS PRIMARILY FOR THE CONVEN16 IENCE OF THE EMPLOYER AND CERTAIN FRINGE

17 BENEFITS.— 

18 ‘‘(A) Meals or lodging furnished for the 

19 convenience of the employer (as provided in sec20 tion 96). 

21 ‘‘(B) Value of a parking space if employee 

22 uses the car parked in the space regularly on 

23 company business. 

24 ‘‘(C) A fringe benefit that is a no-addi25 tional-cost service (as defined in section 97(b)), 
25 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 subject to rules prohibiting discrimination in 

2 favor of the highly compensated. 

3 ‘‘(D) A qualified employee discount (as de4 fined in section 97(c)), subject to rules prohib5 iting discrimination in favor of the highly com6 pensated. 

7 ‘‘(E) Any property or services provided to 

8 an employee to the extent that if the employee 

9 were treated as a business and the business 

10 paid for those services, the employee could de11 duct the cost of such property or services under 

12 the business tax. 

13 ‘‘(F) A de minimis fringe benefit (as de14 fined in section 97(d)). 

15 ‘‘(G) Transportation in a commuter high16 way vehicle if such transportation is in connec17 tion with travel between the employee’s resi18 dence and place of employment. 

19 ‘‘(H) Any amount received directly or indi20 rectly by an individual from an employer for 

21 moving expenses if— 

22 ‘‘(i) the move is associated with a 

23 change in job locations for the same em24 ployer, and 
26 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(ii) the expenses of such move would 

2 have been deductible under the rules under 

3 section 217 of the Internal Revenue Code 

4 of 1986 if paid directly by the employee. 

5 ‘‘(I) Employer provided coverage under an 

6 accident or health plan. 

7 ‘‘(7) REPAYABLE RECEIPTS.—The proceeds of 

8 borrowing or any other amounts legally received that 

9 the taxpayer is legally obligated to return (except 

10 that the imputed interest rules of section 7872 may 

11 apply if there is inadequate stated interest). 

12 ‘‘(8) CERTAIN INCOME EARNED ABROAD.—Cer13 tain income and housing costs of citizens and resi14 dents of the United States living outside the United 

15 States in accordance with the rules under section 

16 911 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986. 

17 ‘‘(9) DISCHARGE OF INDEBTEDNESS.—The 

18 amount of indebtedness discharged unless the dis19 charge is for services, property, or other valuable 

20 right. 

21 ‘‘(10) NONRECOGNITION TRANSACTIONS.— 

22 Amounts to which the nonrecognition transaction 

23 rules of section 77 apply. 

24 ‘‘(11) PROCEEDS FROM SALE OF PRINCIPAL

25 RESIDENCE.—Amounts excludable under section 76 
27 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 (relating to certain proceeds from the sale of the 

2 taxpayer’s principal residence). 

3 ‘‘(12) TAXABLE RECEIPTS OF A BUSINESS EN4 TITY.—Amounts that are treated as taxable receipts 

5 of a business entity under the Simplified USA Tax 

6 for businesses and are not distributed to the indi7 vidual taxpayer. 

8 ‘‘(13) QUALIFIED RETIREMENT CONTRIBU9 TIONS.—Employer contributions to retirement plans 

10 that are exempt from taxation under chapter 3, in11 cluding contributions pursuant to a cash or deferred 

12 payment plan described in section 401(k). 

13 ‘‘(b) CROSS REFERENCES.— 

14 ‘‘(1) ROTH IRAS.—For rules excluding from in15 come earnings on, and distributions from, Roth 

16 IRAs, see sections 30 and 408A. 

17 ‘‘(2) OTHER RETIREMENT PLANS.—For rules 

18 excluding or deferring from income earnings on 

19 other retirement plans, see chapter 3. 

20 ‘‘SEC. 5. ALIMONY AND CHILD SUPPORT DEDUCTIONS. 

21 ‘‘(a) GENERAL RULE.—A taxpayer shall be allowed 

22 an alimony and child support deductions for an amount 

23 equal to the alimony, child support, or separate mainte24 nance payments paid during the taxpayer’s taxable year. 
28 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(b) DEFINITION OF ALIMONY, CHILD SUPPORT, 

2 AND SEPARATE MAINTENANCE PAYMENTS.—‘Alimony, 

3 child support, and separate maintenance payments’ means 

4 any alimony, child support, or separate maintenance pay5 ment which is includible in gross income of the recipient 

6 under section 3. 

7 ‘‘SEC. 6. USA DEDUCTIONS. 

8 ‘‘In computing taxable income, an individual shall be 

9 entitled to the following deductions: 

10 ‘‘(1) The homeowner deduction described in 

11 section 7. 

12 ‘‘(2) The education deduction described in sec13 tion 8. 

14 ‘‘(3) The philanthropic transfer deduction de15 scribed in section 9. 

16 ‘‘SEC. 7. HOMEOWNER DEDUCTION. 

17 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—The homeowner deduction shall 

18 equal the amount of interest paid by the taxpayer during 

19 the taxable year on acquisition indebtedness with respect 

20 to any qualified residence of the taxpayer. 

21 ‘‘(b) DEFINITIONS.— 

22 ‘‘(1) ACQUISITION INDEBTEDNESS.—‘Acquisi23 tion indebtedness’ means any indebtedness that is 

24 secured by a qualified residence and that— 
29 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(A) was incurred in acquiring, con2 structing, or substantially improving the quali3 fied residence, or 

4 ‘‘(B) was incurred to refinance any indebt5 edness that is described in subparagraph (A) or 

6 this subparagraph (B) but only to the extent 

7 that the refinancing does not exceed the 

8 amount refinanced. 

9 The aggregate amount treated as acquisition indebt10 edness shall not exceed $1,000,000 ($500,000 in the 

11 case of a married individual filing separately). 

12 ‘‘(2) QUALIFIED RESIDENCE.—‘Qualified resi13 dence’ means the principal residence of the taxpayer 

14 and 1 other residence of the taxpayer that is des15 ignated by the taxpayer and which— 

16 ‘‘(A) is used by the taxpayer as a residence 

17 for more than 14 days during such year for 

18 which such unit is rented, and 

19 ‘‘(B) is not rented for more than 14 days 

20 during such year. 

21 ‘‘(c) COOPERATIVE HOUSING CORPORATION TEN22 ANT.—Any indebtedness secured by stock held by a tax23 payer as a tenant-stockholder in a cooperative housing cor24 poration shall be treated as secured by the house or apart25 ment which the taxpayer is entitled to occupy as a tenant- 
30 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 stockholder. If such stock cannot be used to secure indebt2 edness, the indebtedness will be treated as so secured if 

3 the taxpayer establishes that such indebtedness was in4 curred to acquire stock. 

5 ‘‘SEC. 8. EDUCATION DEDUCTION. 

6 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—The education deduction shall 

7 equal the sum of the qualified educational expenses for 

8 each eligible student. 

9 ‘‘(b) QUALIFIED EDUCATION EXPENSES.— 

10 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—‘Qualified education ex11 penses’ means with respect to an eligible student the 

12 lesser of— 

13 ‘‘(A) $4,000, or 

14 ‘‘(B) the qualified higher education ex15 penses of the eligible student paid by the tax16 payer during the taxable year. 

17 ‘‘(2) QUALIFIED HIGHER EDUCATION EX18 PENSES.— 

19 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—‘Qualified higher edu20 cation expenses’ means tuition and fees re21 quired for the enrollment of an eligible student 

22 at an eligible education institution. Such term 

23 shall not include expenses with respect to any 

24 course or other education involving sports, 
31 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 games, or hobbies other than as part of a de2 gree program. 

3 ‘‘(B) ELIGIBLE EDUCATIONAL INSTITU4 TION.—‘Eligible educational institution’ 

5 means— 

6 ‘‘(i) an institution which is described 

7 in section 481 of the Higher Education 

8 Act of 1965 (as in effect on May 15, 

9 1998), and which is eligible to participate 

10 in a program under title IV of such Act, 

11 and 

12 ‘‘(ii) in the case of a student who has 

13 attained the age of 18 before the beginning 

14 of the taxable year, and not graduated 

15 from high school before the beginning of 

16 the taxable year, an accredited school pro17 viding remedial education. 

18 ‘‘(3) ELIGIBLE STUDENT.—‘Eligible student’ 

19 means— 

20 ‘‘(A) the taxpayer, but only if no other tax21 payer treats the taxpayer as a dependent for 

22 whom a credit is allowed under section 21, 

23 ‘‘(B) the taxpayer’s spouse if a joint return 

24 is filed, and 
32 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(C) any dependent of the taxpayer for 

2 whom the taxpayer is allowed a credit under 

3 section 21. 

4 ‘‘(c) LIMITATION.—The maximum education deduc5 tion in a taxable year is $12,000 ($6,000 in the case of 

6 married individuals filing separate returns). 

7 ‘‘(d) INFLATION ADJUSTMENTS.—The dollar 

8 amounts contained in subsections (b)(1)(A) and (c) shall 

9 be adjusted for inflation beginning with calendar year 

10 2008 in accordance with section 25. 

11 ‘‘SEC. 9. PHILANTHROPIC TRANSFER DEDUCTION. 

12 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—The philanthropic transfer de13 duction shall equal the amount of charitable contributions 

14 made by the taxpayer in the taxable year, subject to the 

15 limitations in subsection (b). A deduction shall be allow16 able as a deduction only if verified under regulations pre17 scribed by the Secretary. 

18 ‘‘(b) LIMITATION ON AMOUNT.— 

19 ‘‘(1) GENERAL RULE.—A deduction for con20 tributions to regular charities in any taxable year 

21 shall be allowed only to the extent that such con22 tributions do not exceed 50 percent of the taxpayer’s 

23 adjusted gross income. Other charitable contribu24 tions shall be allowed only to the extent that such 

25 contributions do not exceed the lesser of— 
33 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(A) 30 percent of the taxpayer’s adjusted 

2 gross income, or 

3 ‘‘(B) the excess, if any, of 50 percent of 

4 the taxpayer’s adjusted gross income over the 

5 amount of charitable contributions to regular 

6 charities. 

7 ‘‘(2) CARRYOVER.—If the amount of charitable 

8 contributions made in a taxable year exceeds the 

9 amount which can be deducted in such year, the ex10 cess shall be carried over for a period of up to 5 

11 years in accordance with rules to be prescribed by 

12 the Secretary. 

13 ‘‘(3) REGULAR CHARITY.—For purposes of this 

14 subsection, ‘regular charity’ means an organization 

15 described in section 101, that is not a private foun16 dation (other than a private operating foundation) 

17 (as such terms are defined in section 102). 

18 ‘‘(c) CHARITABLE CONTRIBUTION.—‘Charitable con19 tribution’ means a contribution or gift to or for the use 

20 of a governmental or charitable recipient (as defined in 

21 section 101). 

22 ‘‘(d) CONTRIBUTIONS OF PROPERTY.— 

23 ‘‘(1) GENERAL RULE.—In the case of a chari24 table contribution of property, the amount of the 

25 contribution shall equal the lesser of the fair market 
34 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 value of the property or the taxpayer’s basis in the 

2 property. 

3 ‘‘(2) FAIR MARKET VALUE DEDUCTIONS IN

4 CERTAIN CASES.—Notwithstanding paragraph (1), 

5 in the case of a charitable contribution (other than 

6 a contribution to a private foundation that is not a 

7 private operating foundation) of— 

8 ‘‘(A) real property, 

9 ‘‘(B) tangible property if the use by the 

10 donee is related to its purpose or function con11 stituting the basis for its exemption from the 

12 business tax or in the case of a governmental 

13 unit, to any governmental unit, and 

14 ‘‘(C) stocks, bonds, or other securities held 

15 for more than one year, the amount of the 

16 charitable contribution shall equal the fair mar17 ket value of the property. 

18 ‘‘(3) CONTRIBUTIONS OF STOCK FOR WHICH

19 MARKET QUOTATIONS ARE READILY AVAILABLE.— 

20 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—In the case of con21 tributions of qualified appreciated stock, para22 graph (2) shall apply without regard to whether 

23 the stock is contributed to a private foundation. 

24 ‘‘(B) QUALIFIED APPRECIATED STOCK.— 

25 ‘Qualified appreciated stock’ means any stock 
35 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 of a corporation for which (as of the date of the 

2 contribution) market quotations are readily 

3 available on an established securities market, 

4 except that in the case of a donor to a private 

5 foundation, the term does not include stock to 

6 the extent that the amount so contributed, 

7 when increased by prior contributions by the 

8 donor of stock in the same corporation, exceeds 

9 10 percent in value of the outstanding stock of 

10 such corporation. 

11 ‘‘(e) OTHER RULES.—The Secretary shall prescribe 

12 rules limiting the availability of the philanthropic transfer 

13 deduction in certain cases, including rules for— 

14 ‘‘(1) contributions of property placed in trust, 

15 ‘‘(2) contributions of partial interests in prop16 erty, 

17 ‘‘(3) contributions subject to liabilities that are 

18 assumed, 

19 ‘‘(4) out-of-pocket expenditures on behalf of a 

20 charity to influence legislation, 

21 ‘‘(5) substantiation of contributions in excess of 

22 $250, 

23 ‘‘(6) contributions designated for lobbying activ24 ity, 
36 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(7) amounts paid to maintain certain students 

2 as members of taxpayer’s household, 

3 ‘‘(8) qualified conservation contributions, and 

4 ‘‘(9) deductions for travel expenses on behalf of 

5 a charity where there is a significant element of per6 sonal pleasure. 

7 ‘‘SEC. 10. LIMITATION ON DEDUCTIONS. 

8 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—A taxpayer’s deductions shall 

9 not reduce the taxpayer’s taxable income below zero. Ex10 cept as provided in section 9(b) (relating to the limitation 

11 on the philanthropic transfer deduction), a taxpayer shall 

12 not be entitled to carry over any unused deductions. 

13 ‘‘(b) DEDUCTIONS.—For purposes of this section, 

14 ‘deductions’ means— 

15 ‘‘(1) the alimony and child support deductions, 

16 ‘‘(2) the USA deductions, and 

17 ‘‘(3) the qualified IRA deduction. 

18 ‘‘SEC. 15. TAX RATES. 

19 ‘‘(a) MARRIED INDIVIDUALS FILING JOINT RETURNS

20 AND SURVIVING SPOUSES.—The tax schedule for every 

21 married individual who files a joint return with a spouse 

22 and for every surviving spouse (as defined in section 

23 17(a)) is— 

‘‘If taxable income is: The tax is: 

Not over $40,000 .......................... 15% of taxable income.

Over $40,000, but not over 

$80,000.

$6,000, plus 25% of the excess over 

$40,000.
37 

•HR 4707 IH 

‘‘If taxable income is: The tax is: 

Over $80,000 ................................. $16,000, plus 30% of the excess over 

$80,000. 

1 ‘‘(b) HEADS OF HOUSEHOLDS.—The tax schedule for 

2 every head of household (as defined in section 17(b)) is— 

‘‘If taxable income is: The tax is: 

Not over $35,000 .......................... 15% of taxable income.

Over $35,000, but not over 

$70,000.

$5,250, plus 25% of the excess over 

$35,000.

Over $70,000 ................................. $14,000, plus 30% of the excess over 

$70,000. 

3 ‘‘(c) UNMARRIED INDIVIDUALS.—The tax schedule 

4 for an unmarried individual who is not a head of a house5 hold or a surviving spouse is— 

‘‘If taxable income is: The tax is: 

Not over $24,000 .......................... 15% of taxable income.

Over $24,000, but not over 

$48,000.

$3,600, plus 25% of the excess over 

$24,000.

Over $48,000 ................................. $9,600, plus 30% of the excess over 

$48,000. 

6 ‘‘(d) MARRIED INDIVIDUALS FILING SEPARATE RE7 TURNS.—The tax schedule for a married individual filing 

8 a separate return is— 

‘‘If taxable income is: The tax is: 

Not over $20,000 .......................... 15% of taxable income.

Over $20,000, but not over 

$40,000.

$3,000, plus 25% of the excess over 

$20,000.

Over $40,000 ................................. $8,000, plus 30% of the excess over 

$40,000. 

9 ‘‘(e) ADJUSTMENTS FOR INFLATION.—Beginning 

10 with calendar year 2008, the tax schedules in subsections 

11 (a) through (d) shall be adjusted so that inflation will not 

12 result in tax increases in accordance with the procedures 

13 under section 25. 

14 ‘‘(f) MAXIMUM RATE FOR INVESTMENT INCOME.— 
38 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—If a taxpayer has a net in2 vestment income for any taxable year, the tax im3 posed by this section for such taxable year shall not 

4 exceed the sum of— 

5 ‘‘(A) a tax computed at the rates and in 

6 the same manner as if this subsection had not 

7 been enacted on taxable income reduced by net 

8 capital gain, or if greater, on the lesser of— 

9 ‘‘(i) taxable income, or 

10 ‘‘(ii) taxable income reduced by net 

11 capital gain, and 

12 ‘‘(B) 15 percent of net investment income. 

13 ‘‘(2) NET INVESTMENT INCOME.—For purposes 

14 of paragraph (1), the term ‘net investment income’ 

15 means the excess of— 

16 ‘‘(A) the sum of amounts includible in 

17 gross income which is— 

18 ‘‘(i) a distribution from business enti19 ties (as defined in section 171) consti20 tuting shares of profits (including divi21 dends), and 

22 ‘‘(ii) gain on the sale or disposition of 

23 any asset, over 

24 ‘‘(B) any amount realized which is a loss 

25 on the sale or disposition of any asset. 
39 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(g) DEFINITIONS.—See section 17 for rules on filing 

2 status. 

3 ‘‘SEC. 16. KIDDIE TAX. 

4 ‘‘(a) GENERAL RULE.—If a child has a living parent 

5 and net unearned income and the child has not attained 

6 the age of 14 before the close of the taxable year— 

7 ‘‘(1) the net unearned income of the child shall 

8 be included in the taxable income of the eligible par9 ent for purposes of determining the parent’s tax li10 ability, or 

11 ‘‘(2) the tax calculated under the tax rate 

12 schedules for the child as a separate taxpayer shall 

13 not be less than the sum of— 

14 ‘‘(A) the tax which would have been deter15 mined under the rate schedule if the taxable in16 come of the child were reduced by the net un17 earned income of the child, plus 

18 ‘‘(B) such child’s share of the allocable pa19 rental tax. 

20 ‘‘(b) CHILD’S SHARE OF ALLOCABLE PARENTAL

21 TAX.— 

22 ‘‘(1) ALLOCABLE PARENTAL TAX.—‘Allocable 

23 parental tax’ means the excess of— 

24 ‘‘(A) the tax that would have been deter25 mined under the rate schedules on the eligible 
40 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 parent’s taxable income if such income included 

2 the net unearned income of all of the eligible 

3 parent’s children to which this section applies, 

4 over 

5 ‘‘(B) the tax actually determined under the 

6 rate schedules without regard to this section. 

7 ‘‘(2) CHILD’S SHARE.—A child’s share of the 

8 allocable parental tax is equal to the amount that 

9 bears the same ratio to the total allocable parental 

10 tax as the child’s net unearned income bears to the 

11 aggregate net unearned income of all children to 

12 whom this section applies for whom the eligible par13 ent is the eligible parent. 

14 ‘‘(c) ELIGIBLE PARENT.—‘Eligible parent’ means— 

15 ‘‘(1) both parents of the child if the parents file 

16 a joint return, 

17 ‘‘(2) the surviving parent of a child if the child 

18 has only 1 surviving parent, 

19 ‘‘(3) the custodial parent if the child’s parents 

20 are not married, or 

21 ‘‘(4) the parent with the greater taxable income 

22 if the parents are married and filing separate re23 turns. 

24 ‘‘(d) NET UNEARNED INCOME.—‘Net unearned in25 come’ means the excess, if any, of— 
41 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(1) the adjusted gross income of the child, 

2 over 

3 ‘‘(2) the sum of— 

4 ‘‘(A) the earned income (as defined in sec5 tion 171(a)(6)) of the child, and 

6 ‘‘(B) $2,500. 

7 ‘‘SEC. 17. RULES FOR FILING STATUS AND RATE TABLES. 

8 ‘‘(a) DEFINITION OF SURVIVING SPOUSE.— 

9 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—‘Surviving spouse’ means 

10 an individual— 

11 ‘‘(A) whose spouse died during either of 

12 his 2 calendar years immediately preceding the 

13 calendar year, and 

14 ‘‘(B) who maintains as his home a house15 hold which constitutes for the taxable year the 

16 principal place of abode (as a member of such 

17 household) of a dependent— 

18 ‘‘(i) who is a qualifying child (as de19 fined in section 21) of the taxpayer, and 

20 ‘‘(ii) for whom the taxpayer is allowed 

21 a credit for the taxable year under section 

22 21. 

23 For purposes of this paragraph, an individual shall 

24 be considered as maintaining a household only if 

25 over half of the cost of maintaining the household 
42 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 during the taxable year is furnished by such indi2 vidual. 

3 ‘‘(2) LIMITATIONS.—Notwithstanding para4 graph (1), for purposes of section 15, an individual 

5 shall not be considered to be a surviving spouse— 

6 ‘‘(A) if the individual has remarried at any 

7 time before the close of the taxable year, or 

8 ‘‘(B) unless, for the individual’s taxable 

9 year during which his spouse died, a joint re10 turn could have been made under the provisions 

11 of section 6013 (without regard to subsection 

12 (a)(3) thereof). 

13 ‘‘(3) SPECIAL RULE WHERE DECEASED SPOUSE

14 WAS IN MISSING STATUS.—If an individual was in a 

15 missing status (within the meaning of section 

16 6013(f)(3)) as a result of service in a combat zone 

17 and if such individual remains in such status until 

18 the date referred to in subparagraph (A) or (B), 

19 then, for purposes of paragraph (1)(A), the date on 

20 which such individual died shall be treated as the 

21 earlier of the date determined under subparagraph 

22 (A) or the date determined under subparagraph (B): 

23 ‘‘(A) the date on which the determination 

24 is made under section 556 of title 37 of the 

25 United States Code or under section 5566 of 
43 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 title 5 of such Code (whichever is applicable) 

2 that such individual died while in such missing 

3 status, or 

4 ‘‘(B) the date which is 2 years after the 

5 date designated under section 92 (relating to 

6 exemption for combat zones) as the date of ter7 mination of combatant activities in that zone. 

8 ‘‘(b) DEFINITION OF HEAD OF HOUSEHOLD.— 

9 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—An individual shall be con10 sidered a head of a household if, and only if, such 

11 individual is not married at the close of his taxable 

12 year, is not a surviving spouse (as defined in sub13 section (a)), and either— 

14 ‘‘(A) maintains as his home a household 

15 which constitutes for more than one-half of 

16 such taxable year the principal place of abode, 

17 as a member of such household, of— 

18 ‘‘(i) a son, stepson, daughter, or step19 daughter of the taxpayer, or a descendant 

20 of a son or daughter of the taxpayer, but 

21 if such son, stepson, daughter, step22 daughter, or descendant is married at the 

23 close of the taxpayer’s taxable year, only if 

24 the taxpayer is entitled to claim such per25 son as a credit for the taxable year under 
44 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 section 21 (or would be so entitled but for 

2 the release of a claim under section 152(e) 

3 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 by 

4 the custodial parent), 

5 ‘‘(ii) any other person who is a de6 pendent of the taxpayer, if the taxpayer is 

7 allowed a credit for such person under sec8 tion 21for the taxable year, or 

9 ‘‘(B) maintains a household which con10 stitutes for such taxable year the principal place 

11 of abode of the father or mother of the tax12 payer, if the taxpayer is entitled to a credit 

13 under section 21 for the taxable year for such 

14 father or mother. 

15 For purposes of this paragraph, an individual shall 

16 be considered as maintaining a household only if 

17 over half of the cost of maintaining the household 

18 during the taxable year is furnished by such indi19 vidual. 

20 ‘‘(2) DETERMINATION OF STATUS.—For pur21 poses of this subsection— 

22 ‘‘(A) a legally adopted child of a person 

23 shall be considered a child of such person by 

24 blood; 
45 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) an individual who is legally separated 

2 from his spouse under a decree of divorce or of 

3 separate maintenance shall not be considered as 

4 married; 

5 ‘‘(C) a taxpayer shall be considered as not 

6 married at the close of his taxable year if at 

7 any time during the taxable year his spouse is 

8 a nonresident alien; and 

9 ‘‘(D) a taxpayer shall be considered as 

10 married at the close of his taxable year if his 

11 spouse (other than a spouse described in sub12 paragraph (C)) died during the taxable year. 

13 ‘‘(3) LIMITATIONS.—Notwithstanding para14 graph (1), for purposes of this chapter, a taxpayer 

15 shall not be considered to be a head of a house16 hold— 

17 ‘‘(A) if at any time during the taxable year 

18 he is a nonresident alien; or 

19 ‘‘(B) by reason of an individual who would 

20 not be a dependent for the taxable year but 

21 for— 

22 ‘‘(i) subparagraph (H) of section 

23 152(d)(2) of the Internal Revenue Code of 

24 1986, or 
46 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(ii) multiple support rules prescribed 

2 by the Secretary. 

3 ‘‘(c) CERTAIN MARRIED INDIVIDUALS LIVING

4 APART.—For purposes of this part, an individual shall be 

5 treated as not married at the close of the taxable year 

6 if such individual is so treated under the provisions of sec7 tion 7703(b). 

8 ‘‘(d) NONRESIDENT ALIENS.—In the case of a non9 resident alien individual, the taxes imposed by section 1 

10 shall not apply. 

11 ‘‘SEC. 20. USA TAX CREDITS. 

12 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—The USA tax credits are and 

13 shall be applied in the following order: 

14 ‘‘(1) The family tax credit under section 21. 

15 ‘‘(2) The work tax credit under section 22. 

16 ‘‘(3) The foreign tax credit as prescribed by the 

17 Secretary under rules similar to the rules of subpart 

18 A of part III of subchapter N of chapter 1 of the 

19 Internal Revenue Code of 1986, but only with re20 spect to foreign taxes on amounts that are included 

21 in the gross income of the taxpayer. 

22 ‘‘(4) The payroll tax credit under section 23. 

23 ‘‘(5) The taxes-paid tax credit under section 24. 

24 ‘‘(b) REFUNDABLE CREDITS.—If a taxpayer’s USA 

25 tax credits (other than the family tax credit and the for-
47 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 eign tax credit) for a taxable year exceed the taxpayer’s 

2 tax liability for the taxable year (after application of the 

3 family tax credit and the foreign tax credit but before ap4 plication of the other USA tax credits), the taxpayer shall 

5 be entitled to a refund for such excess. The taxpayer may 

6 elect in lieu of a refund to apply such excess as a tax paid 

7 for the following taxable year. 

8 ‘‘SEC. 21. FAMILY TAX CREDIT. 

9 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—The taxpayer shall be allowed a 

10 family tax credit in an amount equal to the sum of— 

11 ‘‘(1) the base family credit amount, plus 

12 ‘‘(2) the additional family credit amount. 

13 ‘‘(b) BASE FAMILY CREDIT AMOUNT.—The base 

14 family credit amount shall be the sum of the credit amount 

15 for each status, determined in accordance with the fol16 lowing table: 

‘‘Status is: Credit amount for status is: 

Married individuals filing joint return ..................................... $3,300

Unmarried individuals with one or more dependents .............. $2,800

Unmarried individuals with no dependents ............................. $1,650

Each dependent ........................................................................ $1,150. 

17 ‘‘(c) ADDITIONAL FAMILY CREDIT AMOUNT.—The 

18 additional family credit amount shall be the sum of the 

19 credit amount for each dependent of the taxpayer, deter20 mined as follows: 

21 ‘‘(1) In the case of each qualifying child, the 

22 amount shall be $1,500. 
48 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) In the case of each qualifying relative, the 

2 amount shall be $500. 

3 ‘‘(d) DEPENDENT; QUALIFYING CHILD, AND QUALI4 FYING RELATIVE DEFINED.—For purposes of this sec5 tion, the terms ‘dependent’, ‘qualifying child’, and ‘quali6 fying relative’ shall have the meaning given such terms 

7 by section 152 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986. 

8 ‘‘SEC. 22. WORK TAX CREDIT. 

9 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—The taxpayer shall be allowed a 

10 work tax credit in an amount equal to taxable income re11 duced (but not below zero) by the family tax credit. 

12 ‘‘(b) LIMITATIONS.—The amount of the credit al13 lowed under subsection (a) shall not exceed the sum of— 

14 ‘‘(1) the base work tax credit amount, plus 

15 ‘‘(2) the additional work tax credit amount. 

16 ‘‘(c) BASE WORK TAX CREDIT AMOUNT.—For pur17 poses of this section— 

18 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—The base work credit 

19 amount with respect to a taxpayer shall be the lesser 

20 of— 

21 ‘‘(A) the applicable percentage of the work 

22 income of the taxpayer, or 

23 ‘‘(B) the base work credit dollar amount. 

24 ‘‘(2) APPLICABLE PERCENTAGE; APPLICABLE

25 DOLLAR LIMITATION.—The applicable percentage 
49 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 and the applicable dollar limitation shall be deter2 mined under the following table: 

‘‘In the case of a taxpayer 

with—

The applicable percentage is—

The applicable dollar limitation is—

No qualifying children .............................. 7.65 percent ....................... $412

1 qualifying child ...................................... 34 percent .......................... $2,120

2 or more qualifying children ................. 40 percent .......................... $3,200. 

3 ‘‘(d) ADDITIONAL WORK TAX CREDIT AMOUNT.— 

4 For purposes of this section— 

5 ‘‘(1) TAXPAYER WITH 1 QUALIFYING CHILD.— 

6 In the case of a taxpayer with 1 qualifying child, the 

7 additional work credit amount shall be the lesser 

8 of— 

9 ‘‘(A) 34 percent of the excess of— 

10 ‘‘(i) work income (or modified taxable 

11 income, if less), over 

12 ‘‘(ii) $6,235, and 

13 ‘‘(B) $1,450. 

14 ‘‘(2) TAXPAYER WITH 2 OR MORE QUALIFYING

15 CHILDREN.—In the case of a taxpayer with 2 or 

16 more qualifying children, the additional work credit 

17 amount shall be the lesser of— 

18 ‘‘(A) 40 percent of the excess of— 

19 ‘‘(i) work income (or modified taxable 

20 income, if less), over 

21 ‘‘(ii) $8,000, and 
50 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) $2,600. 

2 ‘‘(3) PHASEOUT.—The additional work tax 

3 credit amount determined under paragraphs (1) and 

4 (2) shall be reduced (but not below zero) by 12.5 

5 percent of the excess of— 

6 ‘‘(A) work income (or modified taxable in7 come, if greater), over 

8 ‘‘(B) $17,000 (or $21,000 in the case of a 

9 joint return). 

10 ‘‘(e) RULES RELATING TO INCOME.—For purposes of 

11 this section— 

12 ‘‘(1) WORK INCOME.—The term ‘work income’ 

13 means the sum of— 

14 ‘‘(A) taxable wages and salaries, 

15 ‘‘(B) self-employment income, 

16 ‘‘(C) labor income for a statutory em17 ployee, and 

18 ‘‘(D) at the election of the taxpayer, com19 bat pay excluded from income by section 4. 

20 ‘‘(2) MODIFIED TAXABLE INCOME.—The term 

21 ‘modified taxable income’ means taxable income in22 creased by net investment income (as defined by sec23 tion 15), dividends, and tax-exempt bond interest. 

24 ‘‘(f) DEPENDENT; QUALIFYING CHILD.—For pur25 poses of this section, the terms ‘dependent’ and ‘qualifying 
51 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 child’ shall have the meaning given such terms by section 

2 152 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986. 

3 ‘‘SEC. 23. PAYROLL TAX CREDIT. 

4 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—A taxpayer shall be allowed a 

5 payroll tax credit in an amount equal to the sum of— 

6 ‘‘(1) the employee’s share of the basic FICA 

7 tax, 

8 ‘‘(2) the employee’s share of the basic Tier 1 

9 railroad retirement tax, and 

10 ‘‘(3) one-half of the basic SECA tax payable 

11 with respect to the taxpayer’s compensation or earn12 ings during the taxable year. 

13 ‘‘(b) DEFINITIONS.— 

14 ‘‘(1) EMPLOYEE’S SHARE OF THE BASIC FICA

15 TAX.—‘Employee’s share of the basic FICA tax’ 

16 means the old-age, survivors and disability insurance 

17 tax imposed by section 3101(a) and the portion of 

18 the hospital insurance tax imposed by section 

19 3101(b) that is attributable to the wage base on 

20 which the section 3101(a) tax is imposed. 

21 ‘‘(2) EMPLOYEE’S SHARE OF THE BASIC TIER 1

22 RAILROAD RETIREMENT TAX.—Employee’s share of 

23 the basic Tier 1 railroad retirement tax’ means— 

24 ‘‘(A) the portion of the tax imposed by sec25 tion 3201 with respect to compensation below 
52 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the applicable base (as defined in section 

2 3231(e)(2)); and 

3 ‘‘(B) the portion of the tax imposed by sec4 tion 3211(a)(1) on railroad employee represent5 atives attributable to the tax imposed by section 

6 3101(a) and the portion of the hospital insur7 ance tax imposed by section 3101(b) that is at8 tributable to the wage base on which the section 

9 3101(a) tax is imposed. 

10 ‘‘(3) BASIC SECA TAX.—‘Basic SECA tax’ 

11 means the old-age, survivors and disability insurance 

12 tax imposed by section 1401(a) on self-employment 

13 income and the portion of the hospital insurance tax 

14 imposed by section 1401(b) on self-employment in15 come that is attributable to the amount of self-em16 ployment income (as determined under section 

17 1402(b)) on which the section 1401(a) tax is im18 posed. 

19 ‘‘(c) NO CREDIT FOR REFUNDABLE TAX.—No credit 

20 shall be allowed with respect to any FICA tax or railroad 

21 retirement tax for which a taxpayer is entitled to a refund 

22 because of overpayment of tax on the applicable wage 

23 base. 

24 ‘‘SEC. 24. TAXES-PAID TAX CREDIT. 

25 ‘‘The taxes-paid tax credit shall equal the sum of: 
53 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(1) WAGE WITHHOLDING.—The amount with2 held as tax under chapter 24. 

3 ‘‘(2) SPECIAL REFUNDS OF SOCIAL SECURITY

4 TAX WHEN WAGES EARNED FROM MORE THAN 1 EM5 PLOYER.—The amount allowable under section 

6 6413(c) as a special refund of taxes imposed on 

7 wages. 

8 ‘‘(3) OVERPAYMENTS OF PRIOR-YEAR TAX.— 

9 Any overpayment of a prior tax obligation that the 

10 taxpayer or the Secretary applies to the tax for the 

11 taxable year. 

12 ‘‘(4) ESTIMATED TAXES.—Any estimated taxes 

13 paid by the taxpayer with respect to the taxpayer’s 

14 tax liability for the taxable year which are treated as 

15 payment on account of income tax for purposes of 

16 section 6315 (relating to estimated taxes). 

17 ‘‘SEC. 25. INDEXING FOR INFLATION. 

18 ‘‘(a) PUBLICATION OF TABLES AND NUMBERS.—Not 

19 later than December 15 of 2006, and each subsequent cal20 endar year, the Secretary shall prescribe tables and dollar 

21 amounts which shall apply in the immediately following 

22 calendar year in lieu of the tables and dollar amounts that 

23 are required to be adjusted for inflation in accordance with 

24 this section. 

25 ‘‘(b) METHOD OF ADJUSTMENT.— 
54 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—The dollar amounts which 

2 are required to be adjusted pursuant to this section 

3 for a calendar year shall be the dollar amounts as 

4 stated in this chapter multiplied by the cost of living 

5 adjustment for such calendar year, rounded as pro6 vided in subsection (d). 

7 ‘‘(2) TAX RATE TABLES.—In the case of a tax 

8 rate table, the dollar amounts to be adjusted in ac9 cordance with paragraph (1) are the minimum and 

10 maximum dollar amounts for each rate bracket for 

11 which a tax is imposed. The amounts setting forth 

12 the bottom tax for each bracket shall be adjusted to 

13 the extent necessary to reflect the adjustments in 

14 the rate brackets. 

15 ‘‘(c) COST-OF-LIVING ADJUSTMENT.— 

16 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—The cost-of-living adjust17 ment for any calendar year is the percentage (if any) 

18 by which— 

19 ‘‘(A) the CPI for the preceding calendar 

20 year, exceeds 

21 ‘‘(B) the CPI for the calendar year 2006. 

22 ‘‘(2) CPI FOR ANY CALENDAR YEAR.—For pur23 poses of paragraph (1), the CPI for any calendar 

24 year is the average of the Consumer Price Index as 
55 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 of the close of the 12-month period ending on Au2 gust 31 of such calendar year. 

3 ‘‘(3) CONSUMER PRICE INDEX.—For purposes 

4 of paragraph (2), ‘Consumer Price Index’ means the 

5 last Consumer Price Index for all-urban consumers 

6 published by the Department of Labor. For pur7 poses of the preceding sentence, the revision of the 

8 Consumer Price Index which is most consistent with 

9 the Consumer Price Index for calendar year 2006 

10 shall be used. 

11 ‘‘(d) ROUNDING.— 

12 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—If any increase determined 

13 under subsection (b) is not a multiple of $50, such 

14 increase shall be rounded to the next lowest multiple 

15 of $50. 

16 ‘‘(2) MULTIPLES OF $25.—Paragraph (1) shall 

17 be applied by substituting ‘$25’ for ‘$50’ in the case 

18 of— 

19 ‘‘(A) amounts for married individuals filing 

20 separately, and 

21 ‘‘(B) any other dollar amount that is to be 

22 adjusted for inflation if that dollar amount is 

23 less than $1,000. 
56 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘Subchapter B—Roth IRA and Other Savings 

2 Provisions 

‘‘Sec. 30. Roth IRAs. 

‘‘Sec. 31. Deductible IRAs. 

‘‘Sec. 32. Effect of repeal of special savings provisions. 

3 ‘‘SEC. 30. ROTH IRAS. 

4 ‘‘(a) GENERAL RULE.—Except as provided in this 

5 section, a Roth IRA shall be treated for purposes of this 

6 title in the same manner as an individual retirement plan. 

7 ‘‘(b) ROTH IRA.—‘Roth IRA’ means an individual 

8 retirement plan (as defined in section 7701(a)(37)) which 

9 is designated (in such manner as the Secretary may pre10 scribe) at the time of establishment of the plan as a Roth 

11 IRA. Such designation shall be made in such manner as 

12 the Secretary may prescribe. 

13 ‘‘(c) TREATMENT OF CONTRIBUTIONS.— 

14 ‘‘(1) NO DEDUCTION ALLOWED.—No deduction 

15 shall be allowed for a contribution to a Roth IRA. 

16 ‘‘(2) CONTRIBUTION LIMIT.—The aggregate 

17 amount of contributions for any taxable year to all 

18 Roth IRAs maintained for the benefit of an indi19 vidual (or, in the case of individuals filing a joint re20 turn, either spouse) shall not exceed the taxpayer’s 

21 adjusted gross income for the taxable year. 

22 ‘‘(3) ROLLOVER FROM IRA.— 

23 ‘‘(A) ROLLOVER CONTRIBUTIONS.—No 

24 rollover contribution may be made to a Roth 
57 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 IRA unless it is a qualified rollover contribu2 tion. 

3 ‘‘(B) LIMITS.—A taxpayer shall not be al4 lowed to make a qualified rollover contribution 

5 to a Roth IRA from an individual retirement 

6 plan other than a Roth IRA during any taxable 

7 year if— 

8 ‘‘(i) the taxpayer’s adjusted gross in9 come for such taxable year exceeds 

10 $100,000, or 

11 ‘‘(ii) the taxpayer is a married indi12 vidual filing a separate return. 

13 ‘‘(C) MARITAL STATUS.—Section 31(g)(4) 

14 shall apply for purposes of this paragraph. 

15 ‘‘(4) CONTRIBUTIONS PERMITTED AFTER AGE

701 16 ⁄2.—Contributions to a Roth IRA may be made 

17 even after the individual for whom the account is 

maintained has attained age 701 18 ⁄2. 

19 ‘‘(5) MANDATORY DISTRIBUTION RULES NOT

20 TO APPLY BEFORE DEATH.—Notwithstanding sub21 sections (a)(6) and (b)(3) of section 408 (relating to 

22 required distributions), the following provisions shall 

23 not apply to any Roth IRA: 

24 ‘‘(A) Section 401(a)(9)(A). 
58 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) The incidental death benefit require2 ments of section 401(a). 

3 ‘‘(6) TIME WHEN CONTRIBUTIONS MADE.—A 

4 taxpayer shall be deemed to have made a contribu5 tion to a Roth IRA during a year if the contribution 

6 is made on account of such year and is made not 

7 later than April 15 of the following year. 

8 ‘‘(d) EXCLUSION FROM INCOME.—For purposes of 

9 this chapter— 

10 ‘‘(1) GENERAL RULES.—A distribution from a 

11 Roth IRA shall not be includible in gross income. 

12 ‘‘(2) NONQUALIFIED DISTRIBUTION.—The 

13 automatic exclusion from gross income under para14 graph (1) shall not apply to any distribution, other 

15 than a qualified special purpose distribution if— 

16 ‘‘(A) it is made within the 5-taxable year 

17 period beginning with the 1st taxable year for 

18 which the individual made a contribution to a 

19 Roth IRA (or such individual’s spouse made a 

20 contribution to a Roth IRA) established for 

21 such individual, or 

22 ‘‘(B) in the case of a payment or distribu23 tion properly allocable (as determined in the 

24 manner prescribed by the Secretary) to a quali25 fied rollover contribution from an individual re-
59 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 tirement plan other than a Roth IRA (or in2 come allocable thereto), it is made within the 5- 

3 taxable year period beginning with the taxable 

4 year in which the rollover contribution was 

5 made. 

6 ‘‘(3) NONQUALIFIED DISTRIBUTIONS.—In ap7 plying section 33 to any distribution from a Roth 

8 IRA described in paragraph (2), such distribution 

9 shall be treated as made from contributions to the 

10 Roth IRA to the extent that such distribution, when 

11 added to all previous distributions from the Roth 

12 IRA, does not exceed the aggregate amount of con13 tributions to the Roth IRA. Only distributions at14 tributable to earnings on accounts (as opposed to 

15 distributions of contributions) shall be included in 

16 gross income. 

17 ‘‘(4) ROLLOVERS FROM AN IRA OTHER THAN A

18 ROTH IRA.— 

19 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—Notwithstanding sec20 tion 408(d)(3), in the case of any distribution 

21 to which this paragraph applies there shall be 

22 included in gross income any amount which 

23 would be includible were it not part of a quali24 fied rollover contribution. 
60 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) DISTRIBUTIONS TO WHICH PARA2 GRAPH APPLIES.—This paragraph shall apply 

3 to a distribution from an individual retirement 

4 plan (other than a Roth IRA) maintained for 

5 the benefit of an individual which is contributed 

6 to a Roth IRA maintained for the benefit of 

7 such individual in a qualified rollover contribu8 tion. 

9 ‘‘(C) CONVERSIONS.—The conversion of an 

10 individual retirement plan (other than a Roth 

11 IRA) to a Roth IRA shall be treated for pur12 poses of this paragraph as a distribution to 

13 which this paragraph applies. 

14 ‘‘(D) CONVERSION OF EXCESS CONTRIBU15 TIONS.—If, no later than the due date for filing 

16 the return of tax for any taxable year (without 

17 regard to extensions), an individual transfers, 

18 from an individual retirement plan (other than 

19 a Roth IRA), contributions for such taxable 

20 year (and any earnings allocable thereto) to a 

21 Roth IRA, no such amount shall be includible 

22 in gross income to the extent no deduction was 

23 allowed with respect to such amount. 

24 ‘‘(E) ADDITIONAL REPORTING REQUIRE25 MENTS.—Trustees of Roth IRAs, trustees of in-
61 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 dividual retirement plans, or both, whichever is 

2 appropriate, shall include such additional infor3 mation in reports required under section 408(i) 

4 as the Secretary may require to ensure that 

5 amounts required to be included in gross in6 come under subparagraph (A) are so included. 

7 ‘‘(5) COORDINATION WITH INDIVIDUAL RETIRE8 MENT ACCOUNTS.—Section 408(d)(2) shall be ap9 plied separately with respect to Roth IRAs and other 

10 individual retirement plans. 

11 ‘‘(6) QUALIFIED SPECIAL PURPOSE DISTRIBU12 TION.—‘Qualified special purpose distribution’ 

13 means— 

14 ‘‘(i) DISTRIBUTIONS UPON DEATH.—Dis15 tributions made to a beneficiary (or to the es16 tate of the individual) on or after the death of 

17 the individual. 

18 ‘‘(ii) DISTRIBUTIONS UPON DISABILITY.— 

19 Distributions attributable to the individual’s 

20 being disabled. 

21 ‘‘(iii) DISTRIBUTIONS TO PAY MEDICAL EX22 PENSES.—Distributions made to the individual 

23 for amounts paid during the year for medical 

24 care, but only to the extent that the amounts 

25 paid for medical care exceed 7.5 percent of the 
62 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 adjusted gross income of the taxpayer (deter2 mined without regard to whether the employee 

3 itemizes deductions for such taxable year). 

4 ‘‘(iv) QDRO.—Any distribution to an al5 ternate payee pursuant to a qualified domestic 

6 relations order (within the meaning of section 

7 414(p)(1)). 

8 ‘‘(v) DISTRIBUTIONS TO UNEMPLOYED IN9 DIVIDUALS FOR HEALTH INSURANCE PRE10 MIUMS.—Distributions to an individual— 

11 ‘‘(I) if such individual has received 

12 unemployment compensation for 12 con13 secutive weeks under any Federal or State 

14 unemployment compensation law by reason 

15 of such separation (or in the case of a self16 employed individual, to the extent provided 

17 in regulations, if the individual would have 

18 received unemployment compensation but 

19 for the fact the individual was self-em20 ployed), 

21 ‘‘(II) if such distributions are made 

22 during any taxable year during which such 

23 unemployment compensation is paid or the 

24 succeeding taxable year, 
63 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(III) to the extent such distributions 

2 do not exceed the amount paid during the 

3 taxable year for insurance for the diag4 nosis, cure, mitigation, treatment, or pre5 vention of disease, or for the purpose of af6 fecting any structure or function of the 

7 body (or for transportation primarily for 

8 and essential to such medical care) (includ9 ing amounts paid as premiums under part 

10 B of title XVIII of the Social Security Act, 

11 relating to supplementary medical insur12 ance for the aged) or for any qualified 

13 long-term care insurance contract (as de14 fined in section 7702B(b)) with respect to 

15 the individual and the individual’s spouse 

16 and dependents, and 

17 ‘‘(IV) such distributions are not made 

18 after the individual has been employed for 

19 at least 60 days after the separation from 

20 employment to which clause (I) applies. 

21 ‘‘(vi) DISTRIBUTIONS TO PAY HIGHER

22 EDUCATION EXPENSES.—Distributions to the 

23 extent such distributions do not exceed the 

24 qualified higher education expenses (as defined 

25 in section 8(a)(2)) of— 
64 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(I) the taxpayer, 

2 ‘‘(II) the taxpayer’s spouse, or 

3 ‘‘(III) any child or grandchild of the 

4 taxpayer or the taxpayer’s spouse. 

5 ‘‘(vii) DISTRIBUTIONS FOR FIRST

6 HOME PURCHASES.—Distributions which 

7 are qualified first-time homebuyer distribu8 tions (as defined in paragraph (6)). 

9 ‘‘(7) QUALIFIED FIRST-TIME HOMEBUYER DIS10 TRIBUTIONS.— 

11 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—‘Qualified first-time 

12 homebuyer distribution’ means any payment or 

13 distribution received by an individual to the ex14 tent such payment or distribution is used by the 

15 individual before the close of the 120th day 

16 after the day on which such payment or dis17 tribution is received to pay qualified acquisition 

18 costs with respect to a principal residence of a 

19 first-time homebuyer who is such individual, the 

20 spouse of such individual, or any child, grand21 child, or ancestor of such individual or the indi22 vidual’s spouse. 

23 ‘‘(B) LIFETIME DOLLAR LIMITATION.— 

24 The aggregate amount of payments or distribu25 tions received by an individual which may be 
65 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 treated as qualified first-time homebuyer dis2 tributions for any taxable year shall not exceed 

3 the excess (if any) of— 

4 ‘‘(i) $10,000, over 

5 ‘‘(ii) the aggregate amounts treated as 

6 qualified first-time homebuyer distributions 

7 with respect to such individual for all prior 

8 taxable years. 

9 ‘‘(C) QUALIFIED ACQUISITION COSTS.— 

10 ‘Qualified acquisition costs’ means the costs of 

11 acquiring, constructing, or reconstructing a res12 idence. Such term includes any usual or reason13 able settlement, financing, or other closing 

14 costs. 

15 ‘‘(D) FIRST-TIME HOMEBUYER; OTHER

16 DEFINITIONS.—For purposes of this para17 graph— 

18 ‘‘(i) FIRST-TIME HOMEBUYER.— 

19 ‘First-time homebuyer’ means any indi20 vidual if such individual (and if married, 

21 such individual’s spouse) had no present 

22 ownership interest in a principal residence 

23 during the 2-year period ending on the 

24 date of acquisition of the principal resi25 dence to which this paragraph applies, and 
66 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(ii) DATE OF ACQUISITION.—‘Date 

2 of acquisition’ means the date— 

3 ‘‘(I) on which a binding contract 

4 to acquire the principal residence to 

5 which subparagraph (A) applies is en6 tered into, or 

7 ‘‘(II) on which construction or re8 construction of such a principal resi9 dence is commenced. 

10 ‘‘(E) SPECIAL RULE WHERE DELAY IN AC11 QUISITION.—The Secretary shall prescribe rules 

12 under which a distribution will not be penalized 

13 if made in anticipation of being a qualified 

14 first-time homeowner distribution but construc15 tion delays or other unanticipated factors delay 

16 the closing. 

17 ‘‘(e) QUALIFIED ROLLOVER CONTRIBUTION.—For 

18 purposes of this section, the term qualified rollover con19 tribution means a rollover contribution to a Roth IRA 

20 from another such account, or from an individual retire21 ment plan, but only if such rollover contribution meets the 

22 requirements of section 408(d)(3). For purposes of section 

23 408(d)(3)(B), there shall be disregarded any qualified roll24 over contribution from an individual retirement plan 

25 (other than a Roth IRA) to a Roth IRA. 
67 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(f) PERMITTED INVESTMENTS.— 

2 ‘‘(1) INVESTMENT PERMITTED.—A Roth IRA 

3 shall not cease to be an individual retirement ac4 count pursuant to section 408(e)(2) solely because 

5 funds from such account are used to make a debt 

6 or equity investment in a controlled business entity. 

7 ‘‘(2) LOANS TO A CONTROLLED BUSINESS ENTI8 TY.— 

9 ‘‘(A) EXCESS RETURN.—If funds in a 

10 Roth IRA are loaned to a controlled business 

11 entity, any return on such loans in excess of a 

12 fair return shall be treated as gross income of 

13 the beneficiary that is then deposited in the 

14 Roth IRA. 

15 ‘‘(B) LOAN.—For purposes of this section, 

16 an amount shall be treated as loaned to a con17 trolled business entity only if— 

18 ‘‘(i) the amount is treated in the 

19 books and records of the business entity as 

20 a loan, 

21 ‘‘(ii) the transaction is reflected in a 

22 written note or other evidence of indebted23 ness, and 

24 ‘‘(iii) the business entity is required to 

25 pay interest at least once per year and at 
68 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the time such loan is made it is reasonable 

2 to expect that such interest will be paid on 

3 a timely basis. 

4 ‘‘(C) FAIR RETURN.—For purposes of this 

5 subsection, a ‘fair return’ with respect to a loan 

6 is interest at a rate not in excess of 3 percent7 age points plus the minimum rate of interest 

8 that would have to be charged with respect to 

9 such loan to prevent it from being a below-mar10 ket loan for purposes of section 7872 (deter11 mined as if section 7872 applied to such loan). 

12 ‘‘(3) EQUITY INVESTMENT IN A CONTROLLED

13 BUSINESS ENTITY.—If funds in a Roth IRA are con14 tributed to the capital of, applied to acquire stock or 

15 other equity interest in, or otherwise transferred to, 

16 a controlled business entity in a transaction that is 

17 not considered a loan for purposes of this sub18 section, any return on such equity shall be treated 

19 as gross income of the beneficiary that is then de20 posited in the Roth IRA. The preceding sentence 

21 shall not apply to— 

22 ‘‘(A) the proceeds of the sale of such eq23 uity interest to a third party, or 

24 ‘‘(B) the proceeds received by the Roth 

25 IRA as the result of a complete redemption of 
69 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the beneficiary’s interest in the business entity 

2 (including any interests held through a Roth 

3 IRA). 

4 ‘‘(4) CONTROLLED BUSINESS ENTITY.—‘Con5 trolled business entity’ means any business entity in 

6 which the beneficiary of the Roth IRA holds at least 

7 a 5 percent interest in the profits and losses (after 

8 taking into account the investment through the Roth 

9 IRA) and in which an investment would cause the 

10 Roth IRA to cease to be an individual retirement ac11 count by reason of section 408(e)(2) but for this 

12 subsection. 

13 ‘‘(5) APPLICATION OF SECTION 4975.—Section 

14 4975 shall not apply to a loan or equity investment 

15 by a Roth IRA in a controlled business entity. 

16 ‘‘(6) TAX AND PENALTY AVOIDANCE.—The Sec17 retary shall prescribe regulations that prohibit the 

18 provisions of this subsection to be used to cir19 cumvent the application of subsection (d)(2) (relat20 ing to taxable distributions). The regulations shall 

21 not prohibit bona fide investments in controlled busi22 ness entities. The regulations shall address loans to 

23 and investments in a controlled business entity that 

24 are used to fund distributions or dividends from the 
70 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 business entity to the account beneficiary or a mem2 ber of the beneficiary’s family. 

3 ‘‘SEC. 31. DEDUCTIBLE IRAS. 

4 ‘‘(a) ALLOWANCE OF DEDUCTION.—The ‘qualified 

5 IRA deduction’ shall be an amount equal to the qualified 

6 retirement contributions of the individual for the taxable 

7 year, except as limited by subsection (b). 

8 ‘‘(b) MAXIMUM AMOUNT OF DEDUCTION.— 

9 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—The amount allowable as a 

10 deduction under subsection (a) to any individual for 

11 any taxable year shall not exceed the lesser of— 

12 ‘‘(A) $2,000, or 

13 ‘‘(B) an amount equal to the compensation 

14 includible in the individual’s gross income for 

15 such taxable year. 

16 ‘‘(2) SPECIAL RULE FOR EMPLOYER CONTRIBU17 TIONS UNDER SIMPLIFIED EMPLOYEE PENSIONS.— 

18 This section shall not apply with respect to an em19 ployer contribution to a simplified employee pension. 

20 ‘‘(3) GRANDFATHERED PLANS.—Notwith21 standing paragraph (1), the amount allowable as a 

22 deduction under subsection (a) with respect to any 

23 contributions on behalf of an employee to a plan de24 scribed in section 501(c)(18) of the Internal Rev25 enue Code of 1986 shall not exceed the lesser of— 
71 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(A) $7,000, or 

2 ‘‘(B) an amount equal to 25 percent of the 

3 compensation (as defined in section 415(c)(3)) 

4 includible in the individual’s gross income for 

5 such taxable year. 

6 ‘‘(4) SPECIAL RULE FOR SIMPLE RETIREMENT

7 ACCOUNTS.—This section shall not apply with re8 spect to any amount contributed to a simple retire9 ment account established under section 408(p). 

10 ‘‘(c) SPECIAL RULES FOR CERTAIN MARRIED INDI11 VIDUALS.— 

12 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—In the case of an individual 

13 to whom this paragraph applies for the taxable year, 

14 the limitation of paragraph (1) of subsection (b) 

15 shall be equal to the lesser of— 

16 ‘‘(A) the dollar amount in effect under 

17 subsection (b)(1)(A) for the taxable year, or 

18 ‘‘(B) the sum of— 

19 ‘‘(i) the compensation includible in 

20 such individual’s gross income for the tax21 able year, plus 

22 ‘‘(ii) the compensation includible in 

23 the gross income of such individual’s 

24 spouse for the taxable year reduced by— 
72 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(I) the amount allowed as a de2 duction under subsection (a) to such 

3 spouse for such taxable year, and 

4 ‘‘(II) the amount of any contribu5 tion on behalf of such spouse to a 

6 Roth IRA under section 30 for such 

7 taxable year. 

8 ‘‘(2) INDIVIDUALS TO WHOM PARAGRAPH (1) 

9 APPLIES.—Paragraph (1) shall apply to any indi10 vidual if— 

11 ‘‘(A) such individual files a joint return for 

12 the taxable year, and 

13 ‘‘(B) the amount of compensation (if any) 

14 includible in such individual’s gross income for 

15 the taxable year is less than the compensation 

16 includible in the gross income of such individ17 ual’s spouse for the taxable year. 

18 ‘‘(d) OTHER LIMITATIONS AND RESTRICTIONS.— 

19 ‘‘(1) BENEFICIARY MUST BE UNDER AGE

701 20 ⁄2.—No deduction shall be allowed under this sec21 tion with respect to any qualified retirement con22 tribution for the benefit of an individual if such individual has attained age 701 23 ⁄2 before the close of such 

24 individual’s taxable year for which the contribution 

25 was made. 
73 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) RECONTRIBUTED AMOUNTS.—No deduc2 tion shall be allowed under this section with respect 

3 to a rollover contribution described in section 402(c), 

4 403(a)(4), 403(b)(8), or 408(d)(3). 

5 ‘‘(3) AMOUNTS CONTRIBUTED UNDER ENDOW6 MENT CONTRACT.—In the case of an endowment 

7 contract described in section 408(b), no deduction 

8 shall be allowed under this section for that portion 

9 of the amounts paid under the contract for the tax10 able year which is properly allocable, under regula11 tions prescribed by the Secretary, to the cost of life 

12 insurance. 

13 ‘‘(4) DENIAL OF DEDUCTION FOR AMOUNT

14 CONTRIBUTED TO INHERITED ANNUITIES OR AC15 COUNTS.—No deduction shall be allowed under this 

16 section with respect to any amount paid to an inher17 ited individual retirement account or individual re18 tirement annuity (within the meaning of section 

19 408(d)(3)(C)(ii)). 

20 ‘‘(e) QUALIFIED RETIREMENT CONTRIBUTION.—For 

21 purposes of this section, the term ‘qualified retirement 

22 contribution’ means— 

23 ‘‘(1) any amount paid in cash for the taxable 

24 year by or on behalf of an individual to an individual 

25 retirement plan for such individual’s benefit, and 
74 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) any amount contributed on behalf of any 

2 individual to a plan described in section 501(c)(18) 

3 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986. 

4 ‘‘(f) OTHER DEFINITIONS AND SPECIAL RULES.— 

5 ‘‘(1) COMPENSATION.—For purposes of this 

6 section, the term ‘compensation’ includes earned in7 come (as defined in section 401(c)(2)). The term 

8 ‘compensation’ does not include any amount received 

9 as a pension or annuity and does not include any 

10 amount received as deferred compensation. The term 

11 ‘compensation’ shall include any alimony, child sup12 port and separate maintenance payments includible 

13 in the individual’s gross income with respect to a di14 vorce or separation instrument. For purposes of this 

15 paragraph, section 401(c)(2) shall be applied as if 

16 the term trade or business for purposes of section 

17 1402 included service described in subsection (c)(6). 

18 ‘‘(2) MARRIED INDIVIDUALS.—The maximum 

19 deduction under subsection (b) shall be computed 

20 separately for each individual, and this section shall 

21 be applied without regard to any community prop22 erty laws. 

23 ‘‘(3) TIME WHEN CONTRIBUTIONS DEEMED

24 MADE.—For purposes of this section, a taxpayer 

25 shall be deemed to have made a contribution to an 
75 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 individual retirement plan during a year if the con2 tribution is made on account of such year and is 

3 made not later than April 15 of the following year. 

4 ‘‘(4) REPORTS.—The Secretary shall prescribe 

5 regulations which prescribe the time and the manner 

6 in which reports to the Secretary and plan partici7 pants shall be made by the plan administrator of a 

8 qualified employer or government plan receiving 

9 qualified voluntary employee contributions. 

10 ‘‘(5) EMPLOYER PAYMENTS.—For purposes of 

11 this title, any amount paid by an employer to an in12 dividual retirement plan shall be treated as payment 

13 of compensation to the employee (other than a self14 employed individual who is an employee within the 

15 meaning of section 401(c)(1)) includible in his gross 

16 income in the taxable year for which the amount was 

17 contributed, whether or not a deduction for such 

18 payment is allowable under this section to the em19 ployee. 

20 ‘‘(6) EXCESS CONTRIBUTIONS TREATED AS

21 CONTRIBUTION MADE DURING SUBSEQUENT YEAR

22 FOR WHICH THERE IS AN UNUSED LIMITATION.— 

23 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—If for the taxable year 

24 the maximum amount allowable as a deduction 

25 under this section for contributions to an indi-
76 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 vidual retirement plan exceeds the amount con2 tributed, then the taxpayer shall be treated as 

3 having made an additional contribution for the 

4 taxable year in an amount equal to the lesser 

5 of— 

6 ‘‘(i) the amount of such excess, or 

7 ‘‘(ii) the amount of the excess con8 tributions for such taxable year (deter9 mined under section 4973(b)(2) without 

10 regard to subparagraph (C) thereof). 

11 ‘‘(B) AMOUNT CONTRIBUTED.—For pur12 poses of this paragraph, the amount contrib13 uted— 

14 ‘‘(i) shall be determined without re15 gard to this paragraph, and 

16 ‘‘(ii) shall not include any rollover 

17 contribution. 

18 ‘‘(C) SPECIAL RULE WHERE EXCESS DE19 DUCTION WAS ALLOWED FOR CLOSED YEAR.— 

20 Proper reduction shall be made in the amount 

21 allowable as a deduction by reason of this para22 graph for any amount allowed as a deduction 

23 under this section for a prior taxable year for 

24 which the period for assessing deficiency has ex25 pired if the amount so allowed exceeds the 
77 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 amount which should have been allowed for 

2 such prior taxable year. 

3 ‘‘(7) ELECTION NOT TO DEDUCT CONTRIBU4 TIONS.—For election not to deduct contributions to 

5 individual retirement plans, see section 

6 408(o)(2)(B)(ii). 

7 ‘‘(g) LIMITATION ON DEDUCTION FOR ACTIVE PAR8 TICIPANTS IN CERTAIN PENSION PLANS.— 

9 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—If (for any part of any plan 

10 year ending with or within a taxable year) an indi11 vidual is an active participant, each of the dollar 

12 limitations contained in subsections (b)(1)(A) and 

13 (c)(1)(A) for such taxable year shall be reduced (but 

14 not below zero) by the amount determined under 

15 paragraph (2). 

16 ‘‘(2) AMOUNT OF REDUCTION.— 

17 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—The amount deter18 mined under this paragraph with respect to any 

19 dollar limitation shall be the amount which 

20 bears the same ratio to such limitation as— 

21 ‘‘(i) the excess of— 

22 ‘‘(I) the taxpayer’s adjusted 

23 gross income for such taxable year, 

24 over 
78 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(II) the applicable dollar 

2 amount, bears to 

3 ‘‘(ii) $10,000 ($20,000 in the case of 

4 a joint return for a taxable year beginning 

5 after December 31, 2014). 

6 ‘‘(B) NO REDUCTION BELOW $200 UNTIL

7 COMPLETE PHASE-OUT.—No dollar limitation 

8 shall be reduced below $200 under paragraph 

9 (1) unless (without regard to this subpara10 graph) such limitation is reduced to zero. 

11 ‘‘(C) ROUNDING.—Any amount determined 

12 under this paragraph which is not a multiple of 

13 $10 shall be rounded to the next lowest $10. 

14 ‘‘(3) ADJUSTED GROSS INCOME; APPLICABLE

15 DOLLAR AMOUNT.—For purposes of this sub16 section— 

17 ‘‘(A) ADJUSTED GROSS INCOME.—Ad18 justed gross income of any taxpayer shall be de19 termined without regard to the qualified IRA 

20 deduction. 

21 ‘‘(B) APPLICABLE DOLLAR AMOUNT.—The 

22 term ‘applicable dollar amount’ means the fol23 lowing: 

24 ‘‘(i) In the case of a taxpayer filing a 

25 joint return: 
79 

•HR 4707 IH 

The applicable 

‘‘For taxable years beginning in: dollar amount is: 

2007 ......................................................................................... $51,000

2008......................................................................................... $52,000

2009 ......................................................................................... $53,000

2010 ......................................................................................... $54,000

2011 ......................................................................................... $60,000

2012 ......................................................................................... $65,000

2013 ......................................................................................... $70,000

2014 ......................................................................................... $75,000

2015 and thereafter ................................................................. $80,000. 

1 ‘‘(ii) In the case of any other taxpayer 

2 (other than a married individual filing a 

3 separate return): 

The applicable 

‘‘For taxable years beginning in: dollar amount is: 

2007 ......................................................................................... $31,000

2008......................................................................................... $32,000

2009 ......................................................................................... $33,000

2010 ......................................................................................... $34,000

2011 ......................................................................................... $40,000

2012 ......................................................................................... $45,000

2013 and thereafter ................................................................. $50,000. 

4 ‘‘(iii) In the case of a married indi5 vidual filing a separate return, zero. 

6 ‘‘(4) SPECIAL RULE FOR MARRIED INDIVIDUALS

7 FILING SEPARATELY AND LIVING APART.—A hus8 band and wife who— 

9 ‘‘(A) file separate returns for any taxable 

10 year, and 

11 ‘‘(B) live apart at all times during such 

12 taxable year, shall not be treated as married in13 dividuals for purposes of this subsection. 
80 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(5) ACTIVE PARTICIPANT.—For purposes of 

2 this subsection, the term ‘active participant’ means, 

3 with respect to any plan year, an individual— 

4 ‘‘(A) who is an active participant in— 

5 ‘‘(i) a plan described in section 401(a) 

6 which includes a trust exempt from tax, 

7 ‘‘(ii) an annuity plan described in sec8 tion 403(a), 

9 ‘‘(iii) a plan established for its em10 ployees by the United States, by a State or 

11 political subdivision thereof, or by an agen12 cy or instrumentality of any of the fore13 going, 

14 ‘‘(iv) an annuity contract described in 

15 section 403(b), 

16 ‘‘(v) a simplified employee pension 

17 (within the meaning of section 408(k)), or 

18 ‘‘(vi) any simple retirement account 

19 (within the meaning of section 408(p)), or 

20 ‘‘(B) who makes deductible contributions 

21 to a trust described in section 501(c)(18). 

22 The determination of whether an individual is an ac23 tive participant shall be made without regard to 

24 whether or not such individual’s rights under a plan, 

25 trust, or contract are nonforfeitable. An eligible de-
81 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ferred compensation plan (within the meaning of 

2 section 457(b) of the Internal Revenue Code of 

3 1986) shall not be treated as a plan described in 

4 subparagraph (A)(iii). 

5 ‘‘(6) CERTAIN INDIVIDUALS NOT TREATED AS

6 ACTIVE PARTICIPANTS.—For purposes of this sub7 section, any individual described in any of the fol8 lowing subparagraphs shall not be treated as an ac9 tive participant for any taxable year solely because 

10 of any participation so described: 

11 ‘‘(A) MEMBERS OF RESERVE COMPO12 NENTS.—Participation in a plan described in 

13 subparagraph (A)(iii) of paragraph (5) by rea14 son of service as a member of a reserve compo15 nent of the Armed Forces (as defined in section 

16 10101 of title 10, unless such individual has 

17 served in excess of 90 days on active duty 

18 (other than active duty for training) during the 

19 year. 

20 ‘‘(B) VOLUNTEER FIREFIGHTERS.—A vol21 unteer firefighter— 

22 ‘‘(i) who is a participant in a plan de23 scribed in subparagraph (A)(iii) of para24 graph (5) based on his activity as a volun25 teer firefighter, and 
82 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(ii) whose accrued benefit as of the 

2 beginning of the taxable year is not more 

3 than an annual benefit of $1,800 (when 

4 expressed as a single life annuity com5 mencing at age 65). 

6 ‘‘(7) SPECIAL RULE FOR CERTAIN SPOUSES.— 

7 In the case of an individual who is an active partici8 pant at no time during any plan year ending with 

9 or within the taxable year but whose spouse is an 

10 active participant for any part of any such plan 

11 year— 

12 ‘‘(A) the applicable dollar amount under 

13 paragraph (3)(B)(i) with respect to the tax14 payer shall be $150,000, and 

15 ‘‘(B) the amount applicable under para16 graph (2)(A)(ii) shall be $10,000. 

17 ‘‘(h) CROSS REFERENCE.—For failure to provide re18 quired reports, see section 6652(g). 

19 ‘‘SEC. 32. EFFECT OF REPEAL OF SPECIAL SAVINGS PROVI20 SIONS. 

21 ‘‘(a) EDUCATION IRA’S.— 

22 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—An account that qualifies 

23 as an education IRA under the Internal Revenue 

24 Code of 1986 as in effect immediately before adop25 tion of the Simplified USA Tax Act shall be treated 
83 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 as a Roth IRA for purposes of this chapter (includ2 ing rules allowing for tax-free rollover). 

3 ‘‘(2) NO NEW CONTRIBUTIONS.—Neither para4 graph (1) nor section 530 of the Internal Revenue 

5 Code of 1986 shall apply to an education IRA to 

6 which contributions are made after December 31, 

7 2006. 

8 ‘‘(3) SPECIAL RULE.—For purposes of applying 

9 section 30 to an account that was an educational 

10 IRA, the designated beneficiary of such account 

11 shall be treated as described in a subclause of clause 

12 (vi) of section 30(d)(5). 

13 ‘‘(b) MEDICAL SAVINGS ACCOUNTS.— 

14 ‘‘(1) EQUIVALENT OF DEDUCTIBLE IRA.—A 

15 medical savings account shall be treated as an indi16 vidual retirement plan other than a Roth IRA for 

17 purposes of this chapter and chapter 3. 

18 ‘‘(2) SPECIAL ROLLOVER RULES.— 

19 ‘‘(A) NO INCOME LIMIT.—The income lim20 its of section 30(c)(3)(B) shall not apply to the 

21 rollover of a medical savings account into a 

22 Roth IRA. 

23 ‘‘(B) MEDICAL DISTRIBUTIONS.—For pur24 poses of applying section 30 to the amount of 

25 any medical savings account rolled over to a 
84 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 Roth IRA, subclause (iii) of section 30(d)(5) 

2 shall apply without regard to the limitation 

3 based on adjusted gross income. 

4 ‘‘(3) MEDICAL SAVINGS ACCOUNT.—‘Medical 

5 savings account’ means an account established under 

6 section 220 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986. 

7 ‘‘(c) QUALIFIED STATE TUITION PROGRAMS.— 

8 ‘‘(1) EDUCATION SAVINGS ACCOUNT PRO9 GRAMS.—No account shall fail to qualify as a Roth 

10 IRA merely because in addition to the beneficiary of 

11 the account, there is a ‘designated beneficiary’ whose 

12 education expenses the beneficiary expects to pay or 

13 have paid with the proceeds of the account. The pay14 ment of such expenses with the proceeds of an ac15 count shall be treated as a distribution from the ac16 count. 

17 ‘‘(2) PREPAID TUITION CERTIFICATES.— 

18 ‘‘(A) CONTRIBUTION TO ACCOUNTS.—An 

19 individual may contribute prepaid tuition cer20 tificates to a Roth IRA before January 1, 2010, 

21 without recognizing gross income on the con22 tribution of such certificates. For purposes of 

23 section 30, the amount contributed shall equal 

24 the cost of the certificates. 
85 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) PURCHASE OF PREPAID TUITION

2 CERTIFICATES.—A Roth IRA account may pur3 chase prepaid tuition certificates without vio4 lating section 408. 

5 ‘‘(C) PREPAID TUITION CERTIFICATES.— 

6 ‘Prepaid tuition certificates’ means credits or 

7 certificates that entitle a designated beneficiary 

8 of such certificates to the waiver or payment of 

9 qualified higher education expenses of the des10 ignated beneficiary. 

11 ‘‘(3) ROLLOVER OF ACCOUNTS.—An account to 

12 which section 529 of the Internal Revenue Code of 

13 1986 (before adoption of the Simplified USA Tax 

14 Act) shall be treated as a Roth IRA for purposes of 

15 rules relating to qualified rollovers (except that in 

16 the case of any such rollover, any contributions 

17 made to the section 529 account after July 1, 2006, 

18 shall be treated as contributions to the Roth IRA in 

19 the year of the rollover for purposes of section 

20 30(c)(2)). 

21 ‘‘(4) TRANSITION.— 

22 ‘‘(A) TRANSITION PERIOD.—Subsections 

23 (a) and (c) of section 529 of the Internal Rev24 enue Code of 1986 shall apply until January 1, 

25 2010. 
86 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) TRANSITION.—The Secretary shall 

2 prescribe rules to facilitate use of the Roth IRA 

3 rules to exempt earnings on accounts and cer4 tificates previously exempted under section 529 

5 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986. 

6 ‘‘(5) QUALIFIED HIGHER EDUCATION EX7 PENSES.—For purposes of this subsection, the defi8 nition ‘qualified higher education expenses’ in sec9 tion 529(e)(3) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 

10 shall apply. 

11 ‘‘SEC. 33. ANNUITIES, CERTAIN PROCEEDS OF ENDOWMENT 

12 AND LIFE INSURANCE CONTRACTS. 

13 ‘‘(a) GENERAL RULE FOR ANNUITIES.—Except as 

14 otherwise provided in this chapter, gross income includes 

15 any amount received as an annuity (whether for a period 

16 certain or during one or more lives) under an annuity, en17 dowment, or life insurance contract. 

18 ‘‘(b) EXCLUSION RATIO.— 

19 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—Gross income does not in20 clude that part of any amount received as an annu21 ity under an annuity, endowment, or life insurance 

22 contract which bears the same ratio to such amount 

23 as the investment in the contract (as of the annuity 

24 starting date) bears to the expected return under the 

25 contract (as of such date). 
87 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) EXCLUSION LIMITED TO INVESTMENT.— 

2 The portion of any amount received as an annuity 

3 which is excluded from gross income under para4 graph (1) shall not exceed the unrecovered invest5 ment in the contract immediately before the receipt 

6 of such amount. 

7 ‘‘(3) DEDUCTION WHERE ANNUITY PAYMENTS

8 CEASE BEFORE ENTIRE INVESTMENT RECOVERED.— 

9 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—If— 

10 ‘‘(i) after the annuity starting date, 

11 payments as an annuity under the contract 

12 cease by reason of the death of an annu13 itant, and 

14 ‘‘(ii) as of the date of such cessation, 

15 there is unrecovered investment in the con16 tract, the amount of such unrecovered in17 vestment (in excess of any amount speci18 fied in subsection (e)(5) which was not in19 cluded in gross income) shall be allowed as 

20 a deduction from adjusted gross income in 

21 determining taxable income of the annu22 itant for his last taxable year. 

23 ‘‘(B) PAYMENTS TO OTHER PERSONS.—In 

24 the case of any contract which provides for pay25 ments meeting the requirements of subpara-
88 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 graphs (B) and (C) of subsection (c)(2), the de2 duction under subparagraph (A) shall be al3 lowed to the person entitled to such payments 

4 for the taxable year in which such payments are 

5 received. 

6 ‘‘(c) DEFINITIONS.— 

7 ‘‘(1) INVESTMENT IN THE CONTRACT.—For 

8 purposes of subsection (b), the investment in the 

9 contract as of the annuity starting date is— 

10 ‘‘(A) the aggregate amount of premiums or 

11 other consideration paid for the contract (in12 cluding any amounts earned on the contract 

13 which were included in gross income and rein14 vested in the contract), minus 

15 ‘‘(B) the aggregate amount received under 

16 the contract before such date, to the extent that 

17 such amount was excludable from gross income 

18 under this subtitle or prior income tax laws. 

19 ‘‘(2) OTHER TERMS USED IN SUBSECTION

20 (b).—Calculations under subsections (a) and (b) 

21 shall be made in accordance with regulations pre22 scribed by the Secretary, which regulations shall 

23 generally be consistent with the section 72 of the In24 ternal Revenue Code of 1986. 
89 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(d) SPECIAL RULES FOR QUALIFIED EMPLOYER

2 RETIREMENT PLANS.— 

3 ‘‘(1) SIMPLIFIED METHOD OF TAXING ANNUITY

4 PAYMENTS.— 

5 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—In the case of any 

6 amount received as an annuity under a quali7 fied employer retirement plan— 

8 ‘‘(i) subsection (b) shall not apply, 

9 and 

10 ‘‘(ii) the investment in the contract 

11 shall be recovered as provided in this para12 graph. 

13 ‘‘(B) METHOD OF RECOVERING INVEST14 MENT IN CONTRACT.— 

15 ‘‘(i) IN GENERAL.—Gross income 

16 shall not include so much of any monthly 

17 annuity payment under a qualified em18 ployer retirement plan as does not exceed 

19 the amount obtained by dividing— 

20 ‘‘(I) the investment in the con21 tract (as of the annuity starting date), 

22 by 

23 ‘‘(II) the number of anticipated 

24 payments determined under the table 

25 contained in clause (iii) (or, in the 
90 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 case of a contract to which subsection 

2 (c)(3)(B) applies, the number of 

3 monthly annuity payments under such 

4 contract). 

5 ‘‘(ii) CERTAIN RULES MADE APPLICA6 BLE.—Rules similar to the rules of para7 graphs (2) and (3) of subsection (b) shall 

8 apply for purposes of this paragraph. 

9 ‘‘(iii) NUMBER OF ANTICIPATED PAY10 MENTS.—If the annuity is payable over the 

11 life of a single individual, the number of 

12 anticipated payments shall be determined 

13 as follows: 

‘‘If the age of the annuitant 

on the annuity starting 

date is: The number: 

Not more than 55 .............................................................................. 360

More than 55 but not more than 60 ................................................. 310

More than 60 but not more than 65 ................................................. 260

More than 65 but not more than 70 ................................................. 210

More than 70 ..................................................................................... 160. 

14 ‘‘(iv) NUMBER OF ANTICIPATED PAY15 MENTS WHERE MORE THAN ONE LIFE.—If 

16 the annuity is payable over the lives of 

17 more than 1 individual, the number of an18 ticipated payments shall be determined as 

19 follows: 

‘‘If the combined ages of the 

annuitants are: The number: 

Not more than 110 ............................................................................ 410

More than 110 but not more than 120 ............................................. 360

More than 120 but not more than 130 ............................................. 310
91 

•HR 4707 IH 

‘‘If the combined ages of the 

annuitants are: The number: 

More than 130 but not more than 140 ............................................. 260

More than 140 ................................................................................... 210. 

1 ‘‘(C) SPECIAL RULE WHERE LUMP SUM

2 PAID IN CONNECTION WITH COMMENCEMENT

3 OF ANNUITY PAYMENTS.—If, in connection with 

4 the commencement of annuity payments under 

5 any qualified employer retirement plan, the tax6 payer receives a lump sum payment— 

7 ‘‘(i) such payment shall be taxable 

8 under subsection (e) as if received before 

9 the annuity starting date, and 

10 ‘‘(ii) the investment in the contract 

11 for purposes of this paragraph shall be de12 termined as if such payment had been so 

13 received. 

14 ‘‘(D) EXCEPTION.—This paragraph shall 

15 not apply in any case where the primary annu16 itant has attained age 75 on the annuity start17 ing date unless there are fewer than 5 years of 

18 guaranteed payments under the annuity. 

19 ‘‘(E) ADJUSTMENT WHERE ANNUITY PAY20 MENTS NOT ON A MONTHLY BASIS.—In any 

21 case where the annuity payments are not made 

22 on a monthly basis, appropriate adjustments in 

23 the application of this paragraph shall be made 
92 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 to take into account the period on the basis of 

2 which such payments are made. 

3 ‘‘(F) QUALIFIED EMPLOYER RETIREMENT

4 PLAN.—For purposes of this paragraph, the 

5 term ‘qualified employer retirement plan’ means 

6 any plan or contract described in paragraph 

7 (1), (2), or (3) of section 4974(c). 

8 ‘‘(2) TREATMENT OF EMPLOYEE CONTRIBU9 TIONS UNDER DEFINED CONTRIBUTION PLANS.— 

10 For purposes of this section, employee contributions 

11 (and any income allocable thereto) under a defined 

12 contribution plan may be treated as a separate con13 tract. 

14 ‘‘(e) AMOUNTS NOT RECEIVED AS ANNUITIES.— 

15 ‘‘(1) APPLICATION OF SUBSECTION.— 

16 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—This subsection shall 

17 apply to any amount which— 

18 ‘‘(i) is received under an annuity, en19 dowment, or life insurance contract, and 

20 ‘‘(ii) is not received as an annuity, if 

21 no provision of this subtitle (other than 

22 this subsection) applies with respect to 

23 such amount. 

24 ‘‘(B) DIVIDENDS.—For purposes of this 

25 section, any amount received which is in the na-
93 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ture of a dividend or similar distribution shall 

2 be treated as an amount not received as an an3 nuity. 

4 ‘‘(2) GENERAL RULE.—Any amount to which 

5 this subsection applies— 

6 ‘‘(A) if received on or after the annuity 

7 starting date, shall be included in gross income, 

8 or 

9 ‘‘(B) if received before the annuity starting 

10 date— 

11 ‘‘(i) shall be included in gross income 

12 to the extent allocable to income on the 

13 contract, and 

14 ‘‘(ii) shall not be included in gross in15 come to the extent allocable to the invest16 ment in the contract. 

17 ‘‘(3) ALLOCATION OF AMOUNTS TO INCOME

18 AND INVESTMENT.—For purposes of paragraph 

19 (2)(B): 

20 ‘‘(A) Any amount to which this subsection 

21 applies shall be treated as allocable to income 

22 on the contract to the extent that such amount 

23 does not exceed the excess (if any) of— 

24 ‘‘(i) the cash value of the contract 

25 (determined without regard to any sur-
94 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 render charge) immediately before the 

2 amount is received, over 

3 ‘‘(ii) the investment in the contract at 

4 such time. 

5 ‘‘(B) Any amount to which this subsection 

6 applies shall be treated as allocable to invest7 ment in the contract to the extent that such 

8 amount is not allocated to income under sub9 paragraph (A). 

10 ‘‘(4) SPECIAL RULES FOR APPLICATION OF

11 PARAGRAPH (2)(b).—For purposes of paragraph 

12 (2)(B): 

13 ‘‘(A) LOANS TREATED AS DISTRIBU14 TIONS.—If, during any taxable year, an indi15 vidual— 

16 ‘‘(i) receives (directly or indirectly) 

17 any amount as a loan under any contract 

18 to which this subsection applies, or 

19 ‘‘(ii) assigns or pledges (or agrees to 

20 assign or pledge) any portion of the value 

21 of any such contract, such amount or por22 tion shall be treated as received under the 

23 contract as an amount not received as an 

24 annuity. The preceding sentence shall not 

25 apply for purposes of determining invest-
95 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ment in the contract, except that the in2 vestment in the contract shall be increased 

3 by any amount included in gross income by 

4 reason of the amount treated as received 

5 under the preceding sentence. 

6 ‘‘(B) TREATMENT OF TRANSFERS WITH7 OUT ADEQUATE CONSIDERATION.— 

8 ‘‘(i) IN GENERAL.—If an individual 

9 who holds an annuity contract transfers it 

10 without full and adequate consideration, 

11 such individual shall be treated as receiv12 ing an amount equal to the excess of— 

13 ‘‘(I) the cash surrender value of 

14 such contract at the time of transfer, 

15 over 

16 ‘‘(II) the investment in such con17 tract at such time, under the contract 

18 as an amount not received as an an19 nuity. 

20 ‘‘(ii) EXCEPTION FOR CERTAIN

21 TRANSFERS BETWEEN SPOUSES OR

22 FORMER SPOUSES.—Clause (i) shall not 

23 apply to any transfer to which section 

24 77(c) (relating to transfers of property be-
96 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 tween spouses or incident to divorce) ap2 plies. 

3 ‘‘(iii) ADJUSTMENT TO INVESTMENT

4 IN CONTRACT OF TRANSFEREE.—If under 

5 clause (i) an amount is included in the 

6 gross income of the transferor of an annu7 ity contract, the investment in the contract 

8 of the transferee in such contract shall be 

9 increased by the amount so included. 

10 ‘‘(5) RETENTION OF EXISTING RULES IN CER11 TAIN CASES.—Paragraph (5) of section 72(e) of the 

12 Internal Revenue Code of 1986 shall apply to con13 tracts described in subparagraph (B) of such para14 graph to the extent provided therein. 

15 ‘‘(6) INVESTMENT IN THE CONTRACT.—For 

16 purposes of this subsection, the investment in the 

17 contract as of any date is— 

18 ‘‘(A) the aggregate amount of premiums or 

19 other consideration paid for the contract before 

20 such date, minus 

21 ‘‘(B) the aggregate amount received under 

22 the contract before such date, to the extent that 

23 such amount was excludable from gross income 

24 under this subtitle or prior income tax laws. 
97 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(7) APPLICATION OF PARAGRAPH (2)(b) TO

2 QUALIFIED PLANS.— 

3 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—Notwithstanding any 

4 other provision of this subsection, in the case of 

5 any amount received before the annuity starting 

6 date from a trust or contract described in para7 graph (5)(D), paragraph (2)(B) shall apply to 

8 such amounts. 

9 ‘‘(B) ALLOCATION OF AMOUNT RE10 CEIVED.—For purposes of paragraph (2)(B), 

11 the amount allocated to the investment in the 

12 contract shall be the portion of the amount de13 scribed in subparagraph (A) which bears the 

14 same ratio to such amount as the investment in 

15 the contract bears to the account balance. The 

16 determination under the preceding sentence 

17 shall be made as of the time of the distribution 

18 or at such other time as the Secretary may pre19 scribe. 

20 ‘‘(C) TREATMENT OF FORFEITABLE

21 RIGHTS.—If an employee does not have a non22 forfeitable right to any amount under any trust 

23 or contract to which subparagraph (A) applies, 

24 such amount shall not be treated as part of the 

25 account balance. 
98 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(D) INVESTMENT IN THE CONTRACT BE2 FORE 1987.—In the case of a plan which on 

3 May 5, 1986, permitted withdrawal of any em4 ployee contributions before separation from 

5 service, subparagraph (A) shall apply only to 

6 the extent that amounts received before the an7 nuity starting date (when increased by amounts 

8 previously received under the contract after De9 cember 31, 1986) exceed the investment in the 

10 contract as of December 31, 1986. 

11 ‘‘(8) TREATMENT OF MODIFIED ENDOWMENT

12 CONTRACTS.— 

13 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—Notwithstanding para14 graph (5)(C), in the case of any modified en15 dowment contract (as defined in section 

16 7702A)— 

17 ‘‘(i) paragraphs (2)(B) and (4)(A) 

18 shall apply, and 

19 ‘‘(ii) in applying paragraph (4)(A), 

20 ‘any person’ shall be substituted for ‘an in21 dividual’. 

22 ‘‘(B) TREATMENT OF CERTAIN BURIAL

23 CONTRACTS.—Notwithstanding subparagraph 

24 (A), paragraph (4)(A) shall not apply to any as25 signment (or pledge) of a modified endowment 
99 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 contract if such assignment (or pledge) is solely 

2 to cover the payment of expenses referred to in 

3 section 7702(e)(2)(C)(iii) and if the maximum 

4 death benefit under such contract does not ex5 ceed $25,000. 

6 ‘‘(9) ANTI-ABUSE RULES.— 

7 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—For purposes of deter8 mining the amount includible in gross income 

9 under this subsection— 

10 ‘‘(i) all modified endowment contracts 

11 issued by the same company to the same 

12 policyholder during any calendar year shall 

13 be treated as 1 modified endowment con14 tract, and 

15 ‘‘(ii) all annuity contracts issued by 

16 the same company to the same policyholder 

17 during any calendar year shall be treated 

18 as 1 annuity contract. 

19 The preceding sentence shall not apply to any 

20 contract described in paragraph (5)(D). 

21 ‘‘(B) REGULATORY AUTHORITY.—The Sec22 retary may by regulations prescribe such addi23 tional rules as may be necessary or appropriate 

24 to prevent avoidance of the purposes of this 
100 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 subsection through serial purchases of contracts 

2 or otherwise. 

3 ‘‘(f) SPECIAL RULES FOR COMPUTING EMPLOYEES’ 

4 CONTRIBUTIONS.—In computing, for purposes of sub5 section (c)(1)(A), the aggregate amount of premiums or 

6 other consideration paid for the contract, and for purposes 

7 of subsection (e)(6), the aggregate premiums or other con8 sideration paid, amounts contributed by the employer shall 

9 be included, but only to the extent that— 

10 ‘‘(1) such amounts were includible in the gross 

11 income of the employee under this subtitle or prior 

12 income tax laws; or 

13 ‘‘(2) if such amounts had been paid directly to 

14 the employee at the time they were contributed, they 

15 would not have been includible in the gross income 

16 of the employee under the law applicable at the time 

17 of such contribution. 

18 ‘‘(g) RULES FOR TRANSFEREE WHERE TRANSFER

19 WAS FOR VALUE.—Where any contract (or any interest 

20 therein) is transferred (by assignment or otherwise) for 

21 a valuable consideration, to the extent that the contract 

22 (or interest therein) does not, in the hands of the trans23 feree, have a basis which is determined by reference to 

24 the basis in the hands of the transferor, then— 
101 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(1) for purposes of this section, only the ac2 tual value of such consideration, plus the amount of 

3 the premiums and other consideration paid by the 

4 transferee after the transfer, shall be taken into ac5 count in computing the aggregate amount of the 

6 premiums or other consideration paid for the con7 tract; 

8 ‘‘(2) for purposes of subsection (c)(1)(B), there 

9 shall be taken into account only the aggregate 

10 amount received under the contract by the trans11 feree before the annuity starting date, to the extent 

12 that such amount was excludable from gross income 

13 under this subtitle or prior income tax laws; and 

14 ‘‘(3) the annuity starting date is January 1, 

15 1954, or the first day of the first period for which 

16 the transferee received an amount under the con17 tract as an annuity, whichever is the later. 

18 ‘‘(h) OPTION TO RECEIVE ANNUITY IN LIEU OF

19 LUMP SUM.—If— 

20 ‘‘(1) a contract provides for payment of a lump 

21 sum in full discharge of an obligation under the con22 tract, subject to an option to receive an annuity in 

23 lieu of such lump sum; 
102 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) the option is exercised within 60 days after 

2 the day on which such lump sum first became pay3 able; and 

4 ‘‘(3) part or all of such lump sum would (but 

5 for this subsection) be includible in gross income by 

6 reason of subsection (e)(1), then, for purposes of 

7 this subtitle, no part of such lump sum shall be con8 sidered as includible in gross income at the time 

9 such lump sum first became payable. 

10 ‘‘(i) INTEREST.—Notwithstanding any other provi11 sion of this section, if any amount is held under an agree12 ment to pay interest thereon, the interest payments shall 

13 be included in gross income. 

14 ‘‘(j) FACE-AMOUNT CERTIFICATES.—For purposes of 

15 this section, the term ‘endowment contract’ includes a 

16 face-amount certificate, as defined in section 2(a)(15) of 

17 the Investment Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C., sec. 

18 80a–2), issued after December 31, 1954. 

19 ‘‘(k) SPECIAL RULES APPLICABLE TO EMPLOYEE

20 ANNUITIES AND DISTRIBUTIONS UNDER EMPLOYEE

21 PLANS.— 

22 ‘‘(1) COMPUTATION OF CONSIDERATION PAID

23 BY THE EMPLOYEE.—In computing— 

24 ‘‘(A) the aggregate amount of premiums or 

25 other consideration paid for the contract for 
103 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 purposes of subsection (c)(1)(A) (relating to the 

2 investment in the contract), and 

3 ‘‘(B) the aggregate premiums or other con4 sideration paid for purposes of subsection (e)(6) 

5 (relating to certain amounts not received as an 

6 annuity), any amount allowed as a deduction 

7 with respect to the contract under section 404 

8 which was paid while the employee was an em9 ployee within the meaning of section 401(c)(1) 

10 shall be treated as consideration contributed by 

11 the employer, and there shall not be taken into 

12 account any portion of the premiums or other 

13 consideration for the contract paid while the 

14 employee was an owner-employee which is prop15 erly allocable (as determined under regulations 

16 prescribed by the Secretary) to the cost of life, 

17 accident, health, or other insurance. 

18 ‘‘(2) LIFE INSURANCE CONTRACTS.— 

19 ‘‘(A) This paragraph shall apply to any life 

20 insurance contract— 

21 ‘‘(i) purchased as a part of a plan de22 scribed in section 403(a), or 

23 ‘‘(ii) purchased by a trust described in 

24 section 401(a) which is exempt from tax if 

25 the proceeds of such contract are payable 
104 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 directly or indirectly to a participant in 

2 such trust or to a beneficiary of such par3 ticipant. 

4 ‘‘(B) Any contribution to a plan described 

5 in subparagraph (A)(i) or a trust described in 

6 subparagraph (A)(ii) which is allowed as a de7 duction under section 404, and any income of 

8 a trust described in subparagraph (A)(ii), which 

9 is determined in accordance with regulations 

10 prescribed by the Secretary to have been ap11 plied to purchase the life insurance protection 

12 under a contract described in subparagraph 

13 (A), is includible in the gross income of the par14 ticipant for the taxable year when so applied. 

15 ‘‘(C) In the case of the death of an indi16 vidual insured under a contract described in 

17 subparagraph (A), an amount equal to the cash 

18 surrender value of the contract immediately be19 fore the death of the insured shall be treated as 

20 a payment under such plan or a distribution by 

21 such trust, and the excess of the amount pay22 able by reason of the death of the insured over 

23 such cash surrender value shall not be includ24 ible in gross income under this section and shall 

25 be treated as provided in section 101. 
105 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(3) PENALTIES APPLICABLE TO CERTAIN

2 AMOUNTS RECEIVED BY 5-PERCENT OWNERS.— 

3 ‘‘(A) This paragraph applies to amounts 

4 which are received from a qualified trust de5 scribed in section 401(a) or under a plan de6 scribed in section 403(a) at any time by an in7 dividual who is, or has been, a 5-percent owner, 

8 or by a successor of such an individual, but only 

9 to the extent such amounts are determined, 

10 under regulations prescribed by the Secretary, 

11 to exceed the benefits provided for such indi12 vidual under the plan formula. 

13 ‘‘(B) If a person receives an amount to 

14 which this paragraph applies, his tax under this 

15 chapter for the taxable year in which such 

16 amount is received shall be increased by an 

17 amount equal to 10 percent of the portion of 

18 the amount so received which is includible in 

19 his gross income for such taxable year. 

20 ‘‘(C) For purposes of this paragraph, the 

21 term ‘5-percent owner’ means any individual 

22 who, at any time during the 5 plan years pre23 ceding the plan year ending in the taxable year 

24 in which the amount is received, is a 5-percent 

25 owner (as defined in section 416(i)(1)(B). 
106 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(4) OWNER-EMPLOYEE DEFINED.—For pur2 poses of this subsection, the term ‘owner-employee’ 

3 has the meaning assigned to it by section 401(c)(3) 

4 and includes an individual for whose benefit an indi5 vidual retirement account or annuity described in 

6 section 408(a) or (b) is maintained. For purposes of 

7 the preceding sentence, the term ‘owner-employee’ 

8 shall include an employee within the meaning of sec9 tion 401(c)(1). 

10 ‘‘(5) MEANING OF DISABLED.—For purposes of 

11 this section, an individual shall be considered to be 

12 disabled if he is unable to engage in any substantial 

13 gainful activity by reason of any medically deter14 minable physical or mental impairment which can be 

15 expected to result in death or to be of long-continued 

16 and indefinite duration. An individual shall not be 

17 considered to be disabled unless he furnishes proof 

18 of the existence thereof in such form and manner as 

19 the Secretary may require. 

20 ‘‘(6) DETERMINATION OF INVESTMENT IN THE

21 CONTRACT IN THE CASE OF QUALIFIED DOMESTIC

22 RELATIONS ORDERS.—Under regulations prescribed 

23 by the Secretary, in the case of a distribution or 

24 payment made to an alternate payee who is the 

25 spouse or former spouse of the participant pursuant 
107 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 to a qualified domestic relations order (as defined in 

2 section 414(p)), the investment in the contract as of 

3 the date prescribed in such regulations shall be allo4 cated on a pro rata basis between the present value 

5 of such distribution or payment and the present 

6 value of all other benefits payable with respect to the 

7 participant to which such order relates. 

8 ‘‘(l) ANNUITIES UNDER RETIRED SERVICEMAN’S

9 FAMILY PROTECTION PLAN OR SURVIVOR BENEFIT

10 PLAN.—Subsection (b) shall not apply in the case of 

11 amounts received after December 31, 1965, as an annuity 

12 under chapter 73 of title 10 of the United States Code, 

13 but all such amounts shall be excluded from gross income 

14 until there has been so excluded (under section 122(b)(1) 

15 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, section 93, or this 

16 section, including amounts excluded before January 1, 

17 1966) an amount equal to the consideration for the con18 tract (as defined by section 122(b)(2) of the Internal Rev19 enue Code of 1986). Thereafter all amounts so received 

20 shall be included in gross income. 

21 ‘‘(m) SPECIAL RULES FOR DISTRIBUTIONS FROM

22 QUALIFIED PLANS TO WHICH EMPLOYEE MADE DE23 DUCTIBLE CONTRIBUTIONS.— 

24 ‘‘(1) TREATMENT OF CONTRIBUTIONS.—For 

25 purposes of this section and sections 402 and 403, 
108 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 notwithstanding section 414(h), any deductible em2 ployee contribution made to a qualified employer 

3 plan or government plan shall be treated as an 

4 amount contributed by the employer which is not in5 cludible in the gross income of the employee. 

6 ‘‘(2) AMOUNTS CONSTRUCTIVELY RECEIVED.— 

7 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—For purposes of this 

8 subsection, rules similar to the rules provided 

9 by subsection (n) (other than the exception con10 tained in paragraph (2) thereof) shall apply. 

11 ‘‘(B) PURCHASE OF LIFE INSURANCE.—To 

12 the extent any amount of accumulated deduct13 ible employee contributions of an employee are 

14 applied to the purchase of life insurance con15 tracts, such amount shall be treated as distrib16 uted to the employee in the year so applied. 

17 ‘‘(3) SPECIAL RULE FOR TREATMENT OF ROLL18 OVER AMOUNTS.—For purposes of sections 402(c), 

19 403(a)(4), and 408(d)(3), the Secretary shall pre20 scribe regulations providing for such allocations of 

21 amounts attributable to accumulated deductible em22 ployee contributions, and for such other rules, as 

23 may be necessary to insure that such accumulated 

24 deductible employee contributions do not become eli-
109 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 gible for additional tax benefits (or freed from limi2 tations) through the use of rollovers. 

3 ‘‘(4) ORDERING RULES.—Unless the plan speci4 fies otherwise, any distribution from such plan shall 

5 not be treated as being made from the accumulated 

6 deductible employee contributions, until all other 

7 amounts to the credit of the employee have been dis8 tributed. 

9 ‘‘(n) LOANS TREATED AS DISTRIBUTIONS.—For pur10 poses of this section— 

11 ‘‘(1) TREATMENT AS DISTRIBUTIONS.— 

12 ‘‘(A) LOANS.—If during any taxable year a 

13 participant or beneficiary receives (directly or 

14 indirectly) any amount as a loan from a quali15 fied employer plan, such amount shall be treat16 ed as having been received by such individual as 

17 a distribution under such plan. 

18 ‘‘(B) ASSIGNMENTS OR PLEDGES.—If dur19 ing any taxable year a participant or beneficiary 

20 assigns (or agrees to assign) or pledges (or 

21 agrees to pledge) any portion of his interest in 

22 a qualified employer plan, such portion shall be 

23 treated as having been received by such indi24 vidual as a loan from such plan. 

25 ‘‘(2) EXCEPTION FOR CERTAIN LOANS.— 
110 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(A) GENERAL RULE.—Paragraph (1) 

2 shall not apply to any loan to the extent that 

3 such loan (when added to the outstanding bal4 ance of all other loans from such plan whether 

5 made on, before, or after August 13, 1982), 

6 does not exceed the lesser of— 

7 ‘‘(i) $50,000, reduced by the excess (if 

8 any) of— 

9 ‘‘(I) the highest outstanding bal10 ance of loans from the plan during the 

11 1-year period ending on the day be12 fore the date on which such loan was 

13 made, over 

14 ‘‘(II) the outstanding balance of 

15 loans from the plan on the date on 

16 which such loan was made, or 

17 ‘‘(ii) the greater of (I) one-half of the 

18 present value of the nonforfeitable accrued 

19 benefit of the employee under the plan, or 

20 (II) $10,000. 

21 for purposes of clause (ii), the present value of 

22 the nonforfeitable accrued benefit shall be de23 termined without regard to any accumulated 

24 deductible employee contributions (as defined in 

25 subsection (m)(5)(B)). 
111 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) REQUIREMENT THAT LOAN BE RE2 PAYABLE WITHIN 5 YEARS.— 

3 ‘‘(i) IN GENERAL.—Subparagraph (A) 

4 shall not apply to any loan unless such 

5 loan, by its terms, is required to be repaid 

6 within 5 years. 

7 ‘‘(ii) EXCEPTION FOR HOME LOANS.— 

8 Clause (i) shall not apply to any loan used 

9 to acquire any dwelling unit which within 

10 a reasonable time is to be used (deter11 mined at the time the loan is made) as the 

12 principal residence of the participant. 

13 ‘‘(C) REQUIREMENT OF LEVEL AMORTIZA14 TION.—Except as provided in regulations, this 

15 paragraph shall not apply to any loan unless 

16 substantially level amortization of such loan 

17 (with payments not less frequently than quar18 terly) is required over the term of the loan. 

19 ‘‘(D) RELATED EMPLOYERS AND RELATED

20 PLANS.—For purposes of this paragraph— 

21 ‘‘(i) the rules of subsections (b), (c), 

22 and (m) of section 414 shall apply, and 

23 ‘‘(ii) all plans of an employer (deter24 mined after the application of such sub25 sections) shall be treated as 1 plan. 
112 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(o) 10-PERCENT PENALTY FOR PREMATURE DIS2 TRIBUTIONS FROM ANNUITY CONTRACTS.— 

3 ‘‘(1) IMPOSITION OF PENALTY.—If any tax4 payer receives any amount under an annuity con5 tract, the taxpayer’s tax under this chapter for the 

6 taxable year in which such amount is received shall 

7 be increased by an amount equal to 10 percent of 

8 the portion of such amount which is includible in 

9 gross income. 

10 ‘‘(2) SUBSECTION NOT TO APPLY TO CERTAIN

11 DISTRIBUTIONS.—Paragraph (1) shall not apply to 

12 any distribution— 

13 ‘‘(A) made on or after the date on which 

the taxpayer attains age 591 14 ⁄2, 

15 ‘‘(B) made on or after the death of the 

16 holder (or, where the holder is not an indi17 vidual, the death of the primary annuitant), 

18 ‘‘(C) attributable to the taxpayer’s becom19 ing disabled within the meaning of subsection 

20 (k)(5), 

21 ‘‘(D) which is a part of a series of substan22 tially equal periodic payments (not less fre23 quently than annually) made for the life (or life 

24 expectancy) of the taxpayer or the joint lives 
113 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 (or joint life expectancies) of such taxpayer and 

2 his designated beneficiary, 

3 ‘‘(E) from a plan, contract, account, trust, 

4 or annuity described in section 72(e)(5)(D) of 

5 the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, 

6 ‘‘(F) allocable to investment in the con7 tract before August 14, 1982, 

8 ‘‘(G) under a qualified funding asset, 

9 ‘‘(H) to which subsection (r) applies (with10 out regard to paragraph (2) thereof), 

11 ‘‘(I) under an immediate annuity contract, 

12 or 

13 ‘‘(J) which is purchased by an employer 

14 upon the termination of a plan described in sec15 tion 401(a) or 403(a) and which is held by the 

16 employer until such time as the employee sepa17 rates from service. 

18 ‘‘(3) CHANGE IN SUBSTANTIALLY EQUAL PAY19 MENTS.—If— 

20 ‘‘(A) paragraph (1) does not apply to a 

21 distribution by reason of paragraph (2)(D), and 

22 ‘‘(B) the series of payments under such 

23 paragraph are subsequently modified (other 

24 than by reason of death or disability)— 
114 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(i) before the close of the 5-year pe2 riod beginning on the date of the first pay3 ment and after the taxpayer attains age 

591 4 ⁄2, or 

5 ‘‘(ii) before the taxpayer attains age 

591 6 ⁄2, the taxpayer’s tax for the 1st taxable 

7 year in which such modification occurs 

8 shall be increased by an amount, deter9 mined under regulations, equal to the tax 

10 which (but for paragraph (2)(D)) would 

11 have been imposed, plus interest for the 

12 deferral period (within the meaning of sub13 section (r)(4)(B)). 

14 ‘‘(p) CERTAIN RAILROAD RETIREMENT BENEFITS

15 TREATED AS RECEIVED UNDER EMPLOYER PLANS.— 

16 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—Notwithstanding any other 

17 provision of law, any benefit provided under the 

18 Railroad Retirement Act of 1974 (other than a tier 

19 1 railroad retirement benefit) shall be treated for 

20 purposes of this title as a benefit provided under an 

21 employer plan which meets the requirements of sec22 tion 401(a). 

23 ‘‘(2) TIER 2 TAXES TREATED AS CONTRIBU24 TIONS.—For purposes of paragraph (1)— 

25 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.— 
115 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(i) the tier 2 portion of the tax im2 posed by section 3201 (relating to tax on 

3 employees) shall be treated as an employee 

4 contribution, 

5 ‘‘(ii) the tier 2 portion of the tax im6 posed by section 3211 (relating to tax on 

7 employee representatives) shall be treated 

8 as an employee contribution, and 

9 ‘‘(iii) the tier 2 portion of the tax im10 posed by section 3221 (relating to tax on 

11 employers) shall be treated as an employer 

12 contribution. 

13 ‘‘(B) TIER 2 PORTION.—For purposes of 

14 subparagraph (A)— 

15 ‘‘(i) AFTER 1984.—With respect to 

16 compensation paid after 1984, the tier 2 

17 portion shall be the taxes imposed by sec18 tions 3201(b), 3211(a)(2), and 3221(b). 

19 ‘‘(ii) BEFORE 1985.—With respect to 

20 compensation paid before 1985, see section 

21 72(r) of Internal Revenue Code of 1986 

22 for the definition of tier 2 portion. 

23 ‘‘(C) CONTRIBUTIONS NOT ALLOCABLE TO

24 SUPPLEMENTAL ANNUITY OR WINDFALL BENE25 FITS.—For purposes of paragraph (1), no 
116 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 amount treated as an employee contribution 

2 under this paragraph shall be allocated to— 

3 ‘‘(i) any supplemental annuity paid 

4 under section 2(b) of the Railroad Retire5 ment Act of 1974, or 

6 ‘‘(ii) any benefit paid under section 

7 3(h), 4(e), or 4(h) of such Act. 

8 ‘‘(3) TIER 1 RAILROAD RETIREMENT BEN9 EFIT.—For purposes of paragraph (1), the term 

10 ‘tier 1 railroad retirement benefit’ has the meaning 

11 given such term by section 3(b)(2)(B). 

12 ‘‘(q) REQUIRED DISTRIBUTIONS WHERE HOLDER

13 DIES BEFORE ENTIRE INTEREST IS DISTRIBUTED.— 

14 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—A contract shall not be 

15 treated as an annuity contract for purposes of this 

16 chapter unless it provides that— 

17 ‘‘(A) if any holder of such contract dies on 

18 or after the annuity starting date and before 

19 the entire interest in such contract has been 

20 distributed, the remaining portion of such inter21 est will be distributed at least as rapidly as 

22 under the method of distributions being used as 

23 of the date of his death, and 

24 ‘‘(B) if any holder of such contract dies be25 fore the annuity starting date, the entire inter-
117 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 est in such contract will be distributed within 5 

2 years after the death of such holder. 

3 ‘‘(2) EXCEPTION FOR CERTAIN AMOUNTS PAY4 ABLE OVER LIFE OF BENEFICIARY.—If— 

5 ‘‘(A) any portion of the holder’s interest is 

6 payable to (or for the benefit of) a designated 

7 beneficiary, 

8 ‘‘(B) such portion will be distributed (in 

9 accordance with regulations) over the life of 

10 such designated beneficiary (or over a period 

11 not extending beyond the life expectancy of 

12 such beneficiary), and 

13 ‘‘(C) such distributions begin not later 

14 than 1 year after the date of the holder’s death 

15 or such later date as the Secretary may by reg16 ulations prescribe, then for purposes of para17 graph (1), the portion referred to in subpara18 graph (A) shall be treated as distributed on the 

19 day on which such distributions begin. 

20 ‘‘(3) SPECIAL RULE WHERE SURVIVING SPOUSE

21 BENEFICIARY.—If the designated beneficiary re22 ferred to in paragraph (2)(A) is the surviving spouse 

23 of the holder of the contract, paragraphs (1) and (2) 

24 shall be applied by treating such spouse as the hold25 er of such contract. 
118 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(4) DESIGNATED BENEFICIARY.—For pur2 poses of this subsection, the term ‘designated bene3 ficiary’ means any individual designated a bene4 ficiary by the holder of the contract. 

5 ‘‘(5) EXCEPTION FOR CERTAIN ANNUITY CON6 TRACTS.—This subsection shall not apply to any an7 nuity contract— 

8 ‘‘(A) which is provided— 

9 ‘‘(i) under a plan described in section 

10 401(a) which includes a trust exempt from 

11 tax under section 501, or 

12 ‘‘(ii) under a plan described in section 

13 403(a), 

14 ‘‘(B) which is described in section 403(b), 

15 ‘‘(C) which is an individual retirement an16 nuity or provided under an individual retire17 ment account or annuity, or 

18 ‘‘(D) which is a qualified funding asset. 

19 ‘‘(6) SPECIAL RULE WHERE HOLDER IS COR20 PORATION OR OTHER NON-INDIVIDUAL.— 

21 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—For purposes of this 

22 subsection, if the holder of the contract is not 

23 an individual, the primary annuitant shall be 

24 treated as the holder of the contract. 
119 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) PRIMARY ANNUITANT.—For purposes 

2 of subparagraph (A), the term ‘primary annu3 itant’ means the individual, the events in the 

4 life of whom are of primary importance in af5 fecting the timing or amount of the payout 

6 under the contract. 

7 ‘‘(7) TREATMENT OF CHANGES IN PRIMARY AN8 NUITANT WHERE HOLDER OF CONTRACT IS NOT AN

9 INDIVIDUAL.—For purposes of this subsection, in 

10 the case of a holder of an annuity contract which is 

11 not an individual, if there is a change in a primary 

12 annuitant (as defined in paragraph (6)(B)), such 

13 change shall be treated as the death of the holder. 

14 ‘‘(r) 10-PERCENT ADDITIONAL TAX ON EARLY DIS15 TRIBUTIONS FROM QUALIFIED RETIREMENT PLANS.— 

16 ‘‘(1) IMPOSITION OF ADDITIONAL TAX.—If any 

17 taxpayer receives any amount from a qualified re18 tirement plan (as defined in section 4974(c)), the 

19 taxpayer’s tax under this chapter for the taxable 

20 year in which such amount is received shall be in21 creased by an amount equal to 10 percent of the 

22 portion of such amount which is includible in gross 

23 income. 

24 ‘‘(2) SUBSECTION NOT TO APPLY TO CERTAIN

25 DISTRIBUTIONS.—Except as provided in paragraphs 
120 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 (3) and (4), paragraph (1) shall not apply to any of 

2 the following distributions: 

3 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—Distributions which 

4 are— 

5 ‘‘(i) made on or after the date on 

which the employee attains age 591 6 ⁄2, 

7 ‘‘(ii) made to a beneficiary (or to the 

8 estate of the employee) on or after the 

9 death of the employee, 

10 ‘‘(iii) attributable to the employee’s 

11 being disabled within the meaning of sub12 section 72(m)(7) of the Internal Revenue 

13 Code of 1986, 

14 ‘‘(iv) part of a series of substantially 

15 equal periodic payments (not less fre16 quently than annually) made for the life 

17 (or life expectancy) of the employee or the 

18 joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of 

19 such employee and his designated bene20 ficiary, 

21 ‘‘(v) made to an employee after sepa22 ration from service after attainment of age 

23 55, 
121 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(vi) dividends paid with respect to 

2 stock of a corporation which are described 

3 in section 404(k), or 

4 ‘‘(vii) made from a Roth IRA (other 

5 than a distribution described in section 

6 30(d)(2)). 

7 ‘‘(B) MEDICAL EXPENSES.—Distributions 

8 made to the employee (other than distributions 

9 described in subparagraph (A), (C), or (D)) to 

10 the extent such distributions do not exceed the 

11 amount allowable as a deduction under section 

12 31 to the employee for amounts paid during the 

13 taxable year for medical care (determined with14 out regard to whether the employee itemizes de15 ductions for such taxable year). 

16 ‘‘(C) PAYMENTS TO ALTERNATE PAYEES

17 PURSUANT TO QUALIFIED DOMESTIC RELA18 TIONS ORDERS.—Any distribution to an alter19 nate payee pursuant to a qualified domestic re20 lations order (within the meaning of section 

21 414(p)(1)). 

22 ‘‘(D) DISTRIBUTIONS TO UNEMPLOYED IN23 DIVIDUALS FOR HEALTH INSURANCE PRE24 MIUMS.— 
122 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(i) IN GENERAL.—Distributions from 

2 an individual retirement plan to an indi3 vidual after separation from employment— 

4 ‘‘(I) if such individual has re5 ceived unemployment compensation 

6 for 12 consecutive weeks under any 

7 Federal or State unemployment com8 pensation law by reason of such sepa9 ration, 

10 ‘‘(II) if such distributions are 

11 made during any taxable year during 

12 which such unemployment compensa13 tion is paid or the succeeding taxable 

14 year, and 

15 ‘‘(III) to the extent such distribu16 tions do not exceed the amount paid 

17 during the taxable year for insurance 

18 described in section 213(d)(1)(D) of 

19 the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 

20 with respect to the individual and the 

21 individual’s spouse and dependents. 

22 ‘‘(ii) DISTRIBUTIONS AFTER REEM23 PLOYMENT.—Clause (i) shall not apply to 

24 any distribution made after the individual 

25 has been employed for at least 60 days 
123 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 after the separation from employment to 

2 which clause (i) applies. 

3 ‘‘(iii) SELF-EMPLOYED INDIVID4 UALS.—To the extent provided in regula5 tions, a self-employed individual shall be 

6 treated as meeting the requirements of 

7 clause (i)(I) if, under Federal or State law, 

8 the individual would have received unem9 ployment compensation but for the fact the 

10 individual was self-employed. 

11 ‘‘(E) DISTRIBUTIONS FROM INDIVIDUAL

12 RETIREMENT PLANS FOR HIGHER EDUCATION

13 EXPENSES.—Distributions to an individual 

14 from an individual retirement plan to the extent 

15 such distributions do not exceed the qualified 

16 higher education expenses (as defined in para17 graph (7)) of the taxpayer for the taxable year. 

18 Distributions shall not be taken into account 

19 under the preceding sentence if such distribu20 tions are described in subparagraph (A), (C), or 

21 (D) or to the extent paragraph (1) does not 

22 apply to such distributions by reason of sub23 paragraph (B). 

24 ‘‘(F) DISTRIBUTIONS FROM CERTAIN

25 PLANS FOR FIRST HOME PURCHASES.—Dis-
124 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 tributions to an individual from an individual 

2 retirement plan which are qualified first-time 

3 homebuyer distributions (as defined in para4 graph (8)). Distributions shall not be taken into 

5 account under the preceding sentence if such 

6 distributions are described in subparagraph (A), 

7 (C), (D), or (E) or to the extent paragraph (1) 

8 does not apply to such distributions by reason 

9 of subparagraph (B). 

10 ‘‘(3) LIMITATIONS.— 

11 ‘‘(A) CERTAIN EXCEPTIONS NOT TO APPLY

12 TO INDIVIDUAL RETIREMENT PLANS.—Sub13 paragraphs (A)(v), and (C) of paragraph (2) 

14 shall not apply to distributions from an indi15 vidual retirement plan. 

16 ‘‘(B) PERIODIC PAYMENTS UNDER QUALI17 FIED PLANS MUST BEGIN AFTER SEPARA18 TION.—Paragraph (2)(A)(iv) shall not apply to 

19 any amount paid from a trust described in sec20 tion 401(a) which is exempt from tax under 

21 section 501(a) or from a contract described in 

22 section 72(e)(5)(D)(ii) of the Internal Revenue 

23 Code of 1986 unless the series of payments be24 gins after the employee separates from service. 
125 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(4) CHANGE IN SUBSTANTIALLY EQUAL PAY2 MENTS.— 

3 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—If— 

4 ‘‘(i) paragraph (1) does not apply to 

5 a distribution by reason of paragraph 

6 (2)(A)(iv), and 

7 ‘‘(ii) the series of payments under 

8 such paragraph are subsequently modified 

9 (other than by reason of death or dis10 ability)— 

11 ‘‘(I) before the close of the 5-year 

12 period beginning with the date of the 

13 first payment and after the employee 

attains age 591 14 ⁄2, or 

15 ‘‘(II) before the employee attains 

age 591 16 ⁄2, the taxpayer’s tax for the 

17 1st taxable year in which such modi18 fication occurs shall be increased by 

19 an amount, determined under regula20 tions, equal to the tax which (but for 

21 paragraph (2)(A)(iv)) would have 

22 been imposed, plus interest for the de23 ferral period. 

24 ‘‘(B) DEFERRAL PERIOD.—For purposes 

25 of this paragraph, the term ‘deferral period’ 
126 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 means the period beginning with the taxable 

2 year in which (without regard to paragraph 

3 (2)(A)(iv)) the distribution would have been in4 cludible in gross income and ending with the 

5 taxable year in which the modification described 

6 in subparagraph (A) occurs. 

7 ‘‘(5) EMPLOYEE.—For purposes of this sub8 section, the term ‘employee’ includes any partici9 pant, and in the case of an individual retirement 

10 plan, the individual for whose benefit such plan was 

11 established. 

12 ‘‘(6) SPECIAL RULES FOR SIMPLE RETIREMENT

13 ACCOUNTS.—In the case of any amount received 

14 from a simple retirement account (within the mean15 ing of section 408(p) during the 2-year period begin16 ning on the date such individual first participated in 

17 any qualified salary reduction arrangement main18 tained by the individual’s employer under section 

19 408(p)(2), paragraph (1) shall be applied by sub20 stituting ‘25 percent’ for ‘10 percent’. 

21 ‘‘(7) QUALIFIED HIGHER EDUCATION EX22 PENSES.—For purposes of paragraph (2)(E)— 

23 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—The term ‘qualified 

24 higher education expenses’ means qualified 
127 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 higher education expenses (as defined in section 

2 8(b)(2)) for education furnished to— 

3 ‘‘(i) the taxpayer, 

4 ‘‘(ii) the taxpayer’s spouse, or 

5 ‘‘(iii) any child or grandchild of the 

6 taxpayer or the taxpayer’s spouse, at an el7 igible educational institution (as defined in 

8 section 8(b)(2)(B)). 

9 ‘‘(B) COORDINATION WITH OTHER PROVI10 SIONS.—For purposes of this subsection, sec11 tion 30 and section 32, qualified higher edu12 cation expenses in any taxable year shall be 

13 treated as first paid with distributions under 

14 section 32, next with distributions to which sec15 tion 30(d)(5)(v) (relating to early withdrawals 

16 from Roth IRAs to pay higher education ex17 penses) applies, and finally from withdrawals to 

18 which this subsection applies. 

19 ‘‘(8) QUALIFIED FIRST-TIME HOMEBUYER DIS20 TRIBUTIONS.—For purposes of this subsection, the 

21 term ‘qualified first-time homebuyer distribution’ 

22 has the meaning given to it in section 30(d)(6) and 

23 the limits contained in such section shall apply on a 

24 combined basis to this subsection and section 30. 

25 Qualified acquisition costs (as defined in section 
128 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 30(d)(6)) taken into account for purposes of section 

2 30(d)(5)(vi) shall not also be taken into account sep3 arately for purposes of this subsection. A taxpayer 

4 may elect to treat distributions from an account 

5 other than Roth IRAs to which this subsection ap6 plies as a qualified first-time homeowner distribution 

7 before determining whether a distribution from a 

8 Roth IRA is a qualified first-time homeowner dis9 tribution. 

10 ‘‘(s) 10-PERCENT ADDITIONAL TAX FOR TAXABLE

11 DISTRIBUTIONS FROM MODIFIED ENDOWMENT CON12 TRACTS.— 

13 ‘‘(1) IMPOSITION OF ADDITIONAL TAX.—If any 

14 taxpayer receives any amount under a modified en15 dowment contract (as defined in section 7702A), the 

16 taxpayer’s tax under this chapter for the taxable 

17 year in which such amount is received shall be in18 creased by an amount equal to 10 percent of the 

19 portion of such amount which is includible in gross 

20 income. 

21 ‘‘(2) SUBSECTION NOT TO APPLY TO CERTAIN

22 DISTRIBUTIONS.—Paragraph (1) shall not apply to 

23 any distribution— 

24 ‘‘(A) made on or after the date on which 

the taxpayer attains age 591 25 ⁄2, 
129 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) which is attributable to the tax2 payer’s becoming disabled (within the meaning 

3 of subsection (m)(7)), or 

4 ‘‘(C) which is part of a series of substan5 tially equal periodic payments (not less fre6 quently than annually) made for the life (or life 

7 expectancy) of the taxpayer or the joint lives 

8 (or joint life expectancies) of such taxpayer and 

9 his beneficiary. 

10 ‘‘Subchapter C—Basis, Business Transactions 

11 and Nonrecognition Transactions 

‘‘Sec. 71. Gain or loss on the sale of an asset. 

‘‘Sec. 72. Basis. 

‘‘Sec. 73. Basis in business entities. 

‘‘Sec. 74. Gratuitous transfers. 

‘‘Sec. 75. Transactions involving business entities. 

‘‘Sec. 76. Rollover on residence sale. 

‘‘Sec. 77. Other nonrecognition transactions. 

‘‘Sec. 78. Wash sales and straddles. 

12 ‘‘SEC. 71. GAIN OR LOSS ON THE SALE OF AN ASSET. 

13 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—Except as otherwise provided in 

14 this chapter, the amount of gross income to be recognized 

15 on the sale, exchange, or other disposition of property 

16 equals the excess of— 

17 ‘‘(1) the amount realized from the disposition, 

18 over 

19 ‘‘(2) the taxpayer’s adjusted basis in the prop20 erty. 
130 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(b) AMOUNT REALIZED.—The amount realized from 

2 the disposition of property shall be the sum of money re3 ceived plus the fair market value of the property (other 

4 than money) received. See section 122(c) for the treatment 

5 of installment sales. 

6 ‘‘(c) NONRECOGNITION TRANSACTION.—Subsection 

7 (a) shall not apply to nonrecognition transactions de8 scribed in this chapter. 

9 ‘‘(d) CONTRACTS MARKED TO MARKET.— 

10 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—Under regulations pre11 scribed by the Secretary, a markable contract held 

12 by the taxpayer at the end of the year shall be treat13 ed as sold and reacquired for its fair market value 

14 on the last business day of the taxable year. The 

15 regulations shall adopt principles and definitions 

16 similar to those that applied under section 1256 of 

17 the Internal Revenue Code of 1986. 

18 ‘‘(2) MARKABLE CONTRACT.—For purposes of 

19 this subsection, ‘markable contract’ means— 

20 ‘‘(A) any regulated futures contract, 

21 ‘‘(B) any foreign currency contract, 

22 ‘‘(C) any nonequity option, 

23 ‘‘(D) any dealer equity option 

24 as such terms were defined for purposes of section 

25 1256 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986. 
131 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘SEC. 72. BASIS. 

2 ‘‘(a) BASIS, SALE, OR EXCHANGE.—Except to the ex3 tent inconsistent with provisions of this chapter, adjusted 

4 basis and the existence of a sale or exchange shall be de5 termined in accordance with principles applicable under 

6 the Internal Revenue Code of 1986. 

7 ‘‘(b) DEFINITION OF BASIS.—For purposes of this 

8 chapter, ‘basis’ means the adjusted basis of property. The 

9 adjusted basis of property is generally its cost, as adjusted 

10 for actions or transactions that increase or decrease the 

11 basis of property. Except as provided in section 73 (relat12 ing to business entities and basis in business entities), the 

13 taxpayer’s adjusted basis on January 1, 2007, in an asset 

14 acquired before that date, shall be its adjusted basis as 

15 of December 31, 2006, as determined under the Internal 

16 Revenue Code of 1986. 

17 ‘‘SEC. 73. BASIS IN BUSINESS ENTITIES. 

18 ‘‘(a) RULES FOR ALL BUSINESS ENTITIES.— 

19 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—A taxpayer’s basis in an in20 terest in a business entity shall equal— 

21 ‘‘(A) the cost of acquiring the interest, 

22 ‘‘(B) increased by the amount of cash and 

23 basis of any property contributed to the entity, 

24 and 

25 ‘‘(C) decreased by the portion of any liqui26 dating distributions from the entity that are 
132 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 treated as returns of capital in accordance with 

2 rules prescribed by the Secretary. 

3 ‘‘(2) INITIAL BASIS.—Except as otherwise pro4 vided in this section, a taxpayer’s basis on January 

5 1, 2007, or any interest in a business entity held as 

6 of December 31, 2006, shall be the basis of such in7 terest as of December 31, 2006, as determined 

8 under the Internal Revenue Code of 1986. 

9 ‘‘(3) CROSS REFERENCES.—See section 75 for 

10 rules relating to the effect of certain business trans11 actions on a taxpayer’s basis. 

12 ‘‘(4) SPECIAL RULE FOR CONTRIBUTION OF

13 PERSONAL USE PROPERTY.—If a taxpayer contrib14 utes personal-use property (as defined in section 

15 210(b)(3)(B)), the taxpayer’s basis in the property 

16 shall not be increased by an amount in excess of the 

17 fair market value of the property contributed. 

18 ‘‘(b) SPECIAL RULES FOR PARTNERSHIP INTER19 ESTS.— 

20 ‘‘(1) INITIAL BASIS IN OLD PARTNERSHIPS.—A 

21 partner’s basis in a partnership interest as of Janu22 ary 1, 2007, equals— 

23 ‘‘(A) the partner’s basis in the partnership 

24 as of the end of the taxable year ending on De25 cember 31, 2006 minus 
133 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) the amount of the partner’s share of 

2 the indebtedness of the partnership taken into 

3 account in determining such basis. 

4 ‘‘(2) NEGATIVE BASIS.—If the amount deter5 mined under paragraph (1) is negative, the taxpayer 

6 has a negative basis in the partnership and such 

7 negative basis shall increase the gain on the sale or 

8 disposition of the partnership interest (except to the 

9 extent such negative basis has been adjusted by rea10 son of capital contributions). 

11 ‘‘(3) ADJUSTMENT TO BASIS.—Except as other12 wise provided in this section, a partner’s basis in a 

13 partnership interest shall be determined in accord14 ance with the general principles of this chapter ap15 plicable to an individual’s basis in an interest in a 

16 business entity. A partner’s basis in a partnership 

17 shall not be adjusted by reason of any— 

18 ‘‘(A) distribution from the partnership (ex19 cept to the extent such distribution is treated as 

20 distribution of basis in accordance with the gen21 eral principles of this chapter applicable to an 

22 individual’s basis in an interest in a business 

23 entity), 

24 ‘‘(B) income, earnings, or loss of the part25 nership, or 
134 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(C) any change in the partner’s share of 

2 the partnership’s indebtedness. 

3 ‘‘(4) SPECIAL RULE FOR TRANSITION DISTRIBU4 TIONS.— 

5 ‘‘(A) EFFECT OF TRANSITION DISTRIBU6 TION.—A transition distribution from partner7 ship to a partner shall— 

8 ‘‘(i) reduce the partner’s basis in the 

9 partnership, and 

10 ‘‘(ii) not be included in gross income. 

11 ‘‘(B) DEFINITION.—A ‘transition distribu12 tion’ is a distribution by a business entity to an 

13 individual made during the first three months 

14 of 2006 but only to the extent that such dis15 tribution, when added to all other distributions 

16 of the entity to the individual after March 31, 

17 2006, does not exceed the amount of taxable in18 come allocated by the entity to the individual 

19 during the taxable year of the entity ending on 

20 December 31, 2006. 

21 ‘‘(5) PARTNERSHIP.—For purposes of this sec22 tion, ‘partnership’ includes a limited liability com23 pany that was taxable as a partnership under the 

24 Internal Revenue Code of 1986. 
135 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(c) SPECIAL RULES FOR SHARES OF S CORPORA2 TIONS.—Rules similar to those contained in subsection (b) 

3 shall apply with respect to the basis of stock of a corpora4 tion that was treated as an S corporation under the Inter5 nal Revenue Code of 1986. 

6 ‘‘(d) SPECIAL RULES FOR PROPRIETORSHIPS.— 

7 ‘‘(1) OLD PROPRIETORSHIP.—A proprietor’s 

8 basis in any business activity conducted before Janu9 ary 1, 2007, which is treated as a business activity 

10 as of such date equals— 

11 ‘‘(A) the proprietor’s adjusted basis in the 

12 assets of such business entity as of the end of 

13 the taxable year ending on December 31, 2006, 

14 minus 

15 ‘‘(B) the balance of any indebtedness the 

16 interest on which the proprietor had treated as 

17 business interest under section 163(h)(2)(A) of 

18 the Internal Revenue Code of 1986. 

19 ‘‘(2) NEGATIVE BASIS.—If the amount deter20 mined under paragraph (1) is negative, the propri21 etor has a negative basis in the proprietorship and 

22 such negative basis shall increase the gain on the 

23 sale or disposition of the entity (except to the extent 

24 such negative basis has been adjusted by reason of 

25 capital contributions). 
136 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(3) ADJUSTMENT TO BASIS.—Except as other2 wise provided in this section, a proprietor’s basis in 

3 a proprietorship shall be determined in accordance 

4 with the general principles of this chapter applicable 

5 to an individual’s basis in an interest in a business 

6 entity. 

7 ‘‘(4) PROPRIETORSHIP.—‘Proprietorship’ in8 cludes— 

9 ‘‘(A) any family business that is not a 

10 partnership, and 

11 ‘‘(B) any business activity conducted by a 

12 taxpayer other than as an employee if such ac13 tivity constitutes a business entity. 

14 ‘‘(e) ANTI-AVOIDANCE RULE.— 

15 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—If a pass-through entity’s 

16 distributions to an individual in its taxable year or 

17 taxable years ending in 2006 exceeds 125 percent of 

18 the individual’s distributive share of income for such 

19 period, the amount of such excess distribution shall 

20 be treated as a cash distribution to the partner on 

21 January 1, 2007, and shall not reduce the partner’s 

22 basis in his partnership interest. 

23 ‘‘(2) PASS THROUGH ENTITY.—‘Pass through 

24 entity’ means a partnership, proprietorship, or S 

25 corporation. 
137 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘SEC. 74. GRATUITOUS TRANSFERS. 

2 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—If after December 31, 2006, a 

3 taxpayer receives any property by gift, inheritance, or 

4 other gratuitous transfer, the taxpayer’s basis in the prop5 erty shall be the lesser of— 

6 ‘‘(1) the fair market value of the property at 

7 the time of transfer, or 

8 ‘‘(2) the transferee’s basis in the property at 

9 the time of transfer. 

10 ‘‘(b) PROOF REQUIRED.—A taxpayer’s basis in an 

11 asset received by gift, inheritance, or other gratuitous 

12 transfer shall be presumed to be zero unless the taxpayer 

13 can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Secretary the 

14 basis claimed by the taxpayer. 

15 ‘‘SEC. 75. DISTRIBUTIONS FROM BUSINESS ENTITIES. 

16 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—Except as otherwise provided in 

17 this section or in regulations issued by the Secretary in 

18 accordance with this section— 

19 ‘‘(1) CASH DISTRIBUTIONS.—Distributions of 

20 cash by a business entity with respect to its equity 

21 ownership shall be treated as dividends and included 

22 in gross income. 

23 ‘‘(2) DISTRIBUTIONS OF PROPERTY.—If a busi24 ness entity distributes property (other than stock or 

25 other equity ownership described in paragraph (3) in 

26 connection with a merger, acquisition or reorganiza-
138 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 tion), the fair market value of the property received 

2 shall be treated as a dividend and included in gross 

3 income. 

4 ‘‘(3) DISTRIBUTIONS OF STOCK OR OTHER EQ5 UITY OWNERSHIP.—If a taxpayer receives with re6 spect to its ownership interest in a business entity 

7 stock or other ownership interests in such business 

8 entity (as reorganized) or in another business entity 

9 that is controlled by such business entity or is ac10 quiring or merging with such business entity, no 

11 gain or loss shall be recognized on the distribution. 

12 ‘‘(b) BASIS IN BUSINESS DIVISIONS.—In the case of 

13 a spin-off, split-off, or split-up of a business entity in 

14 which a taxpayer has basis, the taxpayer’s basis in the 

15 original business entity shall be allocated among the new 

16 and surviving entities in accordance with the relative fair 

17 market values of the taxpayer’s interests in those entities. 

18 If interests in the entities are publicly traded, fair market 

19 values shall be based on public trading prices. In other 

20 cases, the Secretary shall accept any reasonable allocation 

21 made by the taxpayer if the taxpayer notifies the Secretary 

22 of the allocation in an attachment to its tax return for 

23 the taxable year of the transaction. 

24 ‘‘(c) DISTRIBUTIONS CONSTITUTING RETURN OF

25 BASIS.— 
139 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(1) COMPLETE LIQUIDATIONS.— 

2 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—In the case of a dis3 tribution in complete liquidation of a business 

4 entity, a taxpayer shall be treated as receiving 

5 cash and assets of the entity in exchange for 

6 the taxpayer’s equity in the business entity. In 

7 such case, the taxpayer shall recognize gain to 

8 the extent that the sum of the cash and fair 

9 market value of assets received exceeds the tax10 payer’s basis in its interest in the business enti11 ty or shall recognize loss to the extent that the 

12 basis exceeds the fair market value of cash and 

13 assets received. 

14 ‘‘(B) DISTRIBUTION OF EQUITY INTER15 ESTS.—In the case of a complete liquidation in 

16 which at least 90 percent of the value of assets 

17 and cash distributed to an equity holder is eq18 uity interests in other business entities con19 trolled by the distributing entity— 

20 ‘‘(i) subparagraph (A) shall not apply, 

21 ‘‘(ii) paragraph (3) of subsection (a) 

22 shall apply, 

23 ‘‘(iii) the cash and fair market value 

24 of assets other than equity interests in 

25 controlled entities shall be applied to re-
140 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 duce the taxpayer’s basis in the distrib2 uting entity and gain will be recognized 

3 only to the extent that the cash and such 

4 fair market value exceeds the taxpayer’s 

5 basis in the distributing entity, and 

6 ‘‘(iv) the taxpayer’s remaining basis 

7 shall be allocated among the distributed 

8 equity interests in controlled entities in ac9 cordance with the relative fair market val10 ues of such interests. 

11 ‘‘(C) DISTRIBUTION OF BUSINESS PROP12 ERTY.—Under regulations prescribed by the 

13 Secretary, rules similar to those that applied to 

14 partnerships under the Internal Revenue Code 

15 of 1986 shall apply in lieu of subparagraph (A) 

16 to distributions that include property used in a 

17 trade or business if such property is contributed 

18 to a new business entity within 180 days of the 

19 distribution. 

20 ‘‘(2) TRANSITION RULES.—See subsections (b) 

21 and (d) of section 73 for transition rules relating to 

22 partnerships and proprietorships. 

23 ‘‘(d) DEFINITIONS AND SPECIAL RULES.— 

24 ‘‘(1) CERTAIN RULES OF APPLICATION.— 
141 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(A) PRINCIPLES APPLICABLE TO INTER2 NAL REVENUE CODE.—This section shall be ap3 plied without regard to— 

4 ‘‘(i) continuity of business interest, 

5 ‘‘(ii) continuity of ownership interest, 

6 ‘‘(iii) requirements of section 355 of 

7 the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 for 

8 spin-offs, split-offs and split-ups, 

9 ‘‘(iv) business purposes for a cor10 porate reorganization or restructuring (ex11 cept if the transaction is potentially abu12 sive), and 

13 ‘‘(v) except as provided in paragraph 

14 (3), rules treating dividends as returns of 

15 capital because of the absence of earnings 

16 and profits. 

17 ‘‘(B) CONSTRUCTIVE RECEIPT.—If a tax18 payer is given the choice of receiving cash or an 

19 equity interest in a business entity, the tax20 payer will be treated for purposes of this sec21 tion as if he received the cash and purchased 

22 the equity interest. 

23 ‘‘(C) DEBT VERSUS EQUITY.—The prin24 ciples distinguishing debt and equity that ap25 plied prior to the adopt of the Simplified USA 
142 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 Tax generally shall apply for purposes of apply2 ing this section. An investment in a business 

3 entity shall not be considered debt unless— 

4 ‘‘(i) it is reflected in the books and 

5 records of the business entity as debt, and 

6 ‘‘(ii) there is written evidence of the 

7 investment that treats such investment as 

8 indebtedness. 

9 ‘‘(2) CONTROL.—For purposes of this section, 

10 ‘control’ of a business entity means— 

11 ‘‘(A) ownership of more than 50 percent of 

12 the voting power held by equity holders of such 

13 entity, or 

14 ‘‘(B) ownership of rights to more than 50 

15 percent of the periodic distributions that the 

16 business entity may make to its equity holders 

17 and 50 percent of the distributions if the busi18 ness entity were liquidated. 

19 ‘‘(3) REGULATIONS.— 

20 ‘‘(A) SIGNIFICANT DOWNSIZING AND PAR21 TIAL LIQUIDATIONS.—The Secretary is author22 ized to issue regulations under which distribu23 tions resulting from a significant downsizing of 

24 a business entity will be treated in part as re25 turn of equity holders’ capital. 
143 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) ASSUMPTION AND RELEASE OF LI2 ABILITY.—The Secretary shall prescribe regula3 tions addressing the consequences of a 

4 distributee’s assumption of the liabilities of the 

5 distributor. 

6 ‘‘SEC. 76. EXCLUSION OF GAIN FROM SALE OF PRINCIPAL 

7 RESIDENCE. 

8 ‘‘(a) EXCLUSION.—Gross income shall not include 

9 gain from the sale or exchange of property if, during the 

10 5-year period ending on the date of the sale or exchange, 

11 such property has been owned and used by the taxpayer 

12 as the taxpayer’s principal residence for periods aggre13 gating 2 years or more. 

14 ‘‘(b) LIMITATIONS.— 

15 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—The amount of gain ex16 cluded from gross income under subsection (a) with 

17 respect to any sale or exchange shall not exceed 

18 $250,000. 

19 ‘‘(2) $500,000 LIMITATION FOR CERTAIN JOINT

20 RETURNS.—Paragraph (1) shall be applied by sub21 stituting ‘$500,000’ for ‘$250,000’ if— 

22 ‘‘(A) a husband and wife make a joint re23 turn for the taxable year of the sale or ex24 change of the property, 
144 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) either spouse meets the ownership re2 quirements of subsection (a) with respect to 

3 such property, 

4 ‘‘(C) both spouses meet the use require5 ments of subsection (a) with respect to such 

6 property, and 

7 ‘‘(D) neither spouse is ineligible for the 

8 benefits of subsection (a) with respect to such 

9 property by reason of paragraph (3). 

10 ‘‘(3) APPLICATION TO ONLY 1 SALE OR EX11 CHANGE EVERY 2 YEARS.— 

12 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—Subsection (a) shall 

13 not apply to any sale or exchange by the tax14 payer if, during the 2-year period ending on the 

15 date of such sale or exchange, there was any 

16 other sale or exchange by the taxpayer to which 

17 subsection (a) applied. 

18 ‘‘(B) PRE-MAY 7, 1997, SALES NOT TAKEN

19 INTO ACCOUNT.—Subparagraph (A) shall be 

20 applied without regard to any sale or exchange 

21 before May 7, 1997. 

22 ‘‘(c) EXCLUSION FOR TAXPAYERS FAILING TO MEET

23 CERTAIN REQUIREMENTS.— 

24 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—In the case of a sale or ex25 change to which this subsection applies, the owner-
145 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ship and use requirements of subsection (a) shall not 

2 apply and subsection (b)(3) shall not apply; but the 

3 amount of gain excluded from gross income under 

4 subsection (a) with respect to such sale or exchange 

5 shall not exceed— 

6 ‘‘(A) the amount which bears the same 

7 ratio to the amount which would be so excluded 

8 under this section if such requirements had 

9 been met, as 

10 ‘‘(B) the shorter of— 

11 ‘‘(i) the aggregate periods, during the 

12 5-year period ending on the date of such 

13 sale or exchange, such property has been 

14 owned and used by the taxpayer as the 

15 taxpayer’s principal residence, or 

16 ‘‘(ii) the period after the date of the 

17 most recent prior sale or exchange by the 

18 taxpayer to which subsection (a) applied 

19 and before the date of such sale or ex20 change, 

21 bears to 2 years. 

22 ‘‘(2) SALES AND EXCHANGES TO WHICH SUB23 SECTION APPLIES.—This subsection shall apply to 

24 any sale or exchange if— 
146 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(A) subsection (a) would not (but for this 

2 subsection) apply to such sale or exchange by 

3 reason of— 

4 ‘‘(i) a failure to meet the ownership 

5 and use requirements of subsection (a), or 

6 ‘‘(ii) subsection (b)(3), and 

7 ‘‘(B) such sale or exchange is by reason of 

8 a change in place of employment, health, or, to 

9 the extent provided in regulations, unforeseen 

10 circumstances. 

11 ‘‘(d) SPECIAL RULES.— 

12 ‘‘(1) JOINT RETURNS.—If a husband and wife 

13 make a joint return for the taxable year of the sale 

14 or exchange of the property, subsections (a) and (c) 

15 shall apply if either spouse meets the ownership and 

16 use requirements of subsection (a) with respect to 

17 such property. 

18 ‘‘(2) PROPERTY OF DECEASED SPOUSE.—For 

19 purposes of this section, in the case of an unmarried 

20 individual whose spouse is deceased on the date of 

21 the sale or exchange of property, the period such un22 married individual owned and used such property 

23 shall include the period such deceased spouse owned 

24 and used such property before death. 
147 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(3) PROPERTY OWNED BY SPOUSE OR FORMER

2 SPOUSE.—For purposes of this section— 

3 ‘‘(A) PROPERTY TRANSFERRED TO INDI4 VIDUAL FROM SPOUSE OR FORMER SPOUSE.— 

5 In the case of an individual holding property 

6 transferred to such individual by such individ7 ual’s spouse or former spouse in a transaction 

8 incident to divorce, the period such individual 

9 owns such property shall include the period the 

10 transferor owned the property. 

11 ‘‘(B) PROPERTY USED BY FORMER SPOUSE

12 PURSUANT TO DIVORCE DECREE, ETC.—Solely 

13 for purposes of this section, an individual shall 

14 be treated as using property as such individ15 ual’s principal residence during any period of 

16 ownership while such individual’s spouse or 

17 former spouse is granted use of the property 

18 under a divorce or separation instrument. 

19 ‘‘(4) TENANT-STOCKHOLDER IN COOPERATIVE

20 HOUSING CORPORATION.—For purposes of this sec21 tion, if the taxpayer holds stock as a tenant-stock22 holder in a cooperative housing corporation— 

23 ‘‘(A) the holding requirements of sub24 section (a) shall be applied to the holding of 

25 such stock, and 
148 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) the use requirements of subsection 

2 (a) shall be applied to the house or apartment 

3 which the taxpayer was entitled to occupy as 

4 such stockholder. 

5 ‘‘(5) INVOLUNTARY CONVERSIONS.—For pur6 poses of this section, the destruction, theft, seizure, 

7 requisition, or condemnation of property shall be 

8 treated as the sale of such property. 

9 ‘‘(6) DETERMINATION OF USE DURING PERIODS

10 OF OUT-OF-RESIDENCE CARE.—In the case of a tax11 payer who— 

12 ‘‘(A) becomes physically or mentally in13 capable of self-care, and 

14 ‘‘(B) owns property and uses such property 

15 as the taxpayer’s principal residence during the 

16 5-year period described in subsection (a) for pe17 riods aggregating at least 1 year, then the tax18 payer shall be treated as using such property as 

19 the taxpayer’s principal residence during any 

20 time during such 5-year period in which the 

21 taxpayer owns the property and resides in any 

22 facility (including a nursing home) licensed by 

23 a State or political subdivision to care for an in24 dividual in the taxpayer’s condition. 
149 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(7) SALES OF REMAINDER INTERESTS.—For 

2 purposes of this section— 

3 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—At the election of the 

4 taxpayer, this section shall not fail to apply to 

5 the sale or exchange of an interest in a prin6 cipal residence by reason of such interest being 

7 a remainder interest in such residence, but this 

8 section shall not apply to any other interest in 

9 such residence which is sold or exchanged sepa10 rately. 

11 ‘‘(B) EXCEPTION FOR SALES TO RELATED

12 PARTIES.—Subparagraph (A) shall not apply to 

13 any sale to, or exchange with, a related party 

14 (as defined in section 171). 

15 ‘‘(e) DENIAL OF EXCLUSION FOR EXPATRIATES.— 

16 This section shall not apply to any sale or exchange by 

17 an individual if rules relating to expatriation to avoid tax 

18 apply to such individual. 

19 ‘‘(f) ELECTION TO HAVE SECTION NOT APPLY.— 

20 This section shall not apply to any sale or exchange with 

21 respect to which the taxpayer elects not to have this sec22 tion apply. 

23 ‘‘(g) RESIDENCES ACQUIRED IN ROLLOVERS UNDER

24 SECTION 1034.—For purposes of this section, in the case 

25 of property the acquisition of which by the taxpayer re-
150 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 sulted under section 1034 of the Internal Revenue Code 

2 of 1986 (as in effect on the day before the date of the 

3 enactment of the Taxpayer Relief Act of 1997) in the non4 recognition of any part of the gain realized on the sale 

5 or exchange of another residence, in determining the pe6 riod for which the taxpayer has owned and used such 

7 property as the taxpayer’s principal residence, there shall 

8 be included the aggregate periods for which such other 

9 residence (and each prior residence taken into account in 

10 determining the holding period of such property) had been 

11 so owned and used. 

12 ‘‘SEC. 77. OTHER NONRECOGNITION TRANSACTIONS. 

13 ‘‘(a) INVOLUNTARY CONVERSIONS.—Under regula14 tions prescribed by the Secretary, the involuntary conver15 sion of property held by an individual shall not result in 

16 gross income to the individual to the extent that the indi17 vidual receives property in exchange for the involuntarily 

18 converted property. To the extent that income is not rec19 ognized under this subsection, the taxpayer’s basis in the 

20 converted property shall carry over to the new property. 

21 ‘‘(b) CERTAIN REACQUISITIONS OF REAL PROP22 ERTY.—Under regulations prescribed by the Secretary, 

23 gross income shall not be recognized in the case of certain 

24 reacquisitions of real property. The regulations shall adopt 
151 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 principles similar to those under section 1038 of the Inter2 nal Revenue Code of 1986. 

3 ‘‘(c) TRANSFERS OF PROPERTY BETWEEN SPOUSES

4 OR INCIDENT TO DIVORCE.— 

5 ‘‘(1) GENERAL RULE.—Gross income shall not 

6 be recognized on the transfer of property from an 

7 individual to (or in trust for the benefit of)— 

8 ‘‘(A) a spouse, or 

9 ‘‘(B) a former spouse, but only if the 

10 transfer is incident to divorce. 

11 ‘‘(2) TRANSFER TREATED AS A GIFT.—Any 

12 transfer described in paragraph (1) shall be treated 

13 as a gift. 

14 ‘‘(d) CERTAIN EXCHANGES OF INSURANCE POLI15 CIES.—Under regulations prescribed by the Secretary, 

16 gross income shall not be recognized on the exchange of 

17 insurance policies or another life insurance policy or an 

18 annuity contract or the exchange of annuity contracts. 

19 The regulations shall adopt principles similar to those 

20 under section 1035 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986. 

21 ‘‘(e) CERTAIN EXCHANGES OF UNITED STATES OB22 LIGATIONS.—When so provided by regulations promul23 gated by the Secretary in connection with the issue of obli24 gations of the United States, no gain or loss shall be rec25 ognized on the surrender to the United States of obliga-
152 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 tions of the United States issued under chapter 31 of title 

2 31 in exchange solely for other obligations issued under 

3 such chapter. 

4 ‘‘SEC. 78. WASH SALES AND STRADDLES. 

5 ‘‘(a) LOSSES FROM WASH SALES OF STOCK OR SE6 CURITIES.—Under regulations prescribed by the Sec7 retary, no loss shall be recognized on the wash sale of 

8 stock or securities. The regulations shall adopt principles 

9 similar to those under section 1091 of the Internal Rev10 enue Code of 1986. 

11 ‘‘(b) STRADDLES.—Under regulations prescribed by 

12 the Secretary, the loss that can be taken into account from 

13 1 or more straddle positions shall be limited. The regula14 tions shall adopt principles similar to those under section 

15 1038 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986. 

16 ‘‘SEC. 79. LIMITATION ON LOSSES FROM CAPITAL TRANS17 ACTIONS. 

18 ‘‘(a) NO LOSS ON PERSONAL USE PROPERTY.—No 

19 loss shall be recognized on the sale or exchange of personal 

20 use property (as defined in section 210(b)(3)(B)). 

21 ‘‘(b) LIMITATION ON NET CAPITAL LOSS.— 

22 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—Losses from sales or ex23 changes of capital assets in a taxable year shall be 

24 allowed only to the extent of the gains from such 
153 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 sales or exchanges, plus $3,000 ($1,500 in the case 

2 of a married individual filing a separate return). 

3 ‘‘(2) CAPITAL LOSS CARRYOVERS.—Under regu4 lations prescribed by the Secretary, any loss not al5 lowed by reason of paragraph (1) shall be carried 

6 over to the following taxable year and treated as a 

7 capital loss incurred in such year. There shall be no 

8 limit on the number of years that a capital loss can 

9 be carried forward. 

10 ‘‘(3) CAPITAL ASSETS.—Under regulations pre11 scribed by the Secretary, the principles of the Inter12 nal Revenue Code of 1986 (including, without limi13 tation, sections 1234 (relating to options), 1234A 

14 (relating to gains or losses from certain termi15 nations), 1253 (relating to franchises and trade16 marks) and 1258 (gain from certain financial trans17 actions) shall apply for purposes of determining 

18 what is a capital asset and whether an event is to 

19 be treated as a sale or exchange of capital assets, ex20 cept to the extent inconsistent with principles of this 

21 chapter. 

22 ‘‘(4) RECAPTURE.—If a taxpayer claimed de23 preciation, amortization or other cost recovery de24 ductions under the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 

25 with respect to property which is subsequently sold 
154 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 or exchanged in a transaction that is not treated as 

2 transaction of a business entity, the amount of gain 

3 on the exchange of such property which is treated as 

4 gain from the sale or exchange of a capital asset 

5 shall be reduced (but not below zero) by the amount 

6 of such deductions claimed with respect to the prop7 erty. 

8 ‘‘Subchapter D—Rules for Exclusions From 

9 Gross Income 

‘‘Sec. 91. Interest on tax-exempt bonds. 

‘‘Sec. 92. Combat pay. 

‘‘Sec. 93. Qualified military benefits. 

‘‘Sec. 94. Qualified foster care payments. 

‘‘Sec. 95. Compensation for injury and sickness. 

‘‘Sec. 96. Meals or lodging for convenience of employer. 

‘‘Sec. 97. Certain fringe benefits. 

10 ‘‘SEC. 91. INTEREST ON TAX-EXEMPT BONDS. 

11 ‘‘(a) EXCLUSION.—Except as provided in subsection 

12 (b), gross income does not include interest on any State 

13 or local bond. 

14 ‘‘(b) EXCEPTIONS.—Subsection (a) shall not apply 

15 to— 

16 ‘‘(1) PRIVATE ACTIVITY BOND WHICH IS NOT A

17 QUALIFIED BOND.—Any private activity bond which 

18 is not a qualified bond (within the meaning of para19 graph (3) of subsection (c)). 

20 ‘‘(2) ARBITRAGE BOND.—Any arbitrage bond. 
155 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(3) BOND NOT IN REGISTERED FORM, ETC.— 

2 Any bond unless such bond meets the applicable re3 quirements set forth in regulations. 

4 ‘‘(c) DEFINITIONS—For purposes of this section— 

5 ‘‘(1) STATE OR LOCAL BOND.—‘State or local 

6 bond’ means an obligation of a State or political 

7 subdivision thereof. 

8 ‘‘(2) STATE.—‘State’ includes the District of 

9 Columbia and any possession of the United States. 

10 ‘‘(3) QUALIFIED BOND.—‘Qualified bond’ 

11 means any private activity bond if— 

12 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—Such bond is— 

13 ‘‘(i) an exempt facility bond, 

14 ‘‘(ii) a qualified mortgage bond, 

15 ‘‘(iii) a qualified veterans’ mortgage 

16 bond, 

17 ‘‘(iv) a qualified small issue bond, 

18 ‘‘(v) a qualified student loan bond, 

19 ‘‘(vi) a qualified 253(c)(3) bond. 

20 ‘‘(B) VOLUME CAP.—Such bond is issued 

21 as part of an issue which meets the applicable 

22 volume cap requirements set forth in regula23 tions. 
156 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(C) OTHER REQUIREMENTS.—Such bond 

2 meets the applicable requirements set forth in 

3 regulations. 

4 ‘‘(d) REGULATIONS.— 

5 ‘‘(1) STATUTORY REGULATIONS.—The Sec6 retary shall publish as regulations governing the ap7 plication of this section the text of part IV of sub8 chapter B of chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code 

9 of 1986 (sections 141 through 149) with only such 

10 changes as are required to conform cross references. 

11 ‘‘(2) OTHER REGULATIONS.—The Secretary 

12 shall have the authority to promulgate such other 

13 regulations as he deems necessary or proper to im14 plement this section, except that no such regulations 

15 shall conflict with the regulations mandated by para16 graph (1) except as provided in this subtitle. 

17 ‘‘SEC. 92. COMBAT PAY. 

18 ‘‘(a) ENLISTED PERSONNEL.—Gross income does not 

19 include compensation received for active service as a mem20 ber below the grade of commissioned officer in the Armed 

21 Forces of the United States for any month during any 

22 part of which such member— 

23 ‘‘(1) served in a combat zone, or 

24 ‘‘(2) was hospitalized as a result of wounds, dis25 ease, or injury incurred while serving in a combat 
157 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 zone; but this paragraph shall not apply for any 

2 month beginning more than 2 years after the date 

3 of the termination of combatant activities in such 

4 zone. 

5 ‘‘(b) COMMISSIONED OFFICERS.—Gross income does 

6 not include so much of the compensation as does not ex7 ceed $500 received for active service as a commissioned 

8 officer in the Armed Forces of the United States for any 

9 month during any part of which such officer— 

10 ‘‘(1) served in a combat zone, or 

11 ‘‘(2) was hospitalized as a result of wounds, dis12 ease, or injury incurred while serving in a combat 

13 zone; but this paragraph shall not apply for any 

14 month beginning more than 2 years after the date 

15 of the termination of combatant activities in such 

16 zone. 

17 ‘‘(c) DEFINITIONS.—For purposes of this section— 

18 ‘‘(1) ‘Commissioned officer’ does not include a 

19 commissioned warrant officer. 

20 ‘‘(2) ‘Combat zone’ means any area which the 

21 President of the United States by Executive Order 

22 designates, for purposes of this section or cor23 responding provisions of prior income tax laws, an 

24 area in which Armed Forces of the United States 
158 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 are or have (after June 24, 1950) engaged in com2 bat. 

3 ‘‘(3) Service is performed in a combat zone only 

4 if performed on or after the date designated by the 

5 President by Executive Order as the date of the 

6 commencing of combatant activities in such zone, 

7 and on or before the date designated by the Presi8 dent by Executive Order as the date of the termi9 nation of combatant activities in such zone; except 

10 that June 25, 1950, shall be considered the date of 

11 the commencing of combatant activities in the com12 bat zone designated in Executive Order 10195. 

13 ‘‘(4) The term ‘compensation’ does not include 

14 pensions and retirement pay. 

15 ‘‘SEC. 93. QUALIFIED MILITARY BENEFIT. 

16 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—‘Qualified military benefit’ 

17 means any allowance or in-kind benefit (other than per18 sonal use of a vehicle) which— 

19 ‘‘(1) is received by any member or former mem20 ber of the uniformed service of the United States or 

21 any dependent of such member by reason of such 

22 member’s status or service as a member of such uni23 formed services, and 

24 ‘‘(2) was excludable from gross income on Sep25 tember 9, 1986, under any provision of law, regula-
159 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 tion, or administrative practice which was in effect 

2 on such date (other than a provision of this title). 

3 ‘‘(b) NO OTHER BENEFIT TO BE EXCLUDABLE AS

4 PROVIDED BY THIS TITLE.—Notwithstanding any other 

5 provision of law, no benefit shall be treated as a qualified 

6 military benefit unless such benefit— 

7 ‘‘(1) is a benefit described in subsection (a), or 

8 ‘‘(2) is excludable from gross income under this 

9 title without regard to any provision of law which is 

10 not contained in this title and which is not contained 

11 in a revenue Act. 

12 ‘‘(c) LIMITATIONS ON MODIFICATIONS.— 

13 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—Except as provided in para14 graph (2), no modification or adjustment of any 

15 qualified military benefit after September 9, 1986, 

16 shall be taken into account. 

17 ‘‘(2) EXCEPTION FOR CERTAIN ADJUSTMENTS

18 TO CASH BENEFITS.—Paragraph (1) shall not apply 

19 to any adjustment to any qualified military benefit 

20 payable in cash which— 

21 ‘‘(A) is pursuant to a provision of law or 

22 regulation (as in effect on September 9, 1986), 

23 and 
160 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) is determined by reference to any 

2 fluctuation in cost, price, currency, or other 

3 similar index. 

4 ‘‘SEC. 94. QUALIFIED FOSTER CARE PAYMENTS. 

5 ‘‘(a) QUALIFIED FOSTER CARE PAYMENT DE6 FINED.— 

7 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—‘Qualified foster care pay8 ment’ means any amount— 

9 ‘‘(A) which is paid by a state or political 

10 subdivision thereof or by a placement agency 

11 which is described in section 253(c)(3) and ex12 empt from tax under section 253(a), and 

13 ‘‘(B) which is— 

14 ‘‘(i) paid to the foster care provider 

15 for caring for a qualified foster individual 

16 in the foster care provider’s home, or 

17 ‘‘(ii) a difficulty of care payment. 

18 ‘‘(2) QUALIFIED FOSTER INDIVIDUAL.—‘Quali19 fied foster individual’ means any individual who is 

20 living in a foster family home in which such indi21 vidual was placed by— 

22 ‘‘(A) an agency of a State or a political 

23 subdivision thereof, or 

24 ‘‘(B) in the case of an individual who has 

25 not attained age 19, an organization which is li-
161 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 censed by a State (or political subdivision there2 of) as a placement agency and which is de3 scribed in section 253(c)(3) and exempt from 

4 tax under section 253(a). 

5 ‘‘(3) LIMITATION BASED ON NUMBER OF INDI6 VIDUALS OVER THE AGE OF 18.—In the case of any 

7 foster home in which there is a qualified foster care 

8 individual who has attained age 19, foster care pay9 ments (other than difficulty of care payments) for 

10 any period to which such payments relate shall not 

11 be excludable from gross income under subsection 

12 (a) to the extent such payments are made for more 

13 than 5 such qualified foster individuals. 

14 ‘‘(b) DIFFICULTY OF CARE PAYMENTS.—For pur15 poses of this section— 

16 ‘‘(1) DIFFICULTY OF CARE PAYMENTS.—‘Dif17 ficulty of care payments’ means payments to individ18 uals which are not described in subsection 

19 (a)(1)(B)(i), and which— 

20 ‘‘(A) are compensation for providing the 

21 additional care of a qualified foster individual 

22 which is— 

23 ‘‘(i) required by reason of a physical, 

24 mental, or emotional handicap of such in25 dividual with respect to which the State 
162 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 has determined that there is a need for ad2 ditional compensation, and 

3 ‘‘(ii) provided in the home of the fos4 ter care provider, and 

5 ‘‘(B) are designated by the payor as com6 pensation described in subparagraph (A). 

7 ‘‘(2) LIMITATION BASED ON NUMBER OF INDI8 VIDUALS.—In the case of any foster home, difficulty 

9 of care payments for any period to which such pay10 ments relate shall not be excludable from gross in11 come under subsection (a) to the extent such pay12 ments are made for more than— 

13 ‘‘(A) 10 qualified foster individuals who 

14 have not attained age 19, and 

15 ‘‘(B) 5 qualified foster individuals not de16 scribed in subparagraph (A). 

17 ‘‘SEC. 95. COMPENSATION FOR INJURIES OR SICKNESS. 

18 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—Gross income does not include— 

19 ‘‘(1) amounts received under workers’ com20 pensation acts as compensation for personal injuries 

21 or sickness; 

22 ‘‘(2) the amount of any damages received 

23 (whether by suit or agreement and whether as lump 

24 sums or as periodic payments) on account of per25 sonal injuries or sickness; 
163 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(3) amounts received through accident or 

2 health insurance for medical care; 

3 ‘‘(4) amounts received through accident or 

4 health insurance for personal injuries or sickness 

5 (other than for medical care), but only to the extent 

6 such amounts (A) are not attributable to contribu7 tions by the employer which were not includible in 

8 the gross income of the employee, and are (B) not 

9 paid by the employer; 

10 ‘‘(5) amounts received as pension, annuity, or 

11 similar allowance for personal injuries or sickness re12 sulting from active service in the armed forces of 

13 any country or in the Coast and Geodetic Survey or 

14 the Public Health Service, or as a disability annuity 

15 payable under the provisions of section 808 of the 

16 Foreign Service Act of 1980; and 

17 ‘‘(6) amounts received by an individual as dis18 ability income attributable to injuries incurred as a 

19 direct result of a violent attack which the Secretary 

20 of State determines to be a terrorist attack and 

21 which occurred while such individual was an em22 ployee of the United States engaged in the perform23 ance of his official duties outside the United States. 
164 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 Paragraph (2) shall not apply to any punitive dam2 ages in connection with a case not involving physical 

3 injury or physical sickness. 

4 ‘‘(b) TERMINATION OF APPLICATION OF SUBSECTION

5 (a)(4) IN CERTAIN CASES.— 

6 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—Subsection (a)(4) shall not 

7 apply in the case of an individual who is not de8 scribed in paragraph (2). 

9 ‘‘(2) INDIVIDUALS TO WHOM SUBSECTION

10 (a)(4) CONTINUES TO APPLY.—An individual is de11 scribed in this paragraph if— 

12 ‘‘(A) on or before September 24, 1975, he 

13 was entitled to receive any amount described in 

14 subsection (a)(4), 

15 ‘‘(B) on September 24, 1975, he was a 

16 member of any organization (or reserve compo17 nent thereof) referred to in subsection (a)(4) or 

18 under a binding written commitment to become 

19 such a member, 

20 ‘‘(C) he receives an amount described in 

21 subsection (a)(4) by reason of a combat-related 

22 injury, or 

23 ‘‘(D) on application therefore, he would be 

24 entitled to receive disability compensation from 

25 the Veterans’ Administration. 
165 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(3) SPECIAL RULES FOR COMBAT-RELATED IN2 JURIES.—For purposes of this subsection, the term 

3 ‘combat-related injury’ means personal injury or 

4 sickness— 

5 ‘‘(A) which is incurred— 

6 ‘‘(i) as a direct result of armed con7 flict, 

8 ‘‘(ii) while engaged in extrahazardous 

9 service, or 

10 ‘‘(iii) under conditions simulating war; 

11 or 

12 ‘‘(B) which is caused by an instrumentality 

13 of war. 

14 In the case of an individual who is not described in 

15 subparagraph (A) or (B) of paragraph (2), except as 

16 provided in paragraph (4), the only amounts taken 

17 into account under subsection (a)(4) shall be the 

18 amounts which he receives by reason of a combat19 related injury. 

20 ‘‘(4) AMOUNT EXCLUDED TO BE NOT LESS

21 THAN VETERANS’ DISABILITY COMPENSATION.—In 

22 the case of any individual described in paragraph 

23 (2), the amounts excludable under subsection (a)(4) 

24 for any period with respect to any individual shall 

25 not be less than the maximum amount which such 
166 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 individual, on application therefor, would be entitled 

2 to receive as disability compensation from the Vet3 erans’ Administration. 

4 ‘‘SEC. 96. MEALS OR LODGING FURNISHED FOR THE CON5 VENIENCE OF THE EMPLOYER. 

6 ‘‘(a) MEALS AND LODGING FURNISHED TO EM7 PLOYEE, HIS SPOUSE, AND HIS DEPENDENTS, PURSU8 ANT TO EMPLOYMENT.—There shall be excluded from 

9 gross income of an employee the value of any meals or 

10 lodging furnished to him, his spouse, or any of his depend11 ents by or on behalf of his employer for the convenience 

12 of the employer, but only if— 

13 ‘‘(1) in the case of meals, the meals are fur14 nished on the business premises of the employer, or 

15 ‘‘(2) in the case of lodging, the employee is re16 quired to accept such lodging on the business prem17 ises of his employer as a condition of his employ18 ment. 

19 ‘‘(b) SPECIAL RULES.—For the purposes of sub20 section (a)— 

21 ‘‘(1) PROVISIONS OF EMPLOYMENT CONTRACT

22 OR STATE STATUTE NOT TO BE DETERMINATIVE.— 

23 In determining whether meals or lodging are fur24 nished for the convenience of the employer, the pro25 visions of an employment contract or of a State stat-
167 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ute fixing terms of employment shall not be deter2 minative of whether the meals or lodging are in3 tended as compensation. 

4 ‘‘(2) CERTAIN FACTORS NOT TAKEN INTO AC5 COUNT WITH RESPECT TO MEALS.—In determining 

6 whether meals are furnished for the convenience of 

7 the employer, the fact that a charge is made for 

8 such meals, and the fact that the employee may ac9 cept or decline such meals, shall not be taken into 

10 account. 

11 ‘‘(3) CERTAIN FIXED CHARGES FOR MEALS.— 

12 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—If— 

13 ‘‘(i) an employee is required to pay on 

14 a periodic basis a fixed charge for his 

15 meals, and 

16 ‘‘(ii) such meals are furnished by the 

17 employer for the convenience of the em18 ployer, there shall be excluded from the 

19 employee’s gross income an amount equal 

20 to such fixed charge. 

21 ‘‘(B) APPLICATION OF SUBPARAGRAPH

22 (a).—Subparagraph (A) shall apply— 

23 ‘‘(i) whether the employee pays the 

24 fixed charge out of his stated compensation 

25 or out of his own funds, and 
168 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(ii) only if the employee is required 

2 to make the payment whether he accepts 

3 or declines the meals. 

4 ‘‘(c) EMPLOYEES LIVING IN CERTAIN CAMPS.— 

5 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—In the case of an individual 

6 who is furnished lodging in a camp located in a for7 eign country by or on behalf of his employer, such 

8 camp shall be considered to be part of the business 

9 premises of the employer. 

10 ‘‘(2) CAMP.—For purposes of this section, a 

11 camp constitutes lodging which is— 

12 ‘‘(A) provided by or on behalf of the em13 ployer for the convenience of the employer be14 cause the place at which such individual renders 

15 services is in a remote area where satisfactory 

16 housing is not available on the open market, 

17 ‘‘(B) located, as near as practicable, in the 

18 vicinity of the place at which such individual 

19 renders services, and 

20 ‘‘(C) furnished in a common area (or en21 clave) which is not available to the public and 

22 which normally accommodates 10 or more em23 ployees. 

24 ‘‘(d) LODGING FURNISHED BY CERTAIN EDU25 CATIONAL INSTITUTIONS TO EMPLOYEES.— 
169 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—In the case of an employee 

2 of an educational institution, gross income shall not 

3 include the value of qualified campus lodging fur4 nished to such employee during the taxable year. 

5 ‘‘(2) EXCEPTION IN CASES OF INADEQUATE

6 RENT.—Paragraph (1) shall not apply to the extent 

7 of the excess of— 

8 ‘‘(A) the lesser of— 

9 ‘‘(i) 5 percent of the appraised value 

10 of the qualified campus lodging, or 

11 ‘‘(ii) the average of the rentals paid 

12 by individuals (other than employees or 

13 students of the educational institution) 

14 during such calendar year for lodging pro15 vided by the educational institution which 

16 is comparable to the qualified campus lodg17 ing provided to the employee, over 

18 ‘‘(B) the rent paid by the employee for the 

19 qualified campus lodging during such calendar 

20 year. 

21 The appraised value under subparagraph (A)(i) shall 

22 be determined as of the close of the calendar year 

23 in which the taxable year begins, or, in the case of 

24 a rental period not greater than 1 year, at any time 
170 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 during the calendar year in which such period be2 gins. 

3 ‘‘(3) QUALIFIED CAMPUS LODGING.—For pur4 poses of this subsection, the term ‘qualified campus 

5 lodging’ means lodging to which subsection (a) does 

6 not apply and which is— 

7 ‘‘(A) located on, or in the proximity of, a 

8 campus of the educational institution, and 

9 ‘‘(B) furnished to the employee, his spouse, 

10 and any of his dependents by or on behalf of 

11 such institution for use as a residence. 

12 ‘‘(4) EDUCATIONAL INSTITUTION.—For pur13 poses of this paragraph, the term ‘educational insti14 tution’ means an eligible educational institution as 

15 defined in section 8(b)(2)(B). 

16 ‘‘SEC. 97. CERTAIN FRINGE BENEFITS. 

17 ‘‘(a) PURPOSE.—This section includes definitions and 

18 rules applicable to the exclusion from gross income for cer19 tain fringe benefits. 

20 ‘‘(b) NO-ADDITIONAL-COST SERVICE DEFINED.— 

21 ‘No-additional-cost service’ means any service provided by 

22 an employer to an employee for use by such employee if— 

23 ‘‘(1) such service is offered for sale to cus24 tomers in the ordinary course of the line of business 
171 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 of the employer in which the employee is performing 

2 services, and 

3 ‘‘(2) the employer incurs no substantial addi4 tional cost (including forgone revenue) in providing 

5 such service to the employee (determined without re6 gard to any amount paid by the employee for such 

7 service). 

8 ‘‘(c) QUALIFIED EMPLOYEE DISCOUNT DEFINED.— 

9 ‘‘(1) QUALIFIED EMPLOYEE DISCOUNT.—The 

10 term ‘qualified employee discount’ means any em11 ployee discount with respect to qualified property or 

12 services to the extent such discount does not ex13 ceed— 

14 ‘‘(A) in the case of property, the gross 

15 profit percentage of the price at which the prop16 erty is being offered by the employer to cus17 tomers, or 

18 ‘‘(B) in the case of services, 20 percent of 

19 the price at which the services are being offered 

20 by the employer to customers. 

21 ‘‘(2) GROSS PROFIT PERCENTAGE.— 

22 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—‘Gross profit percent23 age’ means the percent which— 

24 ‘‘(i) the excess of the aggregate sales 

25 price of property sold by the employer to 
172 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 customers over the aggregate cost of such 

2 property to the employer, is of 

3 ‘‘(ii) the aggregate sales price of such 

4 property. 

5 ‘‘(B) DETERMINATION OF GROSS PROFIT

6 PERCENTAGE.—Gross profit percentage shall be 

7 determined on the basis of— 

8 ‘‘(i) all property offered to customers 

9 in the ordinary course of the line of busi10 ness of the employer in which the employee 

11 is performing services (or a reasonable 

12 classification of property selected by the 

13 employer), and 

14 ‘‘(ii) the employer’s experience during a 

15 representative period. 

16 ‘‘(3) EMPLOYEE DISCOUNT DEFINED.—‘Em17 ployee discount’ means the amount by which— 

18 ‘‘(A) the price at which the property or 

19 services are provided by the employer to an em20 ployee for use by such employee, is less than 

21 ‘‘(B) the price at which such property or 

22 services are being offered by the employer to 

23 customers. 

24 ‘‘(4) QUALIFIED PROPERTY OR SERVICES.— 

25 ‘Qualified property or services’ means any property 
173 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 (other than real property and other than personal 

2 property of a kind held for investment) or services 

3 which are offered for sale to customers in the ordi4 nary course of the line of business of the employer 

5 in which the employee is performing services. 

6 ‘‘(c) DE MINIMIS FRINGE DEFINED.— 

7 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—‘De minimis fringe’ means 

8 any property or service the value of which is (after 

9 taking into account the frequency with which similar 

10 fringes are provided by the employer to the employ11 er’s employees) so small as to make accounting for 

12 it unreasonable or administratively impracticable. 

13 ‘‘(2) TREATMENT OF CERTAIN EATING FACILI14 TIES.—The operation by an employer of any eating 

15 facility for employees shall be treated as a de mini16 mis fringe if— 

17 ‘‘(A) such facility is located on or near the 

18 business premises of the employer, and 

19 ‘‘(B) revenue derived from such facility 

20 normally equals or exceeds the direct operating 

21 costs of such facility. 

22 The preceding sentence shall apply with respect to 

23 any highly compensated employee only if access to 

24 the facility is available on substantially the same 

25 terms to each member of a group of employees 
174 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 which is defined under a reasonable classification set 

2 up by the employer which does not discriminate in 

3 favor of highly compensated employees. 

4 ‘‘(3) ON-PREMISES GYMS AND OTHER ATHLETIC

5 FACILITIES.— 

6 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—De minimis fringe 

7 benefits include the provision of on-premises 

8 athletic facility by an employer to its employees. 

9 ‘‘(B) ON-PREMISES ATHLETIC FACILITY.— 

10 For purposes of this paragraph, ‘on-premises 

11 athletic facility’ means any gym or other ath12 letic facility— 

13 ‘‘(i) which is located on the premises 

14 of the employer, 

15 ‘‘(ii) which is operated by the em16 ployer, and 

17 ‘‘(iii) substantially all the use of which 

18 is by employees of the employer, their 

19 spouses, and their dependent children. 

20 ‘‘(d) CERTAIN EDUCATIONAL TRAINING BENE21 FITS.—Amounts paid or expenses incurred by the em22 ployer for education or training provided to the employee 

23 shall be excluded from gross income under section 4 if 

24 (and only if) such amounts or expenses are ordinary and 
175 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 necessary business expenses and are not for an advanced 

2 degree or to qualify an employee for a new line of work. 

3 ‘‘(e) REGULATIONS.—The Secretary shall prescribe 

4 regulations under this section, including regulations that 

5 continue certain rules contained in section 132 to the In6 ternal Revenue Code of 1986 related to the fringe benefits 

7 described in this section. 

8 ‘‘Subchapter E—Rules Relating to Deductions 

‘‘Sec. 101. Charitable, etc. organizations. 

‘‘Sec. 102. Private foundations. 

9 ‘‘SEC. 101. CHARITABLE, ETC. ORGANIZATIONS. 

10 ‘‘(a) PURPOSE.—This section provides definitions for 

11 purposes of determining the philanthropic transfer deduc12 tion and for other purposes of this chapter and chapter 

13 2. 

14 ‘‘(b) REGULAR CHARITY.— 

15 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.— 

16 ‘‘(A) REGULAR CHARITY.—‘Regular char17 ity’ means— 

18 ‘‘(i) a church or a convention or asso19 ciation of churches, 

20 ‘‘(ii) an educational organization 

21 which normally maintains a regular faculty 

22 and curriculum and normally has a regu23 larly enrolled body of pupils or students in 
176 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 attendance at the place where its edu2 cational activities are regularly carried on, 

3 ‘‘(iii) an organization the principal 

4 purpose or functions of which are the pro5 viding of medical or hospital care or med6 ical education or medical research, if the 

7 organization is a hospital, or if the organi8 zation is a medical research organization 

9 directly engaged in the continuous active 

10 conduct of medical research in conjunction 

11 with a hospital, 

12 ‘‘(iv) an organization which normally 

13 receives a substantial part of its support 

14 (exclusive of income received in the exer15 cise or performance by such organization 

16 of its charitable, educational, or other pur17 pose or function constituting the basis for 

18 its exemption under section 253(a)) from 

19 the United States or any State or political 

20 subdivision thereof or from direct or indi21 rect contributions from the general public, 

22 and which is organized and operated exclu23 sively to receive, hold, invest, and admin24 ister property and to make expenditures to 

25 or for the benefit of a college or university 
177 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 which is an organization referred to in 

2 clause (ii) of this subparagraph and which 

3 is an agency or instrumentality of a State 

4 or political subdivision thereof, or which is 

5 owned or operated by a State or political 

6 subdivision thereof or by an agency or in7 strumentality of one or more States or po8 litical subdivisions, 

9 ‘‘(v) a governmental unit referred to 

10 in subsection (c)(1), 

11 ‘‘(vi) an organization referred to in 

12 subsection (c)(2) which normally receives a 

13 substantial part of its support (exclusive of 

14 income received in the exercise or perform15 ance by such organization of its charitable, 

16 educational, or other purpose or function 

17 constituting the basis for its exemption 

18 under section 253(a)) from a governmental 

19 unit referred to in subsection (c)(1) or 

20 from direct or indirect contributions from 

21 the general public, 

22 ‘‘(vii) a private foundation described 

23 in subparagraph (C), or 

24 ‘‘(viii) an organization described in 

25 section 102(a) (2) or (3). 
178 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) SPECIAL RULE FOR MEDICAL RE2 SEARCH ORGANIZATIONS.—For purposes of de3 termining whether a contribution is to a regular 

4 charity, a medical research organization shall 

5 not be treated as described in clause (iii) of 

6 paragraph (2) unless during the calendar year 

7 in which the contribution is made such organi8 zation is committed to spend such contributions 

9 for such research before January 1 of the fifth 

10 calendar year which begins after the date such 

11 contribution is made, 

12 ‘‘(C) CERTAIN PRIVATE FOUNDATIONS.— 

13 The private foundations referred to in subpara14 graph (A)(vii) and subsection (e)(1)(B) are— 

15 ‘‘(i) a private operating foundation (as 

16 defined in section 4942(j)(3)), 

17 ‘‘(ii) any other private foundation (as 

18 defined in section 102(a)) which, not later 

19 than the 15th day of the third month after 

20 the close of the foundation’s taxable year 

21 in which contributions are received, makes 

22 qualifying distributions (as defined in sec23 tion 4942(g), without regard to paragraph 

24 (3) thereof), which are treated, after the 

25 application of section 4942(g)(3), as dis-
179 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 tributions out of corpus (in accordance 

2 with section 4942(h)) in an amount equal 

3 to 100 percent of such contributions, and 

4 with respect to which the taxpayer obtains 

5 adequate records or other sufficient evi6 dence from the foundation showing that 

7 the foundation made such qualifying dis8 tributions, and 

9 ‘‘(iii) a private foundation all of the 

10 contributions to which are pooled in a com11 mon fund and which would be described in 

12 section 102(a)(3) but for the right of any 

13 substantial contributor (hereafter in this 

14 clause called ‘donor’) or his spouse to des15 ignate annually the recipients, from among 

16 organizations described in paragraph (1) of 

17 section 102(a), of the income attributable 

18 to the donor’s contribution to the fund and 

19 to direct (by deed or by will) the payment, 

20 to an organization described in such para21 graph (1), of the corpus in the common 

22 fund attributable to the donor’s contribu23 tion; but this clause shall apply only if all 

24 of the income of the common fund is re25 quired to be (and is) distributed to one or 
180 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 more organizations described in such para2 graph (1) not later than the 15th day of 

3 the third month after the close of the tax4 able year in which the income is realized 

5 by the fund and only if all of the corpus 

6 attributable to any donor’s contribution to 

7 the fund is required to be (and is) distrib8 uted to one or more of such organizations 

9 not later than one year after his death or 

10 after the death of his surviving spouse if 

11 she has the right to designate the recipi12 ents of such corpus. 

13 ‘‘(2) REFERENCES.—Any reference in other law 

14 or in legal documents to an organization described 

15 in a clause of section 170(b)(1)(A) of the Internal 

16 Revenue Code of 1986 shall constitute a reference to 

17 an organization described in the same clause of sec18 tion 101(b)(1)(A). 

19 ‘‘(c) CHARITY.—For purposes of determining the de20 ductibility of a philanthropic transfer, ‘charitable contribu21 tion’ means a contribution or gift for the use of— 

22 ‘‘(1) A State, a possession of the United States, 

23 or any political subdivision of any of the foregoing, 

24 or the United States or the District of Columbia, 
181 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 but only if the contribution or gift is made for exclu2 sively public purposes. 

3 ‘‘(2) A corporation, trust, or community chest, 

4 fund, or foundation— 

5 ‘‘(A) created or organized in the United 

6 States or in any possession thereof, or under 

7 the law of the United States, any State, the 

8 District of Columbia, or any possession of the 

9 United States, 

10 ‘‘(B) organized and operated exclusively 

11 for religious, charitable, scientific, literary, or 

12 educational purposes (but only if no part of its 

13 activities involve the provision of athletic facili14 ties or equipment) or for the prevention of cru15 elty to children or animals, 

16 ‘‘(C) no part of the net earnings of which 

17 inures to the benefit of any private shareholder 

18 or individual, and 

19 ‘‘(D) which qualifies for exemption from 

20 the business tax under section 253(c) and is not 

21 disqualified for tax exemption by reason of at22 tempting to influence legislation, and which 

23 does not participate in, or intervene in (includ24 ing the publishing or distributing of state-
182 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ments), any political campaign on behalf of (or 

2 in opposition to) any candidate for public office. 

3 ‘‘(3) [intentionally deleted] 

4 ‘‘(4) In the case of a contribution or gift by an 

5 individual, a domestic fraternal society, order, or as6 sociation, operating under the lodge system, but only 

7 if such contribution or gift is to be used exclusively 

8 for religious, charitable, scientific, literary, or edu9 cational purposes, or for the prevention of cruelty to 

10 children or animals. 

11 ‘‘(5) A cemetery company owned and operated 

12 exclusively for the benefit of its members, or any 

13 corporation chartered solely for burial purposes as a 

14 cemetery corporation and not permitted by its char15 ter to engage in any business not necessarily inci16 dent to that purpose, if such company or corporation 

17 is not operated for profit and no part of the net 

18 earnings of such company or corporation inures to 

19 the benefit of any private shareholder or individual. 

20 ‘‘(d) RULES FOR SUBSECTION (c).— 

21 ‘‘(1) LIMITATIONS.—A contribution or gift by a 

22 corporation to a trust, chest, fund, or foundation 

23 shall be deductible by reason of subsection (c)(2)(B) 

24 only if it is to be used within the United States or 
183 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 any of its possessions exclusively for purposes speci2 fied in subparagraph (B). 

3 ‘‘(2) REFERENCES.—Any reference in other law 

4 or in legal documents to an organization described 

5 in a paragraph of section 170(c) of the Internal Rev6 enue Code of 1986 shall constitute a reference to an 

7 organization described in the same paragraph num8 ber of section 101(c) if an organization is described 

9 in such paragraph. 

10 ‘‘(e) QUALIFIED CONSERVATION CONTRIBUTION.— 

11 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—‘Qualified conservation con12 tribution’ means a contribution— 

13 ‘‘(A) of a qualified real property interest, 

14 ‘‘(B) to a qualified organization, 

15 ‘‘(C) exclusively for conservation purposes. 

16 ‘‘(2) QUALIFIED REAL PROPERTY INTEREST.— 

17 ‘Qualified real property interest’ means any of the 

18 following interests in real property: 

19 ‘‘(A) the entire interest of the donor other 

20 than a qualified mineral interest, 

21 ‘‘(B) a remainder interest, and 

22 ‘‘(C) a restriction (granted in perpetuity) 

23 on the use which may be made of the real prop24 erty. 
184 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(3) QUALIFIED ORGANIZATION.—For purposes 

2 of paragraph (1), the term ‘qualified organization’ 

3 means an organization which— 

4 ‘‘(A) is described in clause (v) or (vi) of 

5 subsection (b)(1)(A), or 

6 ‘‘(B) is described in section 253(c)(3) 

7 and— 

8 ‘‘(i) meets the requirements of section 

9 102(a)(2), or 

10 ‘‘(ii) meets the requirements of sec11 tion 102(a)(3) and is controlled by an or12 ganization described in subparagraph (A) 

13 or in clause (i) of this subparagraph. 

14 ‘‘(4) CONSERVATION PURPOSE DEFINED.— 

15 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—For purposes of this 

16 subsection, the term ‘conservation purpose’ 

17 means— 

18 ‘‘(i) the preservation of land areas for 

19 outdoor recreation by, or the education of, 

20 the general public, 

21 ‘‘(ii) the protection of a relatively nat22 ural habitat of fish, wildlife, or plants, or 

23 similar ecosystem, 
185 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(iii) the preservation of open space 

2 (including farmland and forest land) where 

3 such preservation is— 

4 ‘‘(I) for the scenic enjoyment of 

5 the general public, or 

6 ‘‘(II) pursuant to a clearly delin7 eated Federal, State, or local govern8 mental conservation policy, and will 

9 yield a significant public benefit, or 

10 ‘‘(iv) the preservation of an histori11 cally important land area or a certified his12 toric structure. 

13 ‘‘(B) CERTIFIED HISTORIC STRUCTURE.— 

14 For purposes of subparagraph (A)(iv), the term 

15 ‘certified historic structure’ means any building, 

16 structure, or land area which— 

17 ‘‘(i) is listed in the National Register, 

18 or 

19 ‘‘(ii) is located in a registered historic 

20 district and is certified by the Secretary of 

21 the Interior to the Secretary as being of 

22 historic significance to the district. 

23 A building, structure, or land area satisfies the 

24 preceding sentence if it satisfies such sentence 

25 either at the time of the transfer or on the due 
186 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 date (including extensions) for filing the trans2 feror’s return under this chapter for the taxable 

3 year in which the transfer is made. 

4 ‘‘(5) EXCLUSIVELY FOR CONSERVATION PUR5 POSES.—For purposes of this subsection— 

6 ‘‘(A) CONSERVATION PURPOSE MUST BE

7 PROTECTED.—A contribution shall not be treat8 ed as exclusively for conservation purposes un9 less the conservation purpose is protected in 

10 perpetuity. 

11 ‘‘(B) NO SURFACE MINING PERMITTED.— 

12 ‘‘(i) IN GENERAL.—Except as pro13 vided in clause (ii), in the case of a con14 tribution of any interest where there is a 

15 retention of a qualified mineral interest, 

16 subparagraph (A) shall not be treated as 

17 met if at any time there may be extraction 

18 or removal of minerals by any surface min19 ing method. 

20 ‘‘(ii) SPECIAL RULE.—With respect to 

21 any contribution of property in which the 

22 ownership of the surface estate and min23 eral interests were separated before June 

24 13, 1976, and remain so separated, sub25 paragraph (A) shall be treated as met if 
187 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the probability of surface mining occurring 

2 on such property is so remote as to be neg3 ligible. 

4 ‘‘(6) QUALIFIED MINERAL INTEREST.—For 

5 purposes of this subsection, the term ‘qualified min6 eral interest’ means— 

7 ‘‘(A) subsurface oil, gas, or other minerals, 

8 and 

9 ‘‘(B) the right to access to such minerals. 

10 ‘‘(f) DENIAL OF DEDUCTION FOR CERTAIN TRAVEL

11 EXPENSES.—No deduction shall be allowed under section 

12 211 for traveling expenses (including amounts expended 

13 for meals and lodging) while away from home, whether 

14 paid directly or by reimbursement, unless there is no sig15 nificant element of personal pleasure, recreation, or vaca16 tion in such travel. 

17 ‘‘(g) TREATMENT OF CERTAIN AMOUNTS PAID TO OR

18 FOR THE BENEFIT OF INSTITUTIONS OF HIGHER EDU19 CATION.—For purposes of section 9, if as the result of 

20 a contribution to or for the benefit of an educational orga21 nization— 

22 ‘‘(1) which is described in subsection 

23 (b)(1)(A)(ii), and 

24 ‘‘(2) which is an institution of higher education 

25 (as defined in section 3304(f)) 
188 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the taxpayer receives (directly or indirectly) as a result 

2 of paying such amount the right to purchase tickets for 

3 seating at an athletic event in an athletic stadium of such 

4 institution, 80 percent of such contribution shall be treat5 ed as a charitable contribution (but only if such amount 

6 would be allowable as a deduction but for the fact that 

7 the taxpayer received the right to purchase tickets). If any 

8 portion of a payment is for the purchase of such tickets, 

9 such portion and the remaining portion (if any) of such 

10 payment shall be treated as separate amounts for purposes 

11 of this subsection. 

12 ‘‘Subchapter F—Special Business Activities 

‘‘Sec. 111. Rules for rental of real estate. 

13 ‘‘SEC. 111. RULES FOR RENTAL OF REAL ESTATE. 

14 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—Except as provided in subsection 

15 (b)— 

16 ‘‘(1) the activity of rental of real estate is a 

17 business activity to which the Simplified USA Tax 

18 for businesses under chapter 2 applies, 

19 ‘‘(2) a taxpayer shall not be entitled to any de20 ductions under this chapter with respect to rental 

21 property, and 

22 ‘‘(3) a taxpayer shall recognize gross income 

23 only with respect to distributions from the rental ac24 tivity. 
189 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(b) INSUBSTANTIAL RENTAL ACTIVITY.— 

2 ‘‘(1) NOT RENTAL PROPERTY.—If an individual 

3 or individuals own property, such individual or indi4 viduals and their families use the property on more 

5 than 14 days during the taxable year for nonbusi6 ness purposes, the property is rented for no more 

7 than 14 days during the taxable year, and the total 

8 rental received by the individuals with respect to 

9 such property does not exceed $10,000, the property 

10 shall not be considered rental property or used in 

11 the activity of rental of real estate during the tax12 able year for purposes of subsection (a) and the 

13 Simplified USA Tax for businesses under chapter 2. 

14 ‘‘(2) RENTS FROM NONRENTAL PROPERTY.— 

15 Any rent from property described in paragraph (1) 

16 shall be included in gross income for purposes of the 

17 Simplified USA Income Tax. 

18 ‘‘(c) USE FOR A NONBUSINESS PURPOSE.—For pur19 poses of this section, ‘use for a nonbusiness purpose’ 

20 means use other than— 

21 ‘‘(1) use for which fair rent is paid, 

22 ‘‘(2) use in connection with the preparation of 

23 the property for rental, or 

24 ‘‘(3) use that serves a clear business purpose. 
190 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 Use during any part of a day shall constitute use for that 

2 day. 

3 ‘‘Subchapter G—Accounting Methods and 

4 Periods 

‘‘Sec. 121. Taxable year. 

‘‘Sec. 122. Cash method of accounting; installment sales. 

5 ‘‘SEC. 121. TAXABLE YEAR. 

6 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—The taxable year for all individ7 uals subject to tax under this chapter shall be the calendar 

8 year except as provided in subsection (b). 

9 ‘‘(b) SHORT TAXABLE YEARS.— 

10 ‘‘(1) BIRTH.—An individual’s taxable year in 

11 the year of his birth shall begin on the date of his 

12 birth. 

13 ‘‘(2) DEATH.—An individual’s taxable year in 

14 the year of his death shall end on the date of his 

15 death. 

16 ‘‘SEC. 122. CASH METHOD OF ACCOUNTING; INSTALLMENT 

17 SALES. 

18 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—All individuals shall determine 

19 their income and deductions using the cash receipts and 

20 disbursement method. 

21 ‘‘(b) OID RULES.— 

22 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—Original issue discount 

23 shall not be included in gross income until received. 
191 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) PREVIOUSLY RECOGNIZED OID.—Original 

2 issue discount included in income under the Internal 

3 Revenue Code of 1986 shall increase the adjusted 

4 basis of the instrument to which the original issue 

5 discount related and shall not again be included in 

6 income when received. 

7 ‘‘(c) INSTALLMENT SALES.— 

8 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—Taxpayers shall take into 

9 account income from installment sales when re10 ceived. 

11 ‘‘(2) REGULATIONS.—The Secretary shall pro12 mulgate regulations implementing paragraph (1). 

13 Such regulations shall generally follow the principles 

14 of sections 453, 453A and 453B of the Internal Rev15 enue Code of 1986, except to the extent such prin16 ciples are inconsistent with other provisions of this 

17 chapter. 

18 ‘‘(d) CONSTRUCTIVE RECEIPT.—Income shall be 

19 treated as received when constructively received. 

20 ‘‘(e) EFFECT OF CHANGE OF ACCOUNTING METH21 OD.—Rules similar to those under section 226 shall apply 

22 to ensure that a taxpayer does not deduct the same ex23 pense twice or include the same item in income twice. 

24 ‘‘Subchapter H—Nonresident Aliens 

‘‘Sec. 131. Tax on nonresident alien individuals. 

‘‘Sec. 132. Tax treatment of certain community income of nonresident aliens. 
192 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘SEC. 131. TAX ON NONRESIDENT ALIEN INDIVIDUALS. 

2 ‘‘(a) NONBUSINESS INCOME.— 

3 ‘‘(1) INCOME OTHER THAN CERTAIN GAINS.— 

4 There is hereby imposed for each taxable year a tax 

5 of 30 percent of the amount received from sources 

6 within the United States by a nonresident alien indi7 vidual as— 

8 ‘‘(A) interest (other than portfolio interest 

9 (as defined in subsection (b)(2)), deposit inter10 est (as defined in subsection (b)(3)) and origi11 nal issue discount, dividends, rents, salaries, 

12 wages, premiums, annuities, compensations, re13 munerations, emoluments, and other fixed or 

14 determinable annual periodical gains, profits 

15 and income, 

16 ‘‘(B) gains from the disposal of timber, 

17 coal, or iron ore with a retained economic inter18 est, 

19 ‘‘(C) in the case of the sale of an original 

20 discount obligation or payment on an original 

21 issue discount obligation, the interest accrued 

22 while the individual was a nonresident alien, 

23 and 

24 ‘‘(D) includible social security benefits (as 

25 defined in section 3(b)(2)). 
193 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) CAPITAL GAINS OF CERTAIN ALIENS.—In 

2 the case of a nonresident alien individual present in 

3 the United States for a period or periods aggre4 gating 183 days or more during the taxable year, 

5 there is hereby imposed a tax of 30 percent of the 

6 amount by which the gains, derived from sources 

7 within the United States, from the sale or exchange 

8 at any time during such year exceeds his losses, allo9 cable to sources within the United States, from the 

10 sale or exchange at any time during such year of 

11 capital assets. 

12 ‘‘(3) TAX DOES NOT APPLY TO BUSINESS IN13 COME.—The taxes imposed by this section shall not 

14 apply to the income of any business entity, except to 

15 the extent such income is distributed as compensa16 tion, dividends, or interest. 

17 ‘‘(b) SPECIAL RULES AND DEFINITIONS.— 

18 ‘‘(1) CERTAIN ANNUITIES.—The taxes imposed 

19 by subsection (a) shall not apply to any amount re20 ceived as an annuity under a qualified annuity plan 

21 described in section 403(a)(1), or from a qualified 

22 trust described in section 401(a) and exempt under 

23 section 253(a) if— 

24 ‘‘(A) all of the personal services by reason 

25 of which the annuity is payable were either— 
194 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(i) personal services performed out2 side the United States by an individual 

3 who, at the time of performance of such 

4 personal services, was a nonresident alien, 

5 or 

6 ‘‘(ii) personal services by a non7 resident alien temporarily present in the 

8 United States for a period or periods not 

9 exceeding 90 days during a taxable year, 

10 whose compensation for such services did 

11 not exceed $3,000, and who performed 

12 such services for— 

13 ‘‘(I) a nonresident alien indi14 vidual, foreign partnership, or foreign 

15 corporation, not engaged in a trade or 

16 business within the United States, or 

17 ‘‘(II) for an office or place of 

18 business maintained in a foreign coun19 try or in a possession of the United 

20 States by an individual who is a cit21 izen or resident of the United States 

22 or by a domestic partnership or a do23 mestic corporation, and 

24 ‘‘(B) at the time the first amount is paid 

25 as annuity under the annuity plan or by the 
195 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 trust, 90 percent or more of the employees for 

2 whom contributions or benefits are provided 

3 under such plan are citizens or residents of the 

4 United States. 

5 ‘‘(2) PORTFOLIO INTEREST.— 

6 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—‘Portfolio interest’ 

7 means— 

8 ‘‘(i) interest on obligations in reg9 istered form if the United States person 

10 who would otherwise be required to with11 hold tax on such interest under section 

12 1441(a) receives a statement that the ben13 eficial owner of the obligation is not a 

14 United States person, and 

15 ‘‘(ii) interest on obligations in nonreg16 istered form if appropriate precautions are 

17 taken to ensure that such obligations will 

18 be sold only to persons who are not United 

19 States persons and such interest is paid 

20 outside the United States. 

21 ‘‘(B) EXCEPTIONS.—Under rules to be 

22 prescribed by the Secretary, portfolio interest 

23 does not include— 

24 ‘‘(i) interest received by a 10-percent 

25 equity owner, or 
196 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(ii) contingent interest. 

2 ‘‘(3) DEPOSIT INTEREST.—‘Deposit interest’ 

3 means interest on deposits which are— 

4 ‘‘(A) deposits with persons carrying on a 

5 banking business (including savings and loans), 

6 and 

7 ‘‘(B) amounts held by an insurance com8 pany under an agreement to pay interest there9 on. 

10 ‘‘(4) OTHER EXCEPTIONS.—The taxes imposed 

11 by subsection (a) shall not apply to— 

12 ‘‘(A) a percentage of any dividend paid by 

13 a business entity, 80 percent of whose gross re14 ceipts are not taken into account under chapter 

15 1 because they are from outside the United 

16 States, equal to the percentage of gross receipts 

17 not so taken into account, 

18 ‘‘(B) gambling winnings (except to the ex19 tent that the Secretary determines by regula20 tion that the collection of the tax is administra21 tively feasible), 

22 ‘‘(C) compensation paid by a foreign em23 ployer to a nonresident alien individual for the 

24 period he is temporarily present in the United 

25 States as a nonimmigrant under subparagraph 
197 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 (F) or (J) of section 101(a)(15) of the Immi2 gration and Nationality Act, as amended, 

3 ‘‘(D) interest from a series E or series H 

4 savings bond if the individual acquired the bond 

5 while a resident of the Ryuku Islands or the 

6 Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, or 

7 ‘‘(E) amounts earned or payable to any 

8 person who is a bona fide resident of Puerto 

9 Rico, Guam, American Samoa, or the Northern 

10 Mariana Islands (and, therefore, is subject to 

11 the tax imposed by subchapter A). 

12 ‘‘(c) EXPATRIATION TO AVOID TAX.— 

13 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—A nonresident alien indi14 vidual who at any time within the 10-year period im15 mediately preceding the close of the taxable year lost 

16 United States citizenship shall be taxable in the 

17 manner described in paragraph (2) unless none of 

18 the principal purposes of losing citizenship was 

19 avoidance of tax under subchapter A or subtitle B. 

20 ‘‘(2) ALTERNATIVE TAX.—A nonresident alien 

21 individual described in paragraph (1) shall be sub22 ject to tax on the items taxable under subsection (a) 

23 as determined without regard to exceptions listed or 

24 based on definitions contained in subsection (b) 

25 using the rate schedule for single individuals under 
198 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 section 215. If the taxes determined under sub2 section (a) are greater than the tax determined 

3 under this subsection, the greater tax shall apply. 

4 ‘‘SEC. 132. TAX TREATMENT OF CERTAIN COMMUNITY IN5 COME OF NONRESIDENT ALIENS. 

6 ‘‘(a) GENERAL RULE.—In the case of a married cou7 ple one or both of whom are nonresident alien individuals 

8 and who have community income for the taxable year, 

9 such community income shall be treated as follows: 

10 ‘‘(1) Compensation income shall be treated as 

11 income of the spouse who rendered the services, 

12 ‘‘(2) Partnership distributions shall be treated 

13 as the related distributive shares of partnership in14 come would be treated under section 1402(a)(5), 

15 ‘‘(3) Community income which is derived from 

16 the separate property of a spouse shall be treated as 

17 income of that spouse, and 

18 ‘‘(4) All other such community income shall be 

19 treated as provided in the applicable community 

20 property law. 

21 ‘‘(b) EXCEPTION WHERE ELECTION UNDER SEC22 TION 6013(G) IS IN EFFECT.—Subsection (a) shall not 

23 apply if an election under subsection (g) or (h) of section 

24 6013 (relating to election to treat nonresident alien indi25 viduals as residents of the United States) is in effect. 
199 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘SEC. 133. RELATIONSHIP WITH TREATIES. 

2 ‘‘(a) STATEMENT OF POLICY.—It is the intention of 

3 the USA Tax Code to promote a worldwide tax system 

4 in which each nation taxes— 

5 ‘‘(1) under an individual tax, only the income of 

6 individuals who are residents or citizens of that na7 tion, and 

8 ‘‘(2) under a business tax only the business ac9 tivity in such nation. 

10 ‘‘(b) EFFECT OF TREATIES.—No tax shall be im11 posed under section 131(a) on income that is exempt from 

12 tax by reason of a treaty between the nation of which the 

13 nonresident alien is a citizen or resident and the United 

14 States. If any such treaty requires that a lower rate of 

15 tax be imposed on some or all of the items of income sub16 ject to tax under section 331(a), such lower rate shall 

17 apply to such items in the case of persons to whom such 

18 treaty applies. 

19 ‘‘(c) EFFECT OF UNILATERAL ACTION BY FOREIGN

20 NATION.—No tax shall be imposed under section 331(a) 

21 on nonresident aliens who are citizens or residents of an22 other nation if— 

23 ‘‘(1) such nation exempts from its income and 

24 withholding taxes nonresident alien individuals who 

25 are residents or citizens of the United States, 
200 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) such nation has entered into a tax infor2 mation sharing agreement with the United States, 

3 and 

4 ‘‘(3) the Secretary certifies that the preceding 

5 two requirements have been satisfied. 

6 ‘‘Subchapter I—Trusts and Estates 

‘‘Sec. 140. Prepayment of tax by trusts and estates. 

‘‘Sec. 141. Application of tax. 

‘‘Sec. 142. Special rules for credits and deductions. 

‘‘Sec. 143. Definitions and rules applicable to subchapter I. 

‘‘Sec. 144. Deduction for trusts distributing current income only. 

‘‘Sec. 145. Inclusion of amounts in gross income of beneficiaries of trusts distributing current income only. 

‘‘Sec. 146. Deduction for estates and trusts accumulating income or distributing corpus. 

‘‘Sec. 147. Inclusion of amounts in gross income of beneficiaries of estates and 

trusts accumulating income or distributing corpus. 

‘‘Sec. 148. Special rules applicable to sections 146 and 147. 

‘‘Sec. 149. Charitable remainder trusts. 

‘‘Sec. 150. Definitions applicable to excess distribution rules. 

‘‘Sec. 151. Accumulation distribution allocated to preceding years. 

‘‘Sec. 152. Treatment of amounts deemed distributed by trust in preceding 

years. 

‘‘Sec. 153. Trust income, deductions, and credits attributable to grantors and 

others as substantial owners. 

‘‘Sec. 154. Definitions and rules. 

‘‘Sec. 155. Reversionary interests. 

‘‘Sec. 156. Power to control beneficial enjoyment. 

‘‘Sec. 157. Administrative powers. 

‘‘Sec. 158. Power to revoke. 

‘‘Sec. 159. Income for benefit of grantor. 

‘‘Sec. 160. Person other than grantor treated as substantial owner. 

‘‘Sec. 161. Foreign trusts having one or more United States beneficiaries. 

‘‘Sec. 162. Limitation on charitable deduction. 

‘‘Sec. 163. Income of an estate or trust in case of divorce, etc. 

‘‘Sec. 164. Recognition of gain on certain transfers to certain foreign persons 

and estates. 

‘‘Sec. 165. Treatment of funeral trusts. 

‘‘Sec. 166. Income in respect of a decedent. 

7 ‘‘SEC. 140. PREPAYMENT OF TAX BY TRUSTS AND ESTATES. 

8 ‘‘(a) PREPAYMENT OF TAX.—A trust or estate shall 

9 prepay the Simplified USA Tax for individuals in accord10 ance with the provisions of this subchapter. 
201 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(b) IMPOSITION OF TAX.—There is hereby imposed 

2 a tax on the taxable income of trusts and estates (as deter3 mined in accordance with this subchapter) a tax deter4 mined as follows: 

‘‘If taxable income is: The tax is: 

Not over $1,600 ............................ 15% of taxable income. 

Over $1,600, but not over $3,800 $240, plus 25% of the excess over 

$1,600. 

Over $3,800 ................................... $790, plus 30% of the excess over 

$3,800. 

5 ‘‘(c) INFLATION ADJUSTMENT.—The schedule in 

6 subsection (b) shall be adjusted for inflation in accordance 

7 with section 25. 

8 ‘‘(d) BUSINESS ACTIVITIES.— 

9 ‘‘(1) TAX ON BUSINESS ACTIVITY DETERMINED

10 AT BUSINESS LEVEL.—If a trust engages in business 

11 activity (as defined in section 206(b)), it shall be 

12 considered a business entity with respect to such ac13 tivities for purposes of the business tax under chap14 ter 2. The business entity shall be considered an 

15 asset of the trust. 

16 ‘‘(2) BUSINESS ENTITY AS SOLE BENE17 FICIARY.—If the only beneficiaries of a trust are 

18 business entities, no tax shall be imposed on such 

19 trust under this subchapter. 
202 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘SEC. 141. APPLICATION OF TAX. 

2 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—The tax imposed by section 140 

3 shall apply to the taxable income of estates or of any kind 

4 of property held in trust, including— 

5 ‘‘(1) income accumulated in trust for the ben6 efit of unborn or unascertained persons or persons 

7 with contingent interests, and income accumulated 

8 or held for future distribution under the terms of 

9 the will or trust; 

10 ‘‘(2) income which is to be distributed currently 

11 by the fiduciary to the beneficiaries, and income col12 lected by a guardian of an infant which is to be held 

13 or distributed as the court may direct; 

14 ‘‘(3) income received by estates of deceased per15 sons during the period of administration or settle16 ment of the estate; and 

17 ‘‘(4) income which, in the discretion of the fidu18 ciary, may be either distributed to the beneficiaries 

19 or accumulated. 

20 ‘‘(b) COMPUTATION AND PAYMENT.—The taxable in21 come of an estate or trust shall be computed in the same 

22 manner as in the case of an individual, except as otherwise 

23 provided in this subchapter. The tax shall be computed 

24 on such taxable income and shall be paid by the fiduciary. 

25 For purposes of this subsection, a foreign trust or foreign 
203 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 estate shall be treated as a nonresident alien individual 

2 who is not present in the United States at any time. 

3 ‘‘(c) EXCLUSION OF INCLUDIBLE GAIN FROM TAX4 ABLE INCOME.—The taxable income of a trust does not 

5 include the amount of any includible gain as defined in 

6 section 144(b) reduced by any deductions properly allo7 cable thereto. 

8 ‘‘SEC. 142. SPECIAL RULES FOR CREDITS AND DEDUCTIONS. 

9 ‘‘(a) USA DEDUCTION AND FAMILY AND WORK

10 CREDITS.— 

11 ‘‘(1) NO DEDUCTION OR ALLOWANCE.—A trust 

12 or estate shall not be allowed any USA Deductions 

13 or a family or work credit. 

14 ‘‘(2) SPECIAL DEDUCTION.—For purposes of 

15 determining taxable income, trusts and estates shall 

16 be entitled to the following deductions from gross in17 come— 

18 ‘‘(A) ESTATE.—An estate shall be allowed 

19 a deduction of $600. 

20 ‘‘(B) DISTRIBUTING TRUST.—A trust 

21 which, under its governing instrument, is re22 quired to distribute all of its income currently 

23 shall be allowed a deduction of $300. 
204 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(C) OTHER TRUSTS.—Trusts not de2 scribed in subparagraph (B) shall be allowed a 

3 deduction of $100. 

4 ‘‘(b) DEDUCTION FOR AMOUNTS PAID OR PERMA5 NENTLY SET ASIDE FOR A CHARITABLE PURPOSE.— 

6 ‘‘(1) GENERAL RULE.—In the case of an estate 

7 or trust, there shall be allowed as a deduction in 

8 computing its taxable income (in lieu of the philan9 thropic transfer deduction) any amount of the gross 

10 income, without limitation, which pursuant to the 

11 terms of the governing instrument is, during the 

12 taxable year, paid for a purpose specified in section 

13 101(c) (determined without regard to section 

14 101(c)(2)(A)). If a charitable contribution is paid 

15 after the close of such taxable year and on or before 

16 the last day of the year following the close of such 

17 taxable year, then the trustee or administrator may 

18 elect to treat such contribution as paid during such 

19 taxable year. The election shall be made at such 

20 time and in such manner as the Secretary prescribes 

21 by regulations. 

22 ‘‘(2) POOLED INCOME FUNDS.—In the case of 

23 a pooled income fund (as defined in paragraph (3)), 

24 there shall also be allowed as a deduction in com25 puting its taxable income any amount of the gross 
205 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 income attributable to gain from the sale of a capital 

2 asset held for more than 1 year, without limitation, 

3 which pursuant to the terms of the governing instru4 ment is, during the taxable year, permanently set 

5 aside for a purpose specified in section 101(c). 

6 ‘‘(3) DEFINITION OF POOLED INCOME FUND.— 

7 For purposes of paragraph (2), a pooled income 

8 fund is a trust— 

9 ‘‘(A) to which each donor transfers prop10 erty, contributing an irrevocable remainder in11 terest in such property to or for the use of an 

12 organization described in section 101(b)(1)(A) 

13 (other than in clauses (vii) or (viii)), and retain14 ing an income interest for the life of one or 

15 more beneficiaries (living at the time of such 

16 transfer), 

17 ‘‘(B) in which the property transferred by 

18 each donor is commingled with property trans19 ferred by other donors who have made or make 

20 similar transfers, 

21 ‘‘(C) which cannot have investments in se22 curities which are exempt from taxes imposed 

23 by this subtitle, 
206 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(D) which includes only amounts received 

2 from transfers which meet the requirements of 

3 this paragraph, 

4 ‘‘(E) which is maintained by the organiza5 tion to which the remainder interest is contrib6 uted and of which no donor or beneficiary of an 

7 income interest is a trustee, and 

8 ‘‘(F) from which each beneficiary of an in9 come interest receives income, for each year for 

10 which he is entitled to receive the income inter11 est referred to in subparagraph (A), determined 

12 by the rate of return earned by the trust for 

13 such year. 

14 For purposes of determining the amount of any 

15 charitable contribution allowable by reason of a 

16 transfer of property to a pooled fund, the value of 

17 the income interest shall be determined on the basis 

18 of the highest rate of return earned by the fund for 

19 any of the 3 taxable years immediately preceding the 

20 taxable year of the fund in which the transfer is 

21 made. In the case of funds in existence less than 3 

22 taxable years preceding the taxable year of the fund 

23 in which a transfer is made the rate of return shall 

24 be deemed to be 6 percent per annum, except that 
207 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the Secretary may prescribe a different rate of re2 turn. 

3 ‘‘(c) UNUSED LOSS CARRYOVERS.—If on the termi4 nation of an estate or trust, the estate or trust has a loss 

5 carryover then such carryover shall be allowed as a deduc6 tion, in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Sec7 retary, to the beneficiaries succeeding to the property of 

8 the estate or trust. 

9 ‘‘(d) CERTAIN DISTRIBUTIONS BY CEMETERY PER10 PETUAL CARE FUNDS.—In the case of a cemetery per11 petual care fund which— 

12 ‘‘(1) was created pursuant to local law by a tax13 able cemetery corporation for the care and mainte14 nance of cemetery property, and 

15 ‘‘(2) is treated for the taxable year as a trust 

16 for purposes of this subchapter, any amount distrib17 uted by such fund for the care and maintenance of 

18 gravesites which have been purchased from the cem19 etery corporation before the beginning of the taxable 

20 year of the trust and with respect to which there is 

21 an obligation to furnish care and maintenance shall 

22 be considered to be a distribution solely for purposes 

23 of sections 144 and 146, but only to the extent that 

24 the aggregate amount so distributed during the tax-
208 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 able year does not exceed $5 multiplied by the ag2 gregate number of such gravesites. 

3 ‘‘SEC. 143. DEFINITIONS AND RULES APPLICABLE TO SUB4 CHAPTER I. 

5 ‘‘For purposes of this subchapter— 

6 ‘‘(a) DISTRIBUTABLE NET INCOME.—‘Distributable 

7 net income’ means, with respect to any taxable year, the 

8 taxable income of the estate or trust computed with the 

9 following modifications— 

10 ‘‘(1) No deduction shall be taken under sections 

11 144 and 146 (relating to additional deductions). 

12 ‘‘(2) No deduction shall be taken under section 

13 142(a)(2) (relating to deduction for personal exemp14 tions). 

15 ‘‘(3) Gains from the sale or exchange of capital 

16 assets shall be excluded to the extent that such gains 

17 are allocated to corpus and are not (A) paid, cred18 ited, or required to be distributed to any beneficiary 

19 during the taxable year, or (B) paid, permanently 

20 set aside, or to be used for the purposes specified in 

21 section 142(b). Losses from the sale or exchange of 

22 capital assets shall be excluded, except to the extent 

23 such losses are taken into account in determining 

24 the amount of gains from the sale or exchange of 

25 capital assets which are paid, credited, or required 
209 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 to be distributed to any beneficiary during the tax2 able year. 

3 ‘‘(4) For purposes only of rules under section 

4 ll, there shall be excluded those items of gross in5 come constituting extraordinary dividends or taxable 

6 stock dividends which the fiduciary, acting in good 

7 faith, does not pay or credit to any beneficiary by 

8 reason of his determination that such dividends are 

9 allocable to corpus under the terms of the governing 

10 instrument and applicable local law. 

11 ‘‘(5) There shall be included any tax-exempt in12 terest. 

13 ‘‘(6) In the case of a foreign trust— 

14 ‘‘(A) There shall be included the amounts 

15 of gross income from sources without the 

16 United States, reduced by any amounts which 

17 would be deductible in respect of disbursements 

18 allocable to such income but for the provisions 

19 of section 265(a)(1) (relating to disallowance of 

20 certain deductions). 

21 ‘‘(B) Gross income from sources within the 

22 United States shall be determined without re23 gard to section 894 (relating to income exempt 

24 under treaty). 
210 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(C) Paragraph (3) shall not apply to a 

2 foreign trust. In the case of such a trust, there 

3 shall be included gains from the sale or ex4 change of capital assets, reduced by losses from 

5 such sales or exchanges to the extent such 

6 losses do not exceed gains from such sales or 

7 exchanges. 

8 If the estate or trust is allowed a deduction under section 

9 142(b), the amount of the modifications specified in para10 graphs (5) and (6) shall be reduced to the extent that the 

11 amount of income which is paid, permanently set aside, 

12 or to be used for the purposes specified in section 142(b) 

13 is deemed to consist of items specified in those para14 graphs. For this purpose, such amount shall (in the ab15 sence of specific provisions in the governing instrument) 

16 be deemed to consist of the same proportion of each class 

17 of items of income of the estate or trust as the total of 

18 each class bears to the total of all classes. 

19 ‘‘(b) INCOME.—‘Income’, when not preceded by the 

20 words ‘taxable’, ‘distributable net’, ‘undistributed net’, or 

21 ‘gross’, means the amount of income of the estate or trust 

22 for the taxable year determined under the terms of the 

23 governing instrument and applicable local law. Items of 

24 gross income constituting extraordinary dividends or tax25 able stock dividends which the fiduciary, acting in good 
211 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 faith, determines to be allocable to corpus under the terms 

2 of the governing instrument and applicable local law shall 

3 not be considered income. 

4 ‘‘(c) BENEFICIARY.—‘Beneficiary’ includes heir, leg5 atee, devisee. 

6 ‘‘(d) TREATMENT OF PROPERTY DISTRIBUTED IN

7 KIND.— 

8 ‘‘(1) BASIS OF BENEFICIARY.—The basis of any 

9 property received by a beneficiary in a distribution 

10 from an estate or trust shall be— 

11 ‘‘(A) the adjusted basis of such property in 

12 the hands of the estate or trust immediately be13 fore the distribution, adjusted for 

14 ‘‘(B) any gain or loss recognized to the es15 tate or trust on the distribution. 

16 ‘‘(2) AMOUNT OF DISTRIBUTION.—In the case 

17 of any distribution of property (other than cash), the 

18 amount taken into account under sections 146(a)(2) 

19 and 147(a)(2) shall be the lesser of— 

20 ‘‘(A) the basis of such property in the 

21 hands of the beneficiary (as determined under 

22 paragraph (1)), or 

23 ‘‘(B) the fair market value of such prop24 erty. 

25 ‘‘(3) ELECTION TO RECOGNIZE GAIN.— 
212 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—In the case of any dis2 tribution of property (other than cash) to which 

3 an election under this paragraph applies— 

4 ‘‘(i) paragraph (2) shall not apply, 

5 ‘‘(ii) gain or loss shall be recognized 

6 by the estate or trust in the same manner 

7 as if such property had been sold to the 

8 distributee at its fair market value, and 

9 ‘‘(iii) the amount taken into account 

10 under sections 146(a)(2) and 147(a)(2) 

11 shall be the fair market value of such 

12 property. 

13 ‘‘(B) ELECTION.—Any election under this 

14 paragraph shall apply to all distributions made 

15 by the estate or trust during a taxable year and 

16 shall be made on the return of such estate or 

17 trust for such taxable year. 

18 Any such election, once made, may be revoked only 

19 with the consent of the Secretary. 

20 ‘‘(4) EXCEPTION FOR DISTRIBUTIONS DE21 SCRIBED IN SECTION 148(a).—This subsection shall 

22 not apply to any distribution described in section 

23 148(a). 

24 ‘‘(e) TREATMENT OF MULTIPLE TRUSTS.—For pur25 poses of this subchapter, under regulations prescribed by 
213 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the Secretary, 2 or more trusts shall be treated as 1 trust 

2 if— 

3 ‘‘(1) such trusts have substantially the same 

4 grantor or grantors and substantially the same pri5 mary beneficiary or beneficiaries, and 

6 ‘‘(2) a principal purpose of such trusts is the 

7 avoidance of the tax imposed by this chapter. 

8 For purposes of the preceding sentence, a husband and 

9 wife shall be treated as 1 person. 

10 ‘‘(f) CERTAIN PAYMENTS OF ESTIMATED TAX

11 TREATED AS PAID BY BENEFICIARY.—Under rules pre12 scribed by the Secretary, a trustee may elect to treat any 

13 portion of a payment of estimated tax made by such trust 

14 for any taxable year of the trust as a payment made by 

15 a beneficiary of such trust. This rule shall also apply in 

16 the case of a taxable year reasonably expected to be the 

17 last taxable year of an estate. 

18 ‘‘(g) FOREIGN TRUSTS AND FOREIGN INCOME.—The 

19 Secretary shall prescribe special rules for foreign trusts 

20 and foreign income of trusts. Those rules should generally 

21 be consistent with the rules under subchapter J of chapter 

22 1 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, except that they 

23 shall take into account the principles of the Simplified 

24 USA Tax. 
214 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(h) CERTAIN REVOCABLE TRUSTS TREATED AS

2 PART OF ESTATE.— 

3 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—If both the executor (if 

4 any) of an estate and the trustee of a qualified rev5 ocable trust elect the treatment provided in this sec6 tion, such trust shall be treated and taxed as part 

7 of such estate (and not as a separate trust) for all 

8 taxable years of the estate ending after the date of 

9 the decedent’s death and before the applicable date. 

10 ‘‘(2) QUALIFIED REVOCABLE TRUST.—For pur11 poses of this subsection, ‘qualified revocable trust’ 

12 means any trust (or portion thereof) which was 

13 treated under section 158 as owned by the decedent 

14 of the estate referred to in paragraph (1) by reason 

15 of a power in the grantor (determined without re16 gard to section 154(e). 

17 ‘‘(3) APPLICABLE DATE.—For purposes of this 

18 subsection, ‘applicable date’ means— 

19 ‘‘(A) if no return of tax imposed by chap20 ter 11 is required to be filed, the date which is 

21 2 years after the date of the decedent’s death, 

22 and 

23 ‘‘(B) if such a return is required to be 

24 filed, the date which is 6 months after the date 
215 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 of the final determination of the liability for tax 

2 imposed by chapter 11. 

3 ‘‘(4) ELECTION.—The election under this sub4 section shall be made not later than the time pre5 scribed for filing the return of tax imposed by this 

6 chapter for the first taxable year of the estate (de7 termined with regard to extensions) and, once made, 

8 shall be irrevocable. 

9 ‘‘SEC. 144. DEDUCTION FOR TRUSTS DISTRIBUTING CUR10 RENT INCOME ONLY. 

11 ‘‘(a) DEDUCTION.—In the case of any trust the terms 

12 of which— 

13 ‘‘(1) provide that all of its income is required 

14 to be distributed currently, and 

15 ‘‘(2) do not provide that any amounts are to be 

16 paid, permanently set aside, or used for the purposes 

17 specified in section 142(b) (relating to deduction for 

18 charitable, etc., purposes), there shall be allowed as 

19 a deduction in computing the taxable income of the 

20 trust the amount of the income for the taxable year 

21 which is required to be distributed currently. This 

22 section shall not apply in any taxable year in which 

23 the trust distributes amounts other than amounts of 

24 income described in paragraph (1). 
216 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(b) LIMITATION ON DEDUCTION.—If the amount of 

2 income required to be distributed currently exceeds the 

3 distributable net income of the trust for the taxable year, 

4 the deduction shall be limited to the amount of the distrib5 utable net income. For this purpose, the computation of 

6 distributable net income shall not include items of income 

7 which are not included in the gross income of the trust 

8 and the deductions allocable thereto. 

9 ‘‘SEC. 145. INCLUSION OF AMOUNTS IN GROSS INCOME OF 

10 BENEFICIARIES OF TRUSTS DISTRIBUTING 

11 CURRENT INCOME ONLY. 

12 ‘‘(a) INCLUSION.—Subject to subsection (b), the 

13 amount of income for the taxable year required to be dis14 tributed currently by a trust described in section 144 shall 

15 be included in the gross income of the beneficiaries to 

16 whom the income is required to be distributed, whether 

17 distributed or not. If such amount exceeds the distribut18 able net income, there shall be included in the gross in19 come of each beneficiary an amount which bears the same 

20 ratio to distributable net income as the amount of income 

21 required to be distributed to such beneficiary bears to the 

22 amount of income required to be distributed to all bene23 ficiaries. 

24 ‘‘(b) CHARACTER OF AMOUNTS.—The amounts speci25 fied in subsection (a) shall have the same character in the 
217 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 hands of the beneficiary as in the hands of the trust. For 

2 this purpose, the amounts shall be treated as consisting 

3 of the same proportion of each class of items entering into 

4 the computation of distributable net income of the trust 

5 as the total of each class bears to the total distributable 

6 net income of the trust, unless the terms of the trust spe7 cifically allocate different classes of income to different 

8 beneficiaries. In the application of the preceding sentence, 

9 the items of deduction entering into the computation of 

10 distributable net income shall be allocated among the 

11 items of distributable net income in accordance with regu12 lations prescribed by the Secretary. 

13 ‘‘SEC. 146. DEDUCTION FOR ESTATES AND TRUSTS ACCU14 MULATING INCOME OR DISTRIBUTING COR15 PUS. 

16 ‘‘(a) DEDUCTION.—In any taxable year there shall be 

17 allowed as a deduction in computing the taxable income 

18 of an estate or trust (other than a trust described in sec19 tion 144), the sum of— 

20 ‘‘(1) any amount of income for such taxable 

21 year required to be distributed currently (including 

22 any amount required to be distributed which may be 

23 paid out of income or corpus to the extent such 

24 amount is paid out of income for such taxable year); 

25 and 
218 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) any other amounts properly paid or cred2 ited or required to be distributed for such taxable 

3 year; 

4 but such deduction shall not exceed the distributable 

5 net income of the estate or trust. 

6 ‘‘(b) CHARACTER OF AMOUNTS DISTRIBUTED.—The 

7 amount determined under subsection (a) shall be treated 

8 as consisting of the same proportion of each class of items 

9 entering into the computation of distributable net income 

10 of the estate or trust as the total of each class bears to 

11 the total distributable net income of the estate or trust 

12 in the absence of the allocation of different classes of in13 come under the specific terms of the governing instru14 ment. In the application of the preceding sentence, the 

15 items of deduction entering into the computation of dis16 tributable net income (including the deduction allowed 

17 under section 142(b)) shall be allocated among the items 

18 of distributable net income in accordance with regulations 

19 prescribed by the Secretary. 

20 ‘‘(c) LIMITATION ON DEDUCTION.—No deduction 

21 shall be allowed under subsection (a) in respect of any por22 tion of the amount allowed as a deduction under that sub23 section (without regard to this subsection) which is treated 

24 under subsection (b) as consisting of any item of distribut-
219 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 able net income which is not included in the gross income 

2 of the estate or trust. 

3 ‘‘SEC. 147. INCLUSION OF AMOUNTS IN GROSS INCOME OF 

4 BENEFICIARIES OF ESTATES AND TRUSTS AC5 CUMULATING INCOME OR DISTRIBUTING 

6 CORPUS. 

7 ‘‘(a) INCLUSION.—Subject to subsection (b), there 

8 shall be included in the gross income of a beneficiary to 

9 whom an amount specified in section 146(a) is paid, cred10 ited, or required to be distributed (by an estate or trust 

11 described in section 146), the sum of the following 

12 amounts: 

13 ‘‘(1) AMOUNTS REQUIRED TO BE DISTRIBUTED

14 CURRENTLY.—The amount of income for the taxable 

15 year required to be distributed currently to such 

16 beneficiary, whether distributed or not. If the 

17 amount of income required to be distributed cur18 rently to all beneficiaries exceeds the distributable 

19 net income (computed without the deduction allowed 

20 by section 142(b), relating to deduction for chari21 table, etc., purposes) of the estate or trust, then, in 

22 lieu of the amount provided in the preceding sen23 tence, there shall be included in the gross income of 

24 the beneficiary an amount which bears the same 

25 ratio to distributable net income (as so computed) as 
220 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the amount of income required to be distributed cur2 rently to such beneficiary bears to the amount re3 quired to be distributed currently to all beneficiaries. 

4 For purposes of this section, the phrase ‘the amount 

5 of income for the taxable year required to be distrib6 uted currently’ includes any amount required to be 

7 paid out of income or corpus to the extent such 

8 amount is paid out of income for such taxable year. 

9 ‘‘(2) OTHER AMOUNTS DISTRIBUTED.—All 

10 other amounts properly paid, credited, or required to 

11 be distributed to such beneficiary for the taxable 

12 year. If the sum of— 

13 ‘‘(A) the amount of income for the taxable 

14 year required to be distributed currently to all 

15 beneficiaries, and 

16 ‘‘(B) all other amounts properly paid, cred17 ited, or required to be distributed to all bene18 ficiaries 

19 exceeds the distributable net income of the estate or 

20 trust, then, in lieu of the amount provided in the 

21 preceding sentence, there shall be included in the 

22 gross income of the beneficiary an amount which 

23 bears the same ratio to distributable net income (re24 duced by the amounts specified in (A)) as the other 

25 amounts properly paid, credited or required to be 
221 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 distributed to the beneficiary bear to the other 

2 amounts properly paid, credited, or required to be 

3 distributed to all beneficiaries. 

4 ‘‘(b) CHARACTER OF AMOUNTS.—The amounts de5 termined under subsection (a) shall have the same char6 acter in the hands of the beneficiary as in the hands of 

7 the estate or trust. For this purpose, the amounts shall 

8 be treated as consisting of the same proportion of each 

9 class of items entering into the computation of distribut10 able net income as the total of each class bears to the 

11 total distributable net income of the estate or trust unless 

12 the terms of the governing instrument specifically allocate 

13 different classes of income to different beneficiaries. In the 

14 application of the preceding sentence, the items of deduc15 tion entering into the computation of distributable net in16 come (including the deduction allowed under section 

17 142(b)) shall be allocated among the items of distributable 

18 net income in accordance with regulations prescribed by 

19 the Secretary. In the application of this subsection to the 

20 amount determined under paragraph (1) of subsection (a), 

21 distributable net income shall be computed without regard 

22 to any portion of the deduction under section 142(b) which 

23 is not attributable to income of the taxable year. 
222 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘SEC. 148. SPECIAL RULES APPLICABLE TO SECTIONS 146 

2 AND 147. 

3 ‘‘(a) EXCLUSIONS.—There shall not be included as 

4 amounts falling within section 146(a) or 147(a)— 

5 ‘‘(1) GIFTS, BEQUESTS, ETC.—Any amount 

6 which, under the terms of the governing instrument, 

7 is properly paid or credited as a gift or bequest of 

8 a specific sum of money or of specific property and 

9 which is paid or credited all at once or in not more 

10 than 3 installments. For this purpose an amount 

11 which can be paid or credited only from the income 

12 of the estate or trust shall not be considered as a 

13 gift or bequest of a specific sum of money. 

14 ‘‘(2) CHARITABLE, ETC., DISTRIBUTIONS.—Any 

15 amount paid or permanently set aside or otherwise 

16 qualifying for the deduction provided in section 

17 142(b) (computed without regard to sections 508(d), 

18 162, and 4948(c)(4)). 

19 ‘‘(3) DENIAL OF DOUBLE DEDUCTION.—Any 

20 amount paid, credited, or distributed in the taxable 

21 year, if section 144 or section 146 applied to such 

22 amount for a preceding taxable year of an estate or 

23 trust because credited or required to be distributed 

24 in such preceding taxable year. 

25 ‘‘(b) DISTRIBUTIONS IN FIRST SIXTY-FIVE DAYS OF

26 TAXABLE YEAR.— 
223 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(1) GENERAL RULE.—If within the first 65 

2 days of any taxable year of an estate or a trust, an 

3 amount is properly paid or credited, such amount 

4 shall be considered paid or credited on the last day 

5 of the preceding taxable year. 

6 ‘‘(2) LIMITATION.—Paragraph (1) shall apply 

7 with respect to any taxable year of an estate or a 

8 trust only if the executor of such estate or the fidu9 ciary of such trust (as the case may be) elects, in 

10 such manner and at such time as the Secretary pre11 scribes by regulations, to have paragraph (1) apply 

12 for such taxable year. 

13 ‘‘(c) SEPARATE SHARES TREATED AS SEPARATE ES14 TATES OR TRUSTS.—For the sole purpose of determining 

15 the amount of distributable net income in the application 

16 of sections 146 and 147, in the case of a single trust hav17 ing more than one beneficiary, substantially separate and 

18 independent shares of different beneficiaries in the trust 

19 shall be treated as separate trusts. Rules similar to the 

20 rules of the preceding provisions of this subsection shall 

21 apply to treat substantially separate and independent 

22 shares of different beneficiaries in an estate having more 

23 than 1 beneficiary as separate estates. The existence of 

24 such substantially separate and independent shares and 

25 the manner of treatment as separate trusts or estates, in-
224 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 cluding the application of sections 150 through 152, shall 

2 be determined in accordance with regulations prescribed 

3 by the Secretary. 

4 ‘‘SEC. 149. CHARITABLE REMAINDER TRUSTS. 

5 ‘‘(a) GENERAL RULE.—Notwithstanding any other 

6 provision of this subchapter, the provisions of this section 

7 shall, in accordance with regulations prescribed by the 

8 Secretary, apply in the case of a charitable remainder an9 nuity trust and a charitable remainder unitrust. 

10 ‘‘(b) CHARACTER OF DISTRIBUTIONS.—Amounts dis11 tributed by a charitable remainder annuity trust or by a 

12 charitable remainder unitrust shall be considered as hav13 ing the following characteristics in the hands of a bene14 ficiary to whom is paid the annuity described in subsection 

15 (d)(1)(A) or the payment described in subsection 

16 (d)(2)(A): 

17 ‘‘(1) First, as amounts of income (other than 

18 gains, and amounts treated as gains, from the sale 

19 or other disposition of capital assets) includible in 

20 gross income to the extent of such income of the 

21 trust for the year and such undistributed income of 

22 the trust for prior years; 

23 ‘‘(2) Second, as a capital gain to the extent of 

24 the capital gain of the trust for the year and the un25 distributed capital gain of the trust for prior years; 
225 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(3) Third, as other income to the extent of 

2 such income of the trust for the year and such un3 distributed income of the trust for prior years; and 

4 ‘‘(4) Fourth, as a distribution of trust corpus. 

5 For purposes of this section, the trust shall determine the 

6 amount of its undistributed capital gain on a cumulative 

7 net basis. 

8 ‘‘(c) EXEMPTION FROM INCOME TAXES.—A chari9 table remainder annuity trust and a charitable remainder 

10 unitrust shall, for any taxable year, not be subject to any 

11 tax imposed by this chapter. Any such trust shall be liable 

12 for tax on its unrelated business taxable income (within 

13 the meaning of section 255). 

14 ‘‘(d) DEFINITIONS.— 

15 ‘‘(1) CHARITABLE REMAINDER ANNUITY

16 TRUST.—For purposes of this section, a charitable 

17 remainder annuity trust is a trust— 

18 ‘‘(A) from which a sum certain (which is 

19 not less than 5 percent nor more than 50 per20 cent of the initial net fair market value of all 

21 property placed in trust) is to be paid, not less 

22 often than annually, to one or more persons (at 

23 least one of which is not an organization de24 scribed in section 101(c) and, in the case of in25 dividuals, only to an individual who is living at 
226 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the time of the creation of the trust) for a term 

2 of years (not in excess of 20 years) or for the 

3 life or lives of such individual or individuals, 

4 ‘‘(B) from which no amount other than the 

5 payments described in subparagraph (A) and 

6 other than qualified gratuitous transfers de7 scribed in subparagraph (C) may be paid to or 

8 for the use of any person other than an organi9 zation described in section 101(c), 

10 ‘‘(C) following the termination of the pay11 ments described in subparagraph (A), the re12 mainder interest in the trust is to be trans13 ferred to, or for the use of, an organization de14 scribed in section 101(c) or is to be retained by 

15 the trust for such a use or, to the extent the 

16 remainder interest is in qualified employer secu17 rities (as defined in subsection (g)(4)), all or 

18 part of such securities are to be transferred to 

19 an employee stock ownership plan (as defined in 

20 section 4975(e)(7) in a qualified gratuitous 

21 transfer (as defined by subsection (g)). 

22 ‘‘(D) the value (determined under section 

23 7520) of such remainder interest is at least 10 

24 percent of the initial net fair market value of all 

25 property placed in the trust. 
227 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) CHARITABLE REMAINDER UNITRUST.—For 

2 purposes of this section, a charitable remainder 

3 unitrust is a trust— 

4 ‘‘(A) from which a fixed percentage (which 

5 is not less than 5 percent nor more than 50 

6 percent) of the net fair market value of its as7 sets, valued annually, is to be paid, not less 

8 often than annually, to one or more persons (at 

9 least one of which is not an organization de10 scribed in section 101(c) and, in the case of in11 dividuals, only to an individual who is living at 

12 the time of the creation of the trust) for a term 

13 of years (not in excess of 20 years) or for the 

14 life or lives of such individual or individuals, 

15 ‘‘(B) from which no amount other than the 

16 payments described in subparagraph (A) and 

17 other than qualified gratuitous transfers de18 scribed in subparagraph (C) may be paid to or 

19 for the use of any person other than an organi20 zation described in section 101(c), 

21 ‘‘(C) following the termination of the pay22 ments described in subparagraph (A), the re23 mainder interest in the trust is to be trans24 ferred to, or for the use of, an organization de25 scribed in section 101(c) or is to be retained by 
228 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the trust for such a use or, to the extent the 

2 remainder interest is in qualified employer secu3 rities (as defined in subsection (g)(4)), all or 

4 part of such securities are to be transferred to 

5 an employee stock ownership plan (as defined in 

6 section 4975(e)(7) in a qualified gratuitous 

7 transfer (as defined by subsection (g)). 

8 ‘‘(D) with respect to each contribution of 

9 property to the trust, the value (determined 

10 under section 7520 of such remainder interest 

11 in such property is at least 10 percent of the 

12 net fair market value of such property as of the 

13 date such property is contributed to the trust. 

14 ‘‘(3) EXCEPTION.—Notwithstanding the provi15 sions of paragraphs (2)(A) and (B), the trust instru16 ment may provide that the trustee shall pay the in17 come beneficiary for any year— 

18 ‘‘(A) the amount of the trust income, if 

19 such amount is less than the amount required 

20 to be distributed under paragraph (2)(A), and 

21 ‘‘(B) any amount of the trust income 

22 which is in excess of the amount required to be 

23 distributed under paragraph (2)(A), to the ex24 tent that (by reason of subparagraph (A)) the 

25 aggregate of the amounts paid in prior years 
229 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 was less than the aggregate of such required 

2 amounts. 

3 ‘‘(4) SEVERANCE OF CERTAIN ADDITIONAL

4 CONTRIBUTIONS.—If— 

5 ‘‘(A) any contribution is made to a trust 

6 which before the contribution is a charitable re7 mainder unitrust, and 

8 ‘‘(B) such contribution would (but for this 

9 paragraph) result in such trust ceasing to be a 

10 charitable unitrust by reason of paragraph 

11 (2)(D), such contribution shall be treated as a 

12 transfer to a separate trust under regulations 

13 prescribed by the Secretary. 

14 ‘‘(e) VALUATION FOR PURPOSES OF CHARITABLE

15 CONTRIBUTION.—For purposes of determining the 

16 amount of any charitable contribution, the remainder in17 terest of a charitable remainder annuity trust or charitable 

18 remainder unitrust shall be computed on the basis that 

19 an amount equal to 5 percent of the net fair market value 

20 of its assets (or a greater amount, if required under the 

21 terms of the trust instrument) is to be distributed each 

22 year. 

23 ‘‘(f) CERTAIN CONTINGENCIES PERMITTED.— 

24 ‘‘(1) GENERAL RULE.—If a trust would, but for 

25 a qualified contingency, meet the requirements of 
230 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 paragraph (1)(A) or (2)(A) of subsection (d), such 

2 trust shall be treated as meeting such requirements. 

3 ‘‘(2) VALUE DETERMINED WITHOUT REGARD

4 TO QUALIFIED CONTINGENCY.—For purposes of de5 termining the amount of any charitable contribution 

6 (or the actuarial value of any interest), a qualified 

7 contingency shall not be taken into account. 

8 ‘‘(3) QUALIFIED CONTINGENCY.—For purposes 

9 of this subsection, the term ‘qualified contingency’ 

10 means any provision of a trust which provides that, 

11 upon the happening of a contingency, the payments 

12 described in paragraph (1)(A) or (2)(A) of sub13 section (d) (as the case may be) will terminate not 

14 later than such payments would otherwise terminate 

15 under the trust. 

16 ‘‘(g) QUALIFIED GRATUITOUS TRANSFER OF QUALI17 FIED EMPLOYER SECURITIES.— 

18 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—For purposes of this sec19 tion, the term ‘qualified gratuitous transfer’ means 

20 a transfer of qualified employer securities to an em21 ployee stock ownership plan (as defined in section 

22 4975(e)(7) but only to the extent that— 

23 ‘‘(A) the securities transferred previously 

24 passed from a decedent dying before January 1, 
231 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 2005, to a trust described in paragraph (1) or 

2 (2) of subsection (d), 

3 ‘‘(B) no deduction under section 404 is al4 lowable with respect to such transfer, 

5 ‘‘(C) such plan contains the provisions re6 quired by paragraph (3), 

7 ‘‘(D) such plan treats such securities as 

8 being attributable to employer contributions but 

9 without regard to the limitations otherwise ap10 plicable to such contributions under section 

11 404, and 

12 ‘‘(E) the employer whose employees are 

13 covered by the plan described in this paragraph 

14 files with the Secretary a verified written state15 ment consenting to the application of sections 

16 4978 and 4979A with respect to such employer. 

17 ‘‘(2) EXCEPTION.—The term ‘qualified gratu18 itous transfer’ shall not include a transfer of quali19 fied employer securities to an employee stock owner20 ship plan unless— 

21 ‘‘(A) such plan was in existence on August 

22 1, 1996, 

23 ‘‘(B) at the time of the transfer, the dece24 dent and members of the decedent’s family 

25 (within the meaning of section 171(a)(6)(D)) 
232 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 own (directly or through constructive ownership 

2 rules) no more than 10 percent of the value of 

3 the stock of the corporation referred to in para4 graph (4), and 

5 ‘‘(C) immediately after the transfer, such 

6 plan owns (after the application of section 

7 318(a)(4) at least 60 percent of the value of the 

8 outstanding stock of the corporation. 

9 ‘‘(3) PLAN REQUIREMENTS.—A plan contains 

10 the provisions required by this paragraph if such 

11 plan provides that— 

12 ‘‘(A) the qualified employer securities so 

13 transferred are allocated to plan participants in 

14 a manner consistent with section 401(a)(4), 

15 ‘‘(B) plan participants are entitled to di16 rect the plan as to the manner in which such 

17 securities which are entitled to vote and are al18 located to the account of such participant are to 

19 be voted, 

20 ‘‘(C) an independent trustee votes the se21 curities so transferred which are not allocated 

22 to plan participants, 

23 ‘‘(D) each participant who is entitled to a 

24 distribution from the plan has the rights de-
233 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 scribed in subparagraphs (A) and (B) of section 

2 409(h)(1), 

3 ‘‘(E) such securities are held in a suspense 

4 account under the plan to be allocated each 

5 year, up to the limitations under section 415(c), 

6 after first allocating all other annual additions 

7 for the limitation year, up to the limitations 

8 under sections 415 (c) and (e), and 

9 ‘‘(F) on termination of the plan, all securi10 ties so transferred which are not allocated to 

11 plan participants as of such termination are to 

12 be transferred to, or for the use of, an organi13 zation described in section 101(c). For purposes 

14 of the preceding sentence, the term ‘inde15 pendent trustee’ means any trustee who is not 

16 a member of the family (within the meaning of 

17 section 171(a)(6)(D)) of the decedent or a 5- 

18 percent shareholder. A plan shall not fail to be 

19 treated as meeting the requirements of section 

20 401(a) by reason of meeting the requirements 

21 of this subsection. 

22 ‘‘(4) QUALIFIED EMPLOYER SECURITIES.—For 

23 purposes of this section, the term ‘qualified employer 

24 securities’ means employer securities (as defined in 
234 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 section 409(l)) which are issued by a domestic cor2 poration— 

3 ‘‘(A) which has no outstanding stock which 

4 is readily tradable on an established securities 

5 market, and 

6 ‘‘(B) which has only 1 class of stock. 

7 ‘‘(5) TREATMENT OF SECURITIES ALLOCATED

8 BY EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PLAN TO PER9 SONS RELATED TO DECEDENT OR 5-PERCENT

10 SHAREHOLDERS.— 

11 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—If any portion of the 

12 assets of the plan attributable to securities ac13 quired by the plan in a qualified gratuitous 

14 transfer are allocated to the account of— 

15 ‘‘(i) any person who is related to the 

16 decedent (within the meaning of section 

17 171(a)(5) or a member of the decedent’s 

18 family (within the meaning of section 

19 171(a)(6)(D), or 

20 ‘‘(ii) any person who, at the time of 

21 such allocation or at any time during the 

22 1-year period ending on the date of the ac23 quisition of qualified employer securities by 

24 the plan, is a 5-percent shareholder of the 

25 employer maintaining the plan, the plan 
235 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 shall be treated as having distributed (at 

2 the time of such allocation) to such person 

3 or shareholder the amount so allocated. 

4 ‘‘(B) 5-PERCENT SHAREHOLDER.—For 

5 purposes of subparagraph (A), the term ‘5-per6 cent shareholder’ means any person who owns 

7 (directly or through the application of construc8 tive ownership rules) more than 5 percent of 

9 the outstanding stock of the corporation which 

10 issued such qualified employer securities or of 

11 any corporation which is a member of the same 

12 controlled group of corporations (within the 

13 meaning of section 409(l)(4)) as such corpora14 tion. 

15 ‘‘(C) CROSS REFERENCE.—For excise tax 

16 on allocations described in subparagraph (A), 

17 see section 4979A. 

18 ‘‘(6) TAX ON FAILURE TO TRANSFER

19 UNALLOCATED SECURITIES TO CHARITY ON TERMI20 NATION OF PLAN.—If the requirements of paragraph 

21 (3)(F) are not met with respect to any securities, 

22 there is hereby imposed a tax on the employer main23 taining the plan in an amount equal to the sum of— 

24 ‘‘(A) the amount of the increase in the tax 

25 which would be imposed by chapter 11 if such 
236 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 securities were not transferred as described in 

2 paragraph (1), and 

3 ‘‘(B) interest on such amount at the un4 derpayment rate under section 6621 (and com5 pounded daily) from the due date for filing the 

6 return of the tax imposed by chapter 11. 

7 ‘‘SEC. 150. DEFINITIONS APPLICABLE TO EXCESS DISTRIBU8 TION RULES. 

9 ‘‘(a) UNDISTRIBUTED NET INCOME.—For purposes 

10 of sections 150 through 152, the term ‘undistributed net 

11 income’ for any taxable year means the amount by which 

12 the distributable net income of the trust for such taxable 

13 year exceeds the sum of— 

14 ‘‘(1) the amounts for such taxable year speci15 fied in paragraphs (1) and (2) of section 146(a), 

16 and 

17 ‘‘(2) the amount of taxes imposed on the trust 

18 attributable to such distributable net income. 

19 ‘‘(b) ACCUMULATION DISTRIBUTION.—For purposes 

20 of sections 150 through 152, except as provided in sub21 section (c), the term ‘accumulation distribution’ means, 

22 for any taxable year of the trust, the amount by which— 

23 ‘‘(1) the amounts specified in paragraph (2) of 

24 section 146(a) for such taxable year, exceed 
237 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) distributable net income for such year re2 duced (but not below zero) by the amounts specified 

3 in paragraph (1) of section 146(a). 

4 For purposes of section 152 (other than subsection (c) 

5 thereof, relating to multiple trusts), the amounts specified 

6 in paragraph (2) of section 146(a) shall not include 

7 amounts properly paid, credited, or required to be distrib8 uted to a beneficiary from a trust (other than a foreign 

9 trust) as income accumulated before the birth of such ben10 eficiary or before such beneficiary attains the age of 21. 

11 If the amounts properly paid, credited, or required to be 

12 distributed by the trust for the taxable year do not exceed 

13 the income of the trust for such year, there shall be no 

14 accumulation distribution for such year. 

15 ‘‘(c) EXCEPTION FOR ACCUMULATION DISTRIBU16 TIONS FROM CERTAIN DOMESTIC TRUSTS.—For purposes 

17 of sections 150 through 152— 

18 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—In the case of a qualified 

19 trust, any distribution in any taxable year beginning 

20 after the date of the enactment of this subsection 

21 shall be computed without regard to any undistrib22 uted net income. 

23 ‘‘(2) QUALIFIED TRUST.—For purposes of this 

24 subsection, the term ‘qualified trust’ means any 

25 trust other than— 
238 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(A) a foreign trust (or, except as provided 

2 in regulations, a domestic trust which at any 

3 time was a foreign trust), or 

4 ‘‘(B) a trust created before March 1, 1984, 

5 unless it is established that the trust would not 

6 be aggregated with other trusts under section 

7 143(f) if such section applied to such trust. 

8 ‘‘(d) TAXES IMPOSED ON THE TRUST.—For purposes 

9 of sections 150 through 152— 

10 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—The term ‘taxes imposed 

11 on the trust’ means the amount of the taxes which 

12 are imposed for any taxable year of the trust under 

13 this chapter (without regard to sections 150 through 

14 152) and which, under regulations prescribed by the 

15 Secretary, are properly allocable to the undistributed 

16 portions of distributable net income and gains in ex17 cess of losses from sales or exchanges of capital as18 sets. The amount determined in the preceding sen19 tence shall be reduced by any amount of such taxes 

20 deemed distributed under section 151(b) and (c) to 

21 any beneficiary. 

22 ‘‘(2) FOREIGN TRUSTS.—In the case of any for23 eign trust, the term ‘taxes imposed on the trust’ in24 cludes the amount, reduced as provided in the last 

25 sentence of paragraph (1), of any income, war prof-
239 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 its, and excess profits taxes imposed by any foreign 

2 country or possession of the United States on such 

3 foreign trust which, as determined under paragraph 

4 (1), are so properly allocable. Under rules or regula5 tions prescribed by the Secretary, in the case of any 

6 foreign trust of which the settlor or another person 

7 would be treated as owner of any portion of the 

8 trust but for section 154(f), the term ‘taxes imposed 

9 on the trust’ includes the allocable amount of any 

10 income, war profits, and excess profits taxes imposed 

11 by any foreign country or possession of the United 

12 States on the settlor or such other person in respect 

13 of trust income. 

14 ‘‘SEC. 151. ACCUMULATION DISTRIBUTION ALLOCATED TO 

15 PRECEDING YEARS. 

16 ‘‘(a) AMOUNT ALLOCATED.—In the case of a trust 

17 which is subject to sections 146 through 149, the amount 

18 of the accumulation distribution of such trust for a taxable 

19 year shall be deemed to be an amount within the meaning 

20 of paragraph (2) of section 146(a) distributed on the last 

21 day of each of the preceding taxable years, commencing 

22 with the earliest of such years, to the extent that such 

23 amount exceeds the total of any undistributed net income 

24 for all earlier preceding taxable years. The amount deemed 

25 to be distributed in any such preceding taxable year under 
240 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the preceding sentence shall not exceed the undistributed 

2 net income for such preceding taxable year. For purposes 

3 of this subsection, undistributed net income for each of 

4 such preceding taxable years shall be computed without 

5 regard to such accumulation distribution and without re6 gard to any accumulation distribution determined for any 

7 succeeding taxable year. 

8 ‘‘(b) TOTAL TAXES DEEMED DISTRIBUTED.—If any 

9 portion of an accumulation distribution for any taxable 

10 year is deemed under subsection (a) to be an amount with11 in the meaning of paragraph (2) of section 146(a) distrib12 uted on the last day of any preceding taxable year, and 

13 such portion of such distribution is not less than the un14 distributed net income for such preceding taxable year, the 

15 trust shall be deemed to have distributed on the last day 

16 of such preceding taxable year an additional amount with17 in the meaning of paragraph (2) of section 146(a). Such 

18 additional amount shall be equal to the taxes imposed on 

19 the trust for such preceding taxable year attributable to 

20 the undistributed net income. For purposes of this sub21 section, the undistributed net income and the taxes im22 posed on the trust for such preceding taxable year attrib23 utable to such undistributed net income shall be computed 

24 without regard to such accumulation distribution and 
241 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 without regard to any accumulation distribution deter2 mined for any succeeding taxable year. 

3 ‘‘(c) PRO RATA PORTION OF TAXES DEEMED DIS4 TRIBUTED.—If any portion of an accumulation distribu5 tion for any taxable year is deemed under subsection (a) 

6 to be an amount within the meaning of paragraph (2) of 

7 section 146(a) distributed on the last day of any preceding 

8 taxable year and such portion of the accumulation dis9 tribution is less than the undistributed net income for such 

10 preceding taxable year, the trust shall be deemed to have 

11 distributed on the last day of such preceding taxable year 

12 an additional amount within the meaning of paragraph (2) 

13 of section 146(a). Such additional amount shall be equal 

14 to the taxes imposed on the trust for such taxable year 

15 attributable to the undistributed net income multiplied by 

16 the ratio of the portion of the accumulation distribution 

17 to the undistributed net income of the trust for such year. 

18 For purposes of this subsection, the undistributed net in19 come and the taxes imposed on the trust for such pre20 ceding taxable year attributable to such undistributed net 

21 income shall be computed without regard to the accumula22 tion distribution and without regard to any accumulation 

23 distribution determined for any succeeding taxable year. 

24 ‘‘(d) RULE WHEN INFORMATION IS NOT AVAIL25 ABLE.—If adequate records are not available to determine 
242 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the proper application of this subchapter to an amount 

2 distributed by a trust, such amount shall be deemed to 

3 be an accumulation distribution consisting of undistrib4 uted net income earned during the earliest preceding tax5 able year of the trust in which it can be established that 

6 the trust was in existence. 

7 ‘‘(e) DENIAL OF REFUND TO TRUSTS AND BENE8 FICIARIES.—No refund or credit shall be allowed to a trust 

9 or a beneficiary of such trust for any preceding taxable 

10 year by reason of a distribution deemed to have been made 

11 by such trust in such year under this section. 

12 ‘‘SEC. 152. TREATMENT OF AMOUNTS DEEMED DISTRIB13 UTED BY TRUST IN PRECEDING YEARS. 

14 ‘‘(a) GENERAL RULE.—The total of the amounts 

15 which are treated under section 151 as having been dis16 tributed by a trust in a preceding taxable year shall be 

17 included in the income of a beneficiary of the trust when 

18 paid, credited, or required to be distributed to the extent 

19 that such total would have been included in the income 

20 of such beneficiary under section 147(a)(2) (and, with re21 spect to any tax-exempt interest to which section 103 ap22 plies, under section 147(b)) if such total had been paid 

23 to such beneficiary on the last day of such preceding tax24 able year. The tax imposed by this subtitle on a beneficiary 

25 for a taxable year in which any such amount is included 
243 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 in his income shall be determined only as provided in this 

2 section and shall consist of the sum of— 

3 ‘‘(1) a partial tax computed on the taxable in4 come reduced by an amount equal to the total of 

5 such amounts, at the rate and in the manner as if 

6 this section had not been enacted, 

7 ‘‘(2) a partial tax determined as provided in 

8 subsection (b) of this section, and 

9 ‘‘(3) in the case of a foreign trust, the interest 

10 charge determined as provided in section 152. 

11 ‘‘(b) TAX ON DISTRIBUTION.— 

12 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—The partial tax imposed by 

13 subsection (a)(2) shall be determined. 

14 ‘‘(A) by determining the number of pre15 ceding taxable years of the trust on the last day 

16 of which an amount is deemed under section 

17 151(a) to have been distributed, 

18 ‘‘(B) by taking from the 5 taxable years 

19 immediately preceding the year of the accumu20 lation distribution the 1 taxable year for which 

21 the beneficiary’s taxable income was the highest 

22 and the 1 taxable year for which his taxable in23 come was the lowest, 

24 ‘‘(C) by adding to the beneficiary’s taxable 

25 income for each of the 3 taxable years remain-
244 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ing after the application of subparagraph (B) 

2 an amount determined by dividing the amount 

3 deemed distributed under section 151 and re4 quired to be included in income under sub5 section (a) by the number of preceding taxable 

6 years determined under subparagraph (A), and 

7 ‘‘(D) by determining the average increase 

8 in tax for the 3 taxable years referred to in sub9 paragraph (C) resulting from the application of 

10 such subparagraph. 

11 The partial tax imposed by subsection (a)(2) shall be 

12 the excess (if any) of the average increase in tax de13 termined under subparagraph (D), multiplied by the 

14 number of preceding taxable years determined under 

15 subparagraph (A), over the amount of taxes (other 

16 than the amount of taxes described in section 

17 150(d)(2)) deemed distributed to the beneficiary 

18 under sections 151 (b) and (c). 

19 ‘‘(2) TREATMENT OF LOSS YEARS.—For pur20 poses of paragraph (1), the taxable income of the 

21 beneficiary for any taxable year shall be deemed to 

22 be not less than zero. 

23 ‘‘(3) CERTAIN PRECEDING TAXABLE YEARS NOT

24 TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT.—For purposes of paragraph 

25 (1), if the amount of the undistributed net income 
245 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 deemed distributed in any preceding taxable year of 

2 the trust is less than 25 percent of the amount of 

3 the accumulation distribution divided by the number 

4 of preceding taxable years to which the accumulation 

5 distribution is allocated under section 151(a), the 

6 number of preceding taxable years of the trust with 

7 respect to which an amount is deemed distributed to 

8 a beneficiary under section 151(a) shall be deter9 mined without regard to such year. 

10 ‘‘(4) EFFECT OF OTHER ACCUMULATION DIS11 TRIBUTIONS.—In computing the partial tax under 

12 paragraph (1) for any beneficiary, the income of 

13 such beneficiary for each of his prior taxable years 

14 shall include amounts previously deemed distributed 

15 to such beneficiary in such year under section 151 

16 as a result of prior accumulation distributions 

17 (whether from the same or another trust). 

18 ‘‘(5) MULTIPLE DISTRIBUTIONS IN THE SAME

19 TAXABLE YEAR.—In the case of accumulation dis20 tributions made from more than one trust which are 

21 includible in the income of a beneficiary in the same 

22 taxable year, the distributions shall be deemed to 

23 have been made consecutively in whichever order the 

24 beneficiary shall determine. Generation-skipping 

25 transfer bears to the total accumulation distribution. 
246 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(c) SPECIAL RULE FOR MULTIPLE TRUSTS.— 

2 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—If, in the same prior tax3 able year of the beneficiary in which any part of the 

4 accumulation distribution from a trust (hereinafter 

5 in this paragraph referred to as ‘third trust’) is 

6 deemed under section 151(a) to have been distrib7 uted to such beneficiary, some part of prior distribu8 tions by each of 2 or more other trusts is deemed 

9 under section 151(a) to have been distributed to 

10 such beneficiary, then subsections (b) and (c) of sec11 tion 151 shall not apply with respect to such part 

12 of the accumulation distribution from such third 

13 trust. 

14 ‘‘(2) ACCUMULATION DISTRIBUTIONS FROM

15 TRUST NOT TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT UNLESS THEY

16 EQUAL OR EXCEED $1,000.—For purposes of para17 graph (1), an accumulation distribution from a trust 

18 to a beneficiary shall be taken into account only if 

19 such distribution, when added to any prior accumu20 lation distributions from such trust which are 

21 deemed under section 151(a) to have been distrib22 uted to such beneficiary for the same prior taxable 

23 year of the beneficiary, equals or exceeds $1,000. 
247 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘SEC. 153. TRUST INCOME, DEDUCTIONS, AND CREDITS AT2 TRIBUTABLE TO GRANTORS AND OTHERS AS 

3 SUBSTANTIAL OWNERS. 

4 ‘‘Where it is specified in sections 153 through 161 

5 that the grantor or another person shall be treated as the 

6 owner of any portion of a trust, there shall then be in7 cluded in computing the taxable income and credits of the 

8 grantor or the other person those items of income, deduc9 tions, and credits against tax of the trust which are attrib10 utable to that portion of the trust to the extent that such 

11 items would be taken into account under this chapter in 

12 computing taxable income or credits against the tax of an 

13 individual. Any remaining portion of the trust shall be 

14 subject to sections 140 through 152. No items of a trust 

15 shall be included in computing the taxable income and 

16 credits of the grantor or of any other person solely on the 

17 grounds of his dominion and control over the trust under 

18 section 61 (relating to definition of gross income) or any 

19 other provision of this title, except as specified in this sub20 part. 

21 ‘‘SEC. 154. DEFINITIONS AND RULES. 

22 ‘‘(a) ADVERSE PARTY.—For purposes of sections 153 

23 through 160, ‘adverse party’ means any person having a 

24 substantial beneficial interest in the trust which would be 

25 adversely affected by the exercise or nonexercise of the 

26 power which he possesses respecting the trust. A person 
248 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 having a general power of appointment over the trust 

2 property shall be deemed to have a beneficial interest in 

3 the trust. 

4 ‘‘(b) NONADVERSE PARTY.—For purposes of sections 

5 153 through 160, ‘nonadverse party’ means any person 

6 who is not an adverse party. 

7 ‘‘(c) RELATED OR SUBORDINATE PARTY.—For pur8 poses of sections 153 through 161, ‘related or subordinate 

9 party’ means any nonadverse party who is— 

10 ‘‘(1) the grantor’s spouse if living with the 

11 grantor; 

12 ‘‘(2) any one of the following: The grantor’s fa13 ther, mother, issue, brother or sister; an employee of 

14 the grantor; a corporation or any employee of a cor15 poration in which the stock holdings of the grantor 

16 and the trust are significant from the viewpoint of 

17 voting control; a subordinate employee of a corpora18 tion in which the grantor is an executive. 

19 For purposes of subsection (f) and sections 156 and 157, 

20 a related or subordinate party shall be presumed to be 

21 subservient to the grantor in respect of the exercise or 

22 nonexercise of the powers conferred on him unless such 

23 party is shown not to be subservient by a preponderance 

24 of the evidence. 
249 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(d) RULE WHERE POWER IS SUBJECT TO CONDI2 TION PRECEDENT.—A person shall be considered to have 

3 a power described in sections 153 through 161 even 

4 though the exercise of the power is subject to a precedent 

5 giving of notice or takes effect only on the expiration of 

6 a certain period after the exercise of the power. 

7 ‘‘(e) GRANTOR TREATED AS HOLDING ANY POWER

8 OR INTEREST OF GRANTOR’S SPOUSE.— 

9 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—For purposes of sections 

10 153 through 160, a grantor shall be treated as hold11 ing any power or interest held by— 

12 ‘‘(A) any individual who was the spouse of 

13 the grantor at the time of the creation of such 

14 power or interest, or 

15 ‘‘(B) any individual who became the spouse 

16 of the grantor after the creation of such power 

17 or interest, but only with respect to periods 

18 after such individual became the spouse of the 

19 grantor. 

20 ‘‘(2) MARITAL STATUS.—For purposes of para21 graph (1)(A), an individual legally separated from 

22 his spouse under a decree of divorce or of separate 

23 maintenance shall not be considered as married. 

24 ‘‘(f) RULES NOT TO RESULT IN FOREIGN OWNER25 SHIP.— 
250 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—Notwithstanding any other 

2 provision in sections 153 through 160, sections 153 

3 through 160 shall apply only to the extent such ap4 plication results in an amount (if any) being cur5 rently taken into account (directly or through 1 or 

6 more entities) under this chapter in computing the 

7 income of a citizen or resident of the United States 

8 or a domestic corporation. 

9 ‘‘(2) EXCEPTIONS.— 

10 ‘‘(A) CERTAIN REVOCABLE AND IRREV11 OCABLE TRUSTS.—Paragraph (1) shall not 

12 apply to any portion of a trust if— 

13 ‘‘(i) the power to revest absolutely in 

14 the grantor title to the trust property to 

15 which such portion is attributable is exer16 cisable solely by the grantor without the 

17 approval or consent of any other person or 

18 with the consent of a related or subordi19 nate party who is subservient to the grant20 or, or 

21 ‘‘(ii) the only amounts distributable 

22 from such portion (whether income or cor23 pus) during the lifetime of the grantor are 

24 amounts distributable to the grantor or the 

25 spouse of the grantor. 
251 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) COMPENSATORY TRUSTS.—Except as 

2 provided in regulations, paragraph (1) shall not 

3 apply to any portion of a trust distributions 

4 from which are taxable as compensation for 

5 services rendered. 

6 ‘‘(3) SPECIAL RULES.—Except as otherwise 

7 provided in regulations prescribed by the Secretary, 

8 a controlled foreign corporation shall be treated as 

9 a domestic corporation for purposes of paragraph 

10 (1). 

11 ‘‘(4) RECHARACTERIZATION OF PURPORTED

12 GIFTS.—In the case of any transfer directly or indi13 rectly from a partnership or foreign corporation 

14 which the transferee treats as a gift or bequest, the 

15 Secretary may recharacterize such transfer in such 

16 circumstances as the Secretary determines to be ap17 propriate to prevent the avoidance of the purposes of 

18 this subsection. 

19 ‘‘(5) SPECIAL RULE WHERE GRANTOR IS FOR20 EIGN PERSON.—If— 

21 ‘‘(A) but for this subsection, a foreign per22 son would be treated as the owner of any por23 tion of a trust, and 

24 ‘‘(B) such trust has a beneficiary who is a 

25 United States person, such beneficiary shall be 
252 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 treated as the grantor of such portion to the ex2 tent such beneficiary has made (directly or indi3 rectly) transfers of property (other than in a 

4 sale for full and adequate consideration) to 

5 such foreign person. 

6 ‘‘(6) REGULATIONS.—The Secretary shall pre7 scribe such regulations as may be necessary or ap8 propriate to carry out the purposes of this sub9 section, including regulations providing that para10 graph (1) shall not apply in appropriate cases. 

11 ‘‘SEC. 155. REVERSIONARY INTERESTS. 

12 ‘‘(a) GENERAL RULE.—The grantor shall be treated 

13 as the owner of any portion of a trust in which he has 

14 a reversionary interest in either the corpus or the income 

15 therefrom, if, as of the inception of that portion of the 

16 trust, the value of such interest exceeds 5 percent of the 

17 value of such portion. 

18 ‘‘(b) REVERSIONARY INTEREST TAKING EFFECT AT

19 DEATH OF MINOR LINEAL DESCENDANT BENE20 FICIARY.—In the case of any beneficiary who— 

21 ‘‘(1) is a lineal descendant of the grantor, and 

22 ‘‘(2) holds all of the present interests in any 

23 portion of a trust, the grantor shall not be treated 

24 under subsection (a) as the owner of such portion 

25 solely by reason of a reversionary interest in such 
253 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 portion which takes effect upon the death of such 

2 beneficiary before such beneficiary attains age 21. 

3 ‘‘(c) SPECIAL RULE FOR DETERMINING VALUE OF

4 REVERSIONARY INTEREST.—For purposes of subsection 

5 (a), the value of the grantor’s reversionary interest shall 

6 be determined by assuming the maximum exercise of dis7 cretion in favor of the grantor. 

8 ‘‘(d) POSTPONEMENT OF DATE SPECIFIED FOR RE9 ACQUISITION.—Any postponement of the date specified for 

10 the reacquisition of possession or enjoyment of the rever11 sionary interest shall be treated as a new transfer in trust 

12 commencing with the date on which the postponement is 

13 effective and terminating with the date prescribed by the 

14 postponement. However, income for any period shall not 

15 be included in the income of the grantor by reason of the 

16 preceding sentence if such income would not be so includ17 ible in the absence of such postponement. 

18 ‘‘SEC. 156. POWER TO CONTROL BENEFICIAL ENJOYMENT. 

19 ‘‘(a) GENERAL RULE.—The grantor shall be treated 

20 as the owner of any portion of a trust in respect of which 

21 the beneficial enjoyment of the corpus or the income there22 from is subject to a power of disposition, exercisable by 

23 the grantor or a nonadverse party, or both, without the 

24 approval or consent of any adverse party. 
254 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(b) EXCEPTIONS FOR CERTAIN POWERS.—Sub2 section (a) shall not apply to the following powers regard3 less of by whom held: 

4 ‘‘(1) POWER TO APPLY INCOME TO SUPPORT OF

5 A DEPENDENT.—A power described in section 

6 159(b) to the extent that the grantor would not be 

7 subject to tax under that section. 

8 ‘‘(2) POWER AFFECTING BENEFICIAL ENJOY9 MENT ONLY AFTER OCCURRENCE OF EVENT.—A 

10 power, the exercise of which can only affect the ben11 eficial enjoyment of the income for a period com12 mencing after the occurrence of an event such that 

13 a grantor would not be treated as the owner under 

14 section 155 if the power were a reversionary inter15 est; but the grantor may be treated as the owner 

16 after the occurrence of the event unless the power is 

17 relinquished. 

18 ‘‘(3) POWER EXERCISABLE ONLY BY WILL.—A 

19 power exercisable only by will, other than a power in 

20 the grantor to appoint by will the income of the 

21 trust where the income is accumulated for such dis22 position by the grantor or may be so accumulated in 

23 the discretion of the grantor or a nonadverse party, 

24 or both, without the approval or consent of any ad25 verse party. 
255 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(4) POWER TO ALLOCATE AMONG CHARITABLE

2 BENEFICIARIES.—A power to determine the bene3 ficial enjoyment of the corpus or the income there4 from if the corpus or income is irrevocably payable 

5 for a purpose specified in section 101(c) (relating to 

6 definition of charitable contributions) or to an em7 ployee stock ownership plan (as defined in section 

8 4975(e)(7)) in a qualified gratuitous transfer (as de9 fined in section 149(g)(1)). 

10 ‘‘(5) POWER TO DISTRIBUTE CORPUS.—A 

11 power to distribute corpus either— 

12 ‘‘(A) to or for a beneficiary or beneficiaries 

13 or to or for a class of beneficiaries (whether or 

14 not income beneficiaries) provided that the 

15 power is limited by a reasonably definite stand16 ard which is set forth in the trust instrument; 

17 or 

18 ‘‘(B) to or for any current income bene19 ficiary, provided that the distribution of corpus 

20 must be chargeable against the proportionate 

21 share of corpus held in trust for the payment 

22 of income to the beneficiary as if the corpus 

23 constituted a separate trust. 

24 A power does not fall within the powers described in 

25 this paragraph if any person has a power to add to 
256 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the beneficiary or beneficiaries or to a class of bene2 ficiaries designated to receive the income or corpus, 

3 except where such action is to provide for after-born 

4 or after-adopted children. 

5 ‘‘(6) POWER TO WITHHOLD INCOME TEMPO6 RARILY.—A power to distribute or apply income to 

7 or for any current income beneficiary or to accumu8 late the income for him, provided that any accumu9 lated income must ultimately be payable— 

10 ‘‘(A) to the beneficiary from whom dis11 tribution or application is withheld, to his es12 tate, or to his appointees (or persons named as 

13 alternate takers in default of appointment) pro14 vided that such beneficiary possesses a power of 

15 appointment which does not exclude from the 

16 class of possible appointees any person other 

17 than the beneficiary, his estate, his creditors, or 

18 the creditors of his estate, or 

19 ‘‘(B) on termination of the trust, or in con20 junction with a distribution of corpus which is 

21 augmented by such accumulated income, to the 

22 current income beneficiaries in shares which 

23 have been irrevocably specified in the trust in24 strument. 
257 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 Accumulated income shall be considered so payable 

2 although it is provided that if any beneficiary does 

3 not survive a date of distribution which could rea4 sonably have been expected to occur within the bene5 ficiary’s lifetime, the share of the deceased bene6 ficiary is to be paid to his appointees or to one or 

7 more designated alternate takers (other than the 

8 grantor or the grantor’s estate) whose shares have 

9 been irrevocably specified. A power does not fall 

10 within the powers described in this paragraph if any 

11 person has a power to add to the beneficiary or 

12 beneficiaries or to a class of beneficiaries designated 

13 to receive the income or corpus except where such 

14 action is to provide for after-born or after-adopted 

15 children. 

16 ‘‘(7) POWER TO WITHHOLD INCOME DURING

17 DISABILITY OF A BENEFICIARY.—A power exer18 cisable only during— 

19 ‘‘(A) the existence of a legal disability of 

20 any current income beneficiary, or 

21 ‘‘(B) the period during which any income 

22 beneficiary shall be under the age of 21 years, 

23 to distribute or apply income to or for such 

24 beneficiary or to accumulate and add the in25 come to corpus. A power does not fall within 
258 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the powers described in this paragraph if any 

2 person has a power to add to the beneficiary or 

3 beneficiaries or to a class of beneficiaries des4 ignated to receive the income or corpus, except 

5 where such action is to provide for after-born or 

6 after-adopted children. 

7 ‘‘(8) POWER TO ALLOCATE BETWEEN CORPUS

8 AND INCOME.—A power to allocate receipts and dis9 bursements as between corpus and income, even 

10 though expressed in broad language. 

11 ‘‘(c) EXCEPTION FOR CERTAIN POWERS OF INDE12 PENDENT TRUSTEES.—Subsection (a) shall not apply to 

13 a power solely exercisable (without the approval or consent 

14 of any other person) by a trustee or trustees, none of 

15 whom is the grantor, and no more than half of whom are 

16 related or subordinate parties who are subservient to the 

17 wishes of the grantor— 

18 ‘‘(1) to distribute, apportion, or accumulate in19 come to or for a beneficiary or beneficiaries, or to, 

20 for, or within a class of beneficiaries; or 

21 ‘‘(2) to pay out corpus to or for a beneficiary 

22 or beneficiaries or to or for a class of beneficiaries 

23 (whether or not income beneficiaries). 

24 A power does not fall within the powers described in this 

25 subsection if any person has a power to add to the bene-
259 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ficiary or beneficiaries or to a class of beneficiaries des2 ignated to receive the income or corpus, except where such 

3 action is to provide for after-born or after-adopted chil4 dren. For periods during which an individual is the spouse 

5 of the grantor (within the meaning of section 154(e)(2)), 

6 any reference in this subsection to the grantor shall be 

7 treated as including a reference to such individual. 

8 ‘‘(d) POWER TO ALLOCATE INCOME IF LIMITED BY

9 A STANDARD.—Subsection (a) shall not apply to a power 

10 solely exercisable (without the approval or consent of any 

11 other person) by a trustee or trustees, none of whom is 

12 the grantor or spouse living with the grantor, to distribute, 

13 apportion, or accumulate income to or for a beneficiary 

14 or beneficiaries, or to, for, or within a class of bene15 ficiaries, whether or not the conditions of paragraph (6) 

16 or (7) of subsection (b) are satisfied, if such power is lim17 ited by a reasonably definite external standard which is 

18 set forth in the trust instrument. A power does not fall 

19 within the powers described in this subsection if any per20 son has a power to add to the beneficiary or beneficiaries 

21 or to a class of beneficiaries designated to receive the in22 come or corpus except where such action is to provide for 

23 after-born or after-adopted children. 
260 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘SEC. 157. ADMINISTRATIVE POWERS. 

2 ‘‘The grantor shall be treated as the owner of any 

3 portion of a trust in respect of which— 

4 ‘‘(1) POWER TO DEAL FOR LESS THAN ADE5 QUATE AND FULL CONSIDERATION.—A power exer6 cisable by the grantor or a nonadverse party, or 

7 both, without the approval or consent of any adverse 

8 party enables the grantor or any person to purchase, 

9 exchange, or otherwise deal with or dispose of the 

10 corpus or the income therefrom for less than an ade11 quate consideration in money or money’s worth. 

12 ‘‘(2) POWER TO BORROW WITHOUT ADEQUATE

13 INTEREST OR SECURITY.—A power exercisable by 

14 the grantor or a nonadverse party, or both, enables 

15 the grantor to borrow the corpus or income, directly 

16 or indirectly, without adequate interest or without 

17 adequate security except where a trustee (other than 

18 the grantor) is authorized under a general lending 

19 power to make loans to any person without regard 

20 to interest or security. 

21 ‘‘(3) BORROWING OF THE TRUST FUNDS.—The 

22 grantor has directly or indirectly borrowed the cor23 pus or income and has not completely repaid the 

24 loan, including any interest, before the beginning of 

25 the taxable year. The preceding sentence shall not 

26 apply to a loan which provides for adequate interest 
261 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 and adequate security, if such loan is made by a 

2 trustee other than the grantor and other than a re3 lated or subordinate trustee subservient to the 

4 grantor. For periods during which an individual is 

5 the spouse of the grantor (within the meaning of 

6 section 154(e)(2)), any reference in this paragraph 

7 to the grantor shall be treated as including a ref8 erence to such individual. 

9 ‘‘(4) GENERAL POWERS OF ADMINISTRATION.— 

10 A power of administration is exercisable in a non11 fiduciary capacity by any person without the ap12 proval or consent of any person in a fiduciary capac13 ity. For purposes of this paragraph, the term ‘power 

14 of administration’ means any one or more of the fol15 lowing powers: (A) a power to vote or direct the vot16 ing of stock or other securities of a corporation in 

17 which the holdings of the grantor and the trust are 

18 significant from the viewpoint of voting control; (B) 

19 a power to control the investment of the trust funds 

20 either by directing investments or reinvestments, or 

21 by vetoing proposed investments or reinvestments, to 

22 the extent that the trust funds consist of stocks or 

23 securities of corporations in which the holdings of 

24 the grantor and the trust are significant from the 

25 viewpoint of voting control; or (C) a power to reac-
262 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 quire the trust corpus by substituting other property 

2 of an equivalent value. 

3 ‘‘SEC. 158. POWER TO REVOKE. 

4 ‘‘(a) GENERAL RULE.—The grantor shall be treated 

5 as the owner of any portion of a trust, whether or not 

6 he is treated as such owner under any other provision of 

7 this part, where at any time the power to revest in the 

8 grantor title to such portion is exercisable by the grantor 

9 or a non-adverse party, or both. 

10 ‘‘(b) POWER AFFECTING BENEFICIAL ENJOYMENT

11 ONLY AFTER OCCURRENCE OF EVENT.—Subsection (a) 

12 shall not apply to a power the exercise of which can only 

13 affect the beneficial enjoyment of the income for a period 

14 commencing after the occurrence of an event such that 

15 a grantor would not be treated as the owner under section 

16 155 if the power were a reversionary interest. But the 

17 grantor may be treated as the owner after the occurrence 

18 of such event unless the power is relinquished. 

19 ‘‘SEC. 159. INCOME FOR BENEFIT OF GRANTOR. 

20 ‘‘(a) GENERAL RULE.—The grantor shall be treated 

21 as the owner of any portion of a trust, whether or not 

22 he is treated as such owner under section 156, whose in23 come without the approval or consent of any adverse party 

24 is, or, in the discretion of the grantor or a nonadverse 

25 party, or both, may be— 
263 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(1) distributed to the grantor or the grantor’s 

2 spouse; 

3 ‘‘(2) held or accumulated for future distribution 

4 to the grantor or the grantor’s spouse; or 

5 ‘‘(3) applied to the payment of premiums on 

6 policies of insurance on the life of the grantor or the 

7 grantor’s spouse (except policies of insurance irrev8 ocably payable for a purpose specified in section 

9 101(c) (relating to definition of charitable contribu10 tions)). 

11 This subsection shall not apply to a power the exercise 

12 of which can only affect the beneficial enjoyment of the 

13 income for a period commencing after the occurrence of 

14 an event such that the grantor would not be treated as 

15 the owner under section 153 if the power were a rever16 sionary interest; but the grantor may be treated as the 

17 owner after the occurrence of the event unless the power 

18 is relinquished. 

19 ‘‘(b) OBLIGATIONS OF SUPPORT.—Income of a trust 

20 shall not be considered taxable to the grantor under sub21 section (a) or any other provision of this chapter merely 

22 because such income in the discretion of another person, 

23 the trustee, or the grantor acting as trustee or co-trustee, 

24 may be applied or distributed for the support or mainte25 nance of a beneficiary (other than the grantor’s spouse) 
264 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 whom the grantor is legally obligated to support or main2 tain, except to the extent that such income is so applied 

3 or distributed. In cases where the amounts so applied or 

4 distributed are paid out of corpus or out of other than 

5 income for the taxable year, such amounts shall be consid6 ered to be an amount paid or credited within the meaning 

7 of paragraph (2) of section 146(a) and shall be taxed to 

8 the grantor under section 147. 

9 ‘‘SEC. 160. PERSON OTHER THAN GRANTOR TREATED AS 

10 SUBSTANTIAL OWNER. 

11 ‘‘(a) GENERAL RULE.—A person other than the 

12 grantor shall be treated as the owner of any portion of 

13 a trust with respect to which: 

14 ‘‘(1) such person has a power exercisable solely 

15 by himself to vest the corpus or the income there16 from in himself, or 

17 ‘‘(2) such person has previously partially re18 leased or otherwise modified such a power and after 

19 the release or modification retains such control as 

20 would, within the principles of sections 153 to 159, 

21 inclusive, subject a grantor of a trust to treatment 

22 as the owner thereof. 

23 ‘‘(b) EXCEPTION WHERE GRANTOR IS TAXABLE.— 

24 Subsection (a) shall not apply with respect to a power over 

25 income, as originally granted or thereafter modified, if the 
265 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 grantor of the trust or a transferor (to whom section 161 

2 applies) is otherwise treated as the owner under sections 

3 153 through 159 or section 161. 

4 ‘‘(c) OBLIGATIONS OF SUPPORT.—Subsection (a) 

5 shall not apply to a power which enables such person, in 

6 the capacity of trustee or cotrustee, merely to apply the 

7 income of the trust to the support or maintenance of a 

8 person whom the holder of the power is obligated to sup9 port or maintain except to the extent that such income 

10 is so applied. In cases where the amounts so applied or 

11 distributed are paid out of corpus or out of other than 

12 income of the taxable year, such amounts shall be consid13 ered to be an amount paid or credited within the meaning 

14 of paragraph (2) of section 146(a) and shall be taxed to 

15 the holder of the power under section 147. 

16 ‘‘(d) EFFECT OF RENUNCIATION OR DISCLAIMER.— 

17 Subsection (a) shall not apply with respect to a power 

18 which has been renounced or disclaimed within a reason19 able time after the holder of the power first became aware 

20 of its existence. 

21 ‘‘SEC. 161. FOREIGN TRUSTS HAVING ONE OR MORE 

22 UNITED STATES BENEFICIARIES. 

23 ‘‘(a) TRANSFEROR TREATED AS OWNER.— 

24 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—A United States person 

25 who directly or indirectly transfers property to a for-
266 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 eign trust (other than a trust described in section 

2 6048(a)(3)(B)(ii)) shall be treated as the owner for 

3 his taxable year of the portion of such trust attrib4 utable to such property if for such year there is a 

5 United States beneficiary of any portion of such 

6 trust. 

7 ‘‘(2) EXCEPTIONS.—Paragraph (1) shall not 

8 apply— 

9 ‘‘(A) TRANSFERS BY REASON OF DEATH.— 

10 To any transfer by reason of the death of the 

11 transferor. 

12 ‘‘(B) TRANSFERS AT FAIR MARKET

13 VALUE.—To any transfer of property to a trust 

14 in exchange for consideration of at least the fair 

15 market value of the transferred property. For 

16 purposes of the preceding sentence, consider17 ation other than cash shall be taken into ac18 count at its fair market value. 

19 ‘‘(3) CERTAIN OBLIGATIONS NOT TAKEN INTO

20 ACCOUNT UNDER FAIR MARKET VALUE EXCEP21 TION.— 

22 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—In determining wheth23 er paragraph (2)(B) applies to any transfer by 

24 a person described in clause (ii) or (iii) of sub-
267 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 paragraph (C), there shall not be taken into ac2 count— 

3 ‘‘(i) except as provided in regulations, 

4 any obligation of a person described in 

5 subparagraph (C), and 

6 ‘‘(ii) to the extent provided in regula7 tions, any obligation which is guaranteed 

8 by a person described in subparagraph (C). 

9 ‘‘(B) TREATMENT OF PRINCIPAL PAY10 MENTS ON OBLIGATION.—Principal payments 

11 by the trust on any obligation referred to in 

12 subparagraph (A) shall be taken into account 

13 on and after the date of the payment in deter14 mining the portion of the trust attributable to 

15 the property transferred. 

16 ‘‘(C) PERSONS DESCRIBED.—The persons 

17 described in this subparagraph are— 

18 ‘‘(i) the trust, 

19 ‘‘(ii) any grantor, owner, or bene20 ficiary of the trust, and 

21 ‘‘(iii) any person who is related (with22 in the meaning of section 143(i)(2)(B) to 

23 any grantor, owner, or beneficiary of the 

24 trust. 
268 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(4) SPECIAL RULES APPLICABLE TO FOREIGN

2 GRANTOR WHO LATER BECOMES A UNITED STATES

3 PERSON.— 

4 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—If a nonresident alien 

5 individual has a residency starting date within 

6 5 years after directly or indirectly transferring 

7 property to a foreign trust, this section and sec8 tion 6048 shall be applied as if such individual 

9 transferred to such trust on the residency start10 ing date an amount equal to the portion of such 

11 trust attributable to the property transferred by 

12 such individual to such trust in such transfer. 

13 ‘‘(B) TREATMENT OF UNDISTRIBUTED IN14 COME.—For purposes of this section, undistrib15 uted net income for periods before such individ16 ual’s residency starting date shall be taken into 

17 account in determining the portion of the trust 

18 which is attributable to property transferred by 

19 such individual to such trust but shall not oth20 erwise be taken into account. 

21 ‘‘(C) RESIDENCY STARTING DATE.—For 

22 purposes of this paragraph, an individual’s resi23 dency starting date is the residency starting 

24 date determined under section 7701(b)(2)(A). 

25 ‘‘(5) OUTBOUND TRUST MIGRATIONS.—If— 
269 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(A) an individual who is a citizen or resi2 dent of the United States transferred property 

3 to a trust which was not a foreign trust, and 

4 ‘‘(B) such trust becomes a foreign trust 

5 while such individual is alive, then this section 

6 and section 6048 shall be applied as if such in7 dividual transferred to such trust on the date 

8 such trust becomes a foreign trust an amount 

9 equal to the portion of such trust attributable 

10 to the property previously transferred by such 

11 individual to such trust. A rule similar to the 

12 rule of paragraph (4)(B) shall apply for pur13 poses of this paragraph. 

14 ‘‘(b) TRUSTS ACQUIRING UNITED STATES BENE15 FICIARIES.—If— 

16 ‘‘(1) subsection (a) applies to a trust for the 

17 transferor’s taxable year, and 

18 ‘‘(2) subsection (a) would have applied to the 

19 trust for his immediately preceding taxable year but 

20 for the fact that for such preceding taxable year 

21 there was no United States beneficiary for any por22 tion of the trust, then, for purposes of this chapter, 

23 the transferor shall be treated as having income for 

24 the taxable year (in addition to his other income for 

25 such year) equal to the undistributed net income (at 
270 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the close of such immediately preceding taxable 

2 year) attributable to the portion of the trust referred 

3 to in subsection (a). 

4 ‘‘(c) TRUSTS TREATED AS HAVING A UNITED

5 STATES BENEFICIARY.— 

6 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—For purposes of this sec7 tion, a trust shall be treated as having a United 

8 States beneficiary for the taxable year unless— 

9 ‘‘(A) under the terms of the trust, no part 

10 of the income or corpus of the trust may be 

11 paid or accumulated during the taxable year to 

12 or for the benefit of a United States person, 

13 and 

14 ‘‘(B) if the trust were terminated at any 

15 time during the taxable year, no part of the in16 come or corpus of such trust could be paid to 

17 or for the benefit of a United States person. 

18 ‘‘(2) ATTRIBUTION OF OWNERSHIP.—For pur19 poses of paragraph (1), an amount shall be treated 

20 as paid or accumulated to or for the benefit of a 

21 United States person if such amount is paid to or 

22 accumulated for a foreign corporation, foreign part23 nership, or foreign trust or estate, and— 
271 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(A) in the case of a foreign corporation, 

2 such corporation is a controlled foreign corpora3 tion, 

4 ‘‘(B) in the case of a foreign partnership, 

5 a United States person is a partner of such 

6 partnership, or 

7 ‘‘(C) in the case of a foreign trust or es8 tate, such trust or estate has a United States 

9 beneficiary (within the meaning of paragraph 

10 (1)). 

11 ‘‘(3) CERTAIN UNITED STATES BENEFICIARIES

12 DISREGARDED.—A beneficiary shall not be treated 

13 as a United States person in applying this section 

14 with respect to any transfer of property to foreign 

15 trust if such beneficiary first became a United 

16 States person more than 5 years after the date of 

17 such transfer. 

18 ‘‘(d) REGULATIONS.—The Secretary shall prescribe 

19 such regulations as may be necessary or appropriate to 

20 carry out the purposes of this section. 

21 ‘‘SEC. 162. LIMITATION ON CHARITABLE DEDUCTION. 

22 ‘‘In computing the deduction allowable under section 

23 142(c) to a trust, no amount otherwise allowable under 

24 section 142(c) as a deduction shall be allowed as a deduc-
272 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 tion with respect to income of the taxable year which is 

2 allocable to unrelated business income for such year. 

3 ‘‘SEC. 163. INCOME OF AN ESTATE OR TRUST IN CASE OF DI4 VORCE, ETC. 

5 ‘‘(a) INCLUSION IN GROSS INCOME OF WIFE.—There 

6 shall be included in the gross income of a wife who is di7 vorced or legally separated under a decree of divorce or 

8 of separate maintenance (or who is separated from her 

9 husband under a written separation agreement) the 

10 amount of the income of any trust which such wife is enti11 tled to receive and which, except for this section, would 

12 be includible in the gross income of her husband, and such 

13 amount shall not, despite any other provision of this sub14 title, be includible in the gross income of such husband. 

15 This subsection shall not apply to that part of any such 

16 income of the trust which the terms of the decree, written 

17 separation agreement, or trust instrument fix, in terms 

18 of an amount of money or a portion of such income, as 

19 a sum which is payable for the support of minor children 

20 of such husband. In case such income is less than the 

21 amount specified in the decree, agreement, or instrument, 

22 for the purpose of applying the preceding sentence, such 

23 income, to the extent of such sum payable for such sup24 port, shall be considered a payment for such support. 
273 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(b) WIFE CONSIDERED A BENEFICIARY.—For pur2 poses of computing the taxable income of the estate or 

3 trust and the taxable income of a wife to whom subsection 

4 (a) applies, such wife shall be considered as the bene5 ficiary. 

6 ‘‘(c) CROSS REFERENCE.—For definitions of ‘hus7 band’ and ‘wife’, as used in this section, see section 

8 7701(a)(17). 

9 ‘‘SEC. 164. RECOGNITION OF GAIN ON CERTAIN TRANSFERS 

10 TO CERTAIN FOREIGN TRUSTS AND ESTATES. 

11 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—Except as provided in regula12 tions, in the case of any transfer of property by a United 

13 States person to a foreign estate or trust, for purposes 

14 of this subtitle, such transfer shall be treated as a sale 

15 or exchange for an amount equal to the fair market value 

16 of the property transferred, and the transferor shall recog17 nize as gain the excess of— 

18 ‘‘(1) the fair market value of the property so 

19 transferred, over 

20 ‘‘(2) the adjusted basis (for purposes of deter21 mining gain) of such property in the hands of the 

22 transferor. 

23 ‘‘(b) EXCEPTION.—Subsection (a) shall not apply to 

24 a transfer to a trust by a United States person to the 
274 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 extent that any person is treated as the owner of such 

2 trust under section 153. 

3 ‘‘(c) TREATMENT OF TRUSTS WHICH BECOME FOR4 EIGN TRUSTS.—If a trust which is not a foreign trust be5 comes a foreign trust, such trust shall be treated for pur6 poses of this section as having transferred, immediately 

7 before becoming a foreign trust, all of its assets to a for8 eign trust. 

9 ‘‘SEC. 165. TREATMENT OF FUNERAL TRUSTS. 

10 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—In the case of a qualified funeral 

11 trust, sections 144 through 161 shall not apply, and no 

12 deduction shall be allowed by section 142(b). 

13 ‘‘(b) QUALIFIED FUNERAL TRUST.—‘Qualified fu14 neral trust’ means any trust (other than a foreign trust) 

15 if— 

16 ‘‘(1) the trust arises as a result of a contract 

17 with a person engaged in the trade or business of 

18 providing funeral or burial services or property nec19 essary to provide such services, 

20 ‘‘(2) the sole purpose of the trust is to hold, in21 vest, and reinvest funds in the trust and to use such 

22 funds solely to make payments for such services or 

23 property for the benefit of the beneficiaries of the 

24 trust, 
275 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(3) the only beneficiaries of such trust are in2 dividuals with respect to whom such services or 

3 property are to be provided at their death under 

4 contracts described in paragraph (1), 

5 ‘‘(4) the only contributions to the trust are con6 tributions by or for the benefit of such beneficiaries, 

7 ‘‘(5) the trustee elects the application of this 

8 subsection, and 

9 ‘‘(6) the trust would (but for the election de10 scribed in paragraph (5)) be treated as owned under 

11 sections 153 through 161 by the purchasers of the 

12 contracts described in paragraph (1). 

13 ‘‘(c) DOLLAR LIMITATION ON CONTRIBUTIONS.— 

14 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—Any trust which accepts 

15 aggregate contributions by or for the benefit of an 

16 individual in excess of $7,000 shall not be a quali17 fied funeral trust. 

18 ‘‘(2) RELATED TRUSTS.—For purposes of para19 graph (1), all trusts having trustees which are re20 lated persons shall be treated as 1 trust. For pur21 poses of the preceding sentence, persons are related 

22 if— 

23 ‘‘(A) the relationship between such persons 

24 is described in section 171(a)(5), or 
276 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) the Secretary determines that treat2 ing such persons as related is necessary to pre3 vent avoidance of the purposes of this section. 

4 ‘‘(3) INFLATION ADJUSTMENT.—In the case of 

5 any contract referred to in subsection (b)(1) which 

6 is entered into during any calendar year after 2007, 

7 the dollar amount referred to in paragraph (1) shall 

8 be adjusted for inflation in accordance with section 

9 25. 

10 ‘‘(d) APPLICATION OF RATE SCHEDULE.—Section 

11 140(b) shall be applied to each qualified funeral trust by 

12 treating each beneficiary’s interest in each such trust as 

13 a separate trust. 

14 ‘‘(e) TREATMENT OF AMOUNTS REFUNDED TO PUR15 CHASER ON CANCELLATION.—No gain or loss shall be rec16 ognized to a purchaser of a contract described in sub17 section (b)(1) by reason of any payment from such trust 

18 to such purchaser by reason of cancellation of such con19 tract. If any payment referred to in the preceding sentence 

20 consists of property other than money, the basis of such 

21 property in the hands of such purchaser shall be the same 

22 as the trust’s basis in such property immediately before 

23 the payment. 
277 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(f) SIMPLIFIED REPORTING.—The Secretary may 

2 prescribe rules for simplified reporting of all trusts having 

3 a single trustee. 

4 ‘‘SEC. 166. INCOME IN RESPECT OF A DECEDENT. 

5 ‘‘(a) INCLUSION IN GROSS INCOME.— 

6 ‘‘(1) GENERAL USE.—The amount of all items 

7 of gross income in respect of a decedent which are 

8 not properly includible in respect of a taxable period 

9 in which falls the date of his death, or a prior pe10 riod, shall be included in gross income, for the tax11 able year when received, of— 

12 ‘‘(A) the estate of the decedent, if the right 

13 to receive the amount is acquired by the dece14 dent’s estate, 

15 ‘‘(B) the person who, by reason of the 

16 death of the decedent, acquires the right to re17 ceive the amount, if the right to receive the 

18 amount is not acquired by the decedent’s estate 

19 from the decedent, 

20 ‘‘(C) the person who acquires from the de21 cedent the right to receive the amount by be22 quest, devise or inheritance, if the amount is re23 ceived after a distribution by the decedent’s es24 tate of such right. 
278 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) DEFINITION.—The Secretary shall pre2 scribe regulations on the treatment of income from 

3 sales of rights to receive income and installment 

4 sales. 

5 ‘‘(b) The amount of any homeowner deduction or for6 eign tax credit in respect of a decedent which is not prop7 erly allowable to the decedent with respect to the taxable 

8 period in which falls the date of his death, or a prior pe9 riod, shall be allowed in accordance with regulations that 

10 reflect the principles of section 691(b) of the Internal Rev11 enue Code of 1986. 

12 ‘‘Subchapter II—Definitions and Rules of 

13 Application 

‘‘Sec. 171. Definitions. 

‘‘Sec. 172. Rules of application. 

14 ‘‘SEC. 171. DEFINITIONS. 

15 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—When used in this chapter, 

16 where not otherwise distinctly expressed or manifestly in17 compatible with the intent thereof— 

18 ‘‘(1) BUSINESS ENTITY.—The definition of 

19 ‘business entity’ in section 206 (relating to the busi20 ness tax) shall apply. 

21 ‘‘(2) BUSINESS TAX.—‘Business tax’ and ‘Sim22 plified USA Tax for businesses’ mean the tax im23 posed by section 201 and, to the extent required by 

24 the context, the provisions of chapter 2. 
279 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(3) INTERNAL REVENUE CODE OF 1986.—‘In2 ternal Revenue Code of 1986’ means the Internal 

3 Revenue Code of 1986 as in effect immediately be4 fore the enactment of the Simplified USA Tax Act 

5 of 2006. 

6 ‘‘(4) UNITED STATES.—‘United States’ means 

7 the States and the District of Columbia. 

8 ‘‘(5) RELATED PARTY.—‘Related party’ 

9 means— 

10 ‘‘(A) Members of a family, as defined in 

11 paragraph (6)(D); 

12 ‘‘(B) An individual and a business entity 

13 more than 50 percent in value of which is 

14 owned, directly or indirectly, by or for such in15 dividual (applying rules of constructive owner16 ship); 

17 ‘‘(C) Two business entities that are eligible 

18 to file a consolidated return under chapter 2; 

19 ‘‘(D) A grantor and a fiduciary of any 

20 trust; 

21 ‘‘(E) A fiduciary of a trust and a fiduciary 

22 of another trust, if the same person is a grantor 

23 of both trusts; 

24 ‘‘(F) A fiduciary of a trust and a bene25 ficiary of such trust; 
280 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(G) A fiduciary of a trust and a bene2 ficiary of another trust, if the same person is 

3 a grantor of both trusts; 

4 ‘‘(H) A fiduciary of a trust and a corpora5 tion more than 50 percent in value of the out6 standing stock of which is owned, directly or in7 directly, by or for the trust or by or for a per8 son who is a grantor of the trust; 

9 ‘‘(I) A person and an organization to 

10 which section 251 (relating to certain edu11 cational and charitable organizations which are 

12 exempt from tax) applies and which is con13 trolled directly or indirectly by such person or 

14 (if such person is an individual) by members of 

15 the family of such individual; 

16 ‘‘(J) Two business entities if the same per17 sons own more than 50 percent of the value of 

18 each (applying rules of constructive ownership), 

19 with value measured by— 

20 ‘‘(i) the value of the outstanding stock 

21 in the case of a corporation, 

22 ‘‘(ii) the capital interest or the profits 

23 interest, whichever is greater, in the case 

24 of a partnership or limited liability com25 pany; 
281 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(K) Except in the case of a sale or ex2 change in satisfaction of a pecuniary bequest, 

3 an executor of an estate and a beneficiary of 

4 such estate. 

5 ‘‘(6) CONSTRUCTIVE OWNERSHIP.—For pur6 poses of determining, in applying paragraph (5), the 

7 ownership of a business entity— 

8 ‘‘(A) Stock or other equity interest owned, 

9 directly or indirectly, by or for a corporation, 

10 partnership, estate, or trust shall be considered 

11 as being owned proportionately by or for its 

12 shareholders, partners, or beneficiaries; 

13 ‘‘(B) An individual shall be considered as 

14 owning the stock or other equity interest owned, 

15 directly or indirectly, by or for his family; 

16 ‘‘(C) An individual owning (otherwise than 

17 by the application of subparagraph (B)) any 

18 stock in a corporation or other equity interest 

19 in another form of business entity shall be con20 sidered as owning the stock owned, directly or 

21 indirectly, by or for his partner; 

22 ‘‘(D) The family of an individual shall in23 clude only his brothers and sisters (whether by 

24 the whole or half blood), spouse, ancestors, and 

25 lineal descendants; and 
282 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(E) Stock or other equity interest con2 structively owned by a person by reason of the 

3 application of subparagraph (A) shall, for the 

4 purpose of applying subparagraph (A), (B), or 

5 (C), be treated as actually owned by such per6 son, but stock or other equity interest construc7 tively owned by an individual by reason of the 

8 application of subparagraph (B) or (C) shall 

9 not be treated as owned by him for the purpose 

10 of again applying either of such paragraphs in 

11 order to make another the constructive owner of 

12 such stock or equity interest. 

13 ‘‘(7) EARNED INCOME.— 

14 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—‘Earned income’ 

15 means— 

16 ‘‘(i) wages, salaries, tips, and other 

17 employee compensation, plus 

18 ‘‘(ii) the amount of the taxpayer’s net 

19 earnings from self-employment for the tax20 able year (within the meaning of section 

21 1402(a)). 

22 ‘‘(B) SPECIAL RULES.—For purposes of 

23 subparagraph (A)— 
283 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(i) the earned income of an indi2 vidual shall be computed without regard to 

3 any community property laws, 

4 ‘‘(ii) no amount received as a pension 

5 or annuity shall be taken into account, 

6 ‘‘(iii) no income of nonresident alien 

7 individuals not connected with United 

8 States business shall be taken into ac9 count, and 

10 ‘‘(iv) no amount received for services 

11 provided by an individual while the indi12 vidual is an inmate at a penal institution 

13 shall be taken into account. 

14 ‘‘(b) TERMS DEFINED IN CHAPTER 1.—If a term 

15 that is used but not defined in this chapter or in section 

16 7701 is defined in chapter 2, the definition in chapter 2 

17 shall apply except if manifestly incompatible with the in18 tent of the provision in which the term is used. 

19 ‘‘SEC. 172. RULES OF APPLICATION. 

20 ‘‘(a) DEFINITIONS.—Any definition included in this 

21 chapter shall apply for all purposes of this chapter un22 less— 

23 ‘‘(1) such definition is limited to the purposes 

24 of a particular chapter, section, or subsection, or 
284 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) the definition clearly would not be applica2 ble in a particular context. 

3 ‘‘(b) INTERPRETATIONS CONSISTENT WITH INTER4 NAL REVENUE CODE OF 1986.—Terms not defined in this 

5 chapter or elsewhere in this title, but defined in the Inter6 nal Revenue Code of 1986, shall be interpreted in a man7 ner consistent with the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, 

8 except to the extent such interpretation would be incon9 sistent with the principles and purposes of this chapter.’’ 

10 (c) EXEMPTION FROM PROHIBITED TRANSACTION

11 TAX.—Section 4975(g) of the Code is amended by— 

12 (1) striking ‘‘or’’ at the end of paragraph (2), 

13 (2) deleting the period at the end of paragraph 

14 (3) and inserting ‘‘; or’’, 

15 (3) and inserting the following new paragraph 

16 (4): 

17 ‘‘(4) to a Roth IRA in the case of a loan to or 

18 equity investment in a controlled business entity as 

19 permitted by section 30(f)).’’ 
285 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 TITLE III—SIMPLIFIED USA TAX 

2 FOR BUSINESSES 

3 SEC. 301. REPEAL OF CORPORATE INCOME TAX; NEW TAX 

4 PAID BY CORPORATIONS AND OTHER BUSI5 NESSES. 

6 (a) IN GENERAL.—Chapter 2 of the Internal Rev7 enue Code is renumbered chapter 3 and following new 

8 chapter is inserted after chapter 1: 

9 ‘‘CHAPTER 2—SIMPLIFIED USA TAX FOR 

10 BUSINESSES 

‘‘Subchapter A. Imposition of tax. 

‘‘Subchapter B. Basic rules for business tax. 

‘‘Subchapter C. Capital contributions, mergers, acquisitions, and distributions. 

‘‘Subchapter D. Accounting methods. 

‘‘Subchapter E. Land and rental property. 

‘‘Subchapter F. Insurance and financial products. 

‘‘Subchapter G. Financial intermediation and financial institutions. 

‘‘Subchapter H. Tax-exempt organizations. 

‘‘Subchapter I. Cooperatives. 

‘‘Subchapter J. Sourcing rules. 

‘‘Subchapter K. Business conducted in a possession. 

‘‘Subchapter L. Payroll tax credit. 

‘‘Subchapter M. Import tax. 

‘‘Subchapter N. Transition rules. 

‘‘Subchapter O. Rules for administration, consolidated returns. 

‘‘Subchapter P. Definitions and rules of applications. 

11 ‘‘Subchapter A—Imposition of Tax 

‘‘Sec. 201. Tax imposed. 

12 ‘‘SEC. 201. TAX IMPOSED. 

13 ‘‘(a) TAXABLE BUSINESS ACTIVITY.—A tax is im14 posed on the sale of goods and services in the United 

15 States by a business entity. The amount of the tax equals 

16 the amount by which— 
286 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(1) the business tax exceeds, 

2 ‘‘(2) the payroll tax credit. 

3 ‘‘(b) BUSINESS TAX IMPOSED.— 

4 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—The ‘business tax’ imposed 

5 on a business entity that sells or leases property or 

6 sells services in the United States equals the sum 

7 of— 

8 ‘‘(A) 8 percent of the portion of the gross 

9 profits of the business entity for the taxable 

10 year that does not exceed $150,000, and 

11 ‘‘(B) 12 percent of such portion of the 

12 gross profits of the business entity for the tax13 able year that exceeds $150,000. 

14 ‘‘(2) LIMITATION ON APPLICATION OF BENE15 FITS OF GRADUATED RATE SCHEDULE.—The Sec16 retary shall prescribe rules under which the gross 

17 profits of business entities under common control 

18 are aggregated for purposes of applying the benefit 

19 of the lower rate described in subparagraph (A) of 

20 paragraph (1). Such rules shall be similar to rules 

21 applicable under sections 1551 and 1561 of the In22 ternal Revenue Code of 1986. 

23 ‘‘(c) PAYROLL TAX CREDIT.—The ‘payroll tax credit’ 

24 is a credit for the social security, railroad retirement and 

25 hospital insurance taxes paid by an employer, as deter-
287 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 mined in accordance with subchapter L (sections 281 

2 through 283). 

3 ‘‘(d) IMPORT TAX.—For rules relating to the import 

4 tax imposed by this chapter, see subchapter M (sections 

5 286 through 288). 

6 ‘‘Subchapter B—Basic Rules for Business Tax 

‘‘Sec. 202. Gross profits. 

‘‘Sec. 203. Taxable receipts. 

‘‘Sec. 204. Deductible amounts. 

‘‘Sec. 205. Cost of business purchases. 

‘‘Sec. 206. Business entity and business activity. 

‘‘Sec. 207. Loss carryover deduction. 

7 ‘‘SEC. 202. GROSS PROFITS. 

8 ‘‘‘Gross profits’ means for a taxable year of a busi9 ness entity the amount by which— 

10 ‘‘(1) the taxable receipts of the business entity 

11 for the taxable year exceed, 

12 ‘‘(2) the deductible amounts for the business 

13 entity for the taxable year. 

14 ‘‘SEC. 203. TAXABLE RECEIPTS. 

15 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—‘Taxable receipts’ means all re16 ceipts from the sale of property, use of property, and per17 formance of services in the United States. 

18 ‘‘(b) GAMES OF CHANCE.—Amounts received for 

19 playing games of chance by business entities engaging in 

20 the activity of providing such games shall be treated as 

21 receipts from the sale of property or services. 
288 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(c) IN-KIND RECEIPTS.—The taxable receipts at2 tributable to the receipt of property, use of property or 

3 services in whole or partial exchange for property, use of 

4 property or services equal the fair market value of the 

5 services or property received. 

6 ‘‘(d) TAXES.—Taxable receipts do not include any ex7 cise tax, sales tax, custom duty, or other separately stated 

8 levy imposed by a Federal, State, or local government re9 ceived by a business entity in connection with the sale of 

10 property or services or the use of property. 

11 ‘‘(e) FINANCIAL RECEIPTS.— 

12 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—Except as provided in sub13 chapter G (relating to financial intermediation and 

14 financial institutions), taxable receipts do not in15 clude financial receipts. 

16 ‘‘(2) FINANCIAL RECEIPTS.—‘Financial re17 ceipts’ include— 

18 ‘‘(A) interest, 

19 ‘‘(B) dividends and other distributions by a 

20 business entity, 

21 ‘‘(C) proceeds from the sale of stock, other 

22 ownership interests in business entities, or 

23 other financial instruments (as defined in sec24 tion 242(b)(3)), 

25 ‘‘(D) proceeds from life insurance policies, 
289 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(E) proceeds from annuities, 

2 ‘‘(F) proceeds from currency hedging or 

3 exchanges, and 

4 ‘‘(G) proceeds from other financial trans5 actions. 

6 ‘‘(f) CROSS REFERENCES.— 

7 ‘‘(1) FINANCIAL INTERMEDIATION.—See sub8 chapters F and G for rules relating to financial 

9 intermediation. 

10 ‘‘(2) EXPORTS, SALES IN THE UNITED

11 STATES.—See subchapter J for the exclusion from 

12 gross receipts for export sales and for rules on sales 

13 of property and services in the United States. 

14 ‘‘(3) LAND.—See subchapter E for rules relat15 ing to certain sales of land. 

16 ‘‘(4) INSURANCE PROCEEDS.—See section 237 

17 for rules on the inclusion of certain insurance pro18 ceeds in taxable receipts. 

19 ‘‘SEC. 204. DEDUCTIBLE AMOUNTS. 

20 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—‘Deductible amounts’ for a busi21 ness entity in a taxable year include— 

22 ‘‘(1) the cost of business purchases in the tax23 able year (as determined under section 205), 

24 ‘‘(2) such entity’s loss carryover deduction (as 

25 determined under section 207) , and 
290 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(3) the transition basis deduction (as deter2 mined under section 290). 

3 ‘‘(b) FINANCIAL INTERMEDIATION.—See subchapters 

4 F and G for special rules for business entities engaging 

5 in financial intermediation. 

6 ‘‘SEC. 205. COST OF BUSINESS PURCHASES. 

7 ‘‘(a) BUSINESS PURCHASES.— 

8 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—‘Business purchases’ means 

9 the acquisition of— 

10 ‘‘(A) property, 

11 ‘‘(B) the use of property, or 

12 ‘‘(C) services 

13 in the United States for use in a business activity. 

14 ‘‘(2) EXAMPLES.—Business purchases include 

15 (without limitation) the— 

16 ‘‘(A) purchase or rental of real property, 

17 ‘‘(B) purchase or rental of capital equip18 ment, 

19 ‘‘(C) purchase of supplies and inventory, 

20 ‘‘(D) purchase of services from inde21 pendent contractors, 

22 ‘‘(E) purchase of financial intermediation 

23 services (as determined in accordance with sec24 tion 236), 
291 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(F) purchase of a business loss policy (as 

2 determined in accordance with section 237), 

3 and 

4 ‘‘(G) imports for use in a business activity. 

5 ‘‘(3) EXCLUSIONS.—Business purchases do not 

6 include— 

7 ‘‘(A) payments for use of money or capital, 

8 such as interest or dividends (except to the ex9 tent that a portion so paid is a fee for financial 

10 intermediation services), 

11 ‘‘(B) premiums for life insurance, 

12 ‘‘(C) the acquisition of savings assets or 

13 other financial instruments (as defined in sec14 tion 242(b)(3)). 

15 ‘‘(D) property acquired outside the United 

16 States (but such property shall be taken into 

17 account as an import if imported), 

18 ‘‘(E) services performed outside the United 

19 States (unless treated as imported into the 

20 United States), 

21 ‘‘(F) compensation expenses for an indi22 vidual (other than amounts paid to an indi23 vidual in his capacity as a business entity), or 

24 ‘‘(G) taxes (except as provided in sub25 section (b)(2) relating to product taxes). 
292 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(4) COMPENSATION EXPENSES.—‘Compensa2 tion expenses’ means— 

3 ‘‘(A) wages, salaries or other cash payable 

4 for services, 

5 ‘‘(B) any taxes imposed on the recipient 

6 that are withheld by the business entity, 

7 ‘‘(C) the cost of property purchased to pro8 vide employees with compensation (other than 

9 property incidental to the provision of fringe 

10 benefits that are excluded from income under 

11 the individual tax), 

12 ‘‘(D) the cost of fringe benefits which are 

13 includible in an employee’s, partner’s, or propri14 etor’s income under the Simplified USA Income 

15 Tax (or are excluded solely because they con16 stitute employee savings), including (without 

17 limitation)— 

18 ‘‘(i) contributions to retirement and 

19 severance benefit plans, 

20 ‘‘(ii) premiums for the cost of life, 

21 health, accident, disability and other insur22 ance policies for which the service provider, 

23 members of his family, or persons des24 ignated by him or members of his family 

25 are the beneficiaries, 
293 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(iii) rental of parking spaces or park2 ing fees (unless the parking space is used 

3 for a vehicle that is regularly used in a 

4 business activity); 

5 ‘‘(iv) employer paid educational bene6 fits; 

7 ‘‘(v) employer paid housing (other 

8 than housing provided for the convenience 

9 of the employer); and 

10 ‘‘(vi) employer paid meals (other than 

11 meals provided for the convenience of the 

12 employer). 

13 ‘‘(b) COST OF BUSINESS PURCHASES.— 

14 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—The ‘cost of a business 

15 purchase’ is the amount paid or to be paid for the 

16 business purchase. 

17 ‘‘(2) TAXES.— 

18 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—The ‘cost of business 

19 purchases’ includes any product taxes paid with 

20 respect to the property or services purchased. 

21 ‘‘(B) PRODUCT TAX.—‘Product tax’ means 

22 any excise tax, sales or use tax, custom duty, or 

23 other separately stated levy imposed by a Fed24 eral, State, or local government on the produc25 tion, severance or consumption of property or 
294 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 on the provision of services, whether or not sep2 arately stated, and including any such taxes 

3 that are technically imposed on the seller of 

4 property or services. 

5 ‘‘(C) TAXES NOT PRODUCT TAXES.—Prod6 uct taxes do not include— 

7 ‘‘(i) the import tax, 

8 ‘‘(ii) state and local property taxes, 

9 ‘‘(iii) franchise or income taxes, 

10 ‘‘(iv) payroll taxes and self-employ11 ment taxes, or 

12 ‘‘(v) the business tax. 

13 ‘‘(3) IMPORTS.—In the case of an import by a 

14 business entity, the cost of the import is the import 

15 price for purposes of the import tax. The import tax 

16 is not part of the cost of the import. 

17 ‘‘(c) PROPERTY AND SERVICES ACQUIRED FOR

18 PROPERTY.—If a business entity receives property or serv19 ices from a business entity in whole or partial exchange 

20 for property or services, the property or services acquired 

21 shall be treated as if they were purchased for an amount 

22 equal to the fair market value of the services or property 

23 received. For purposes of this section, property includes 

24 stock and other equity interests in business other than 

25 stock or an equity interest in the business entity acquiring 
295 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the property or services. See section 210(b) for rules on 

2 property or services received in exchange for an equity in3 terest in the recipient. 

4 ‘‘(d) GAMBLING PAYMENTS.—In the case of a busi5 ness involving gambling, lotteries, or other games of 

6 chance, business purchases include amounts paid to win7 ners. 

8 ‘‘(e) SAVINGS ASSETS.—‘Savings assets’ means 

9 stocks, bonds, securities, certificates of deposits, invest10 ments in partnerships and limited liability companies, 

11 shares of mutual funds, life insurance policies, annuities, 

12 and other similar savings or investment assets. 

13 ‘‘(f) CROSS REFERENCES.— 

14 ‘‘(1) FINANCIAL INTERMEDIATION AND INSUR15 ANCE.—For rules relating to fees for financial inter16 mediation services and insurance, see subchapter F. 

17 ‘‘(2) LAND.—For special rules relating to the 

18 acquisition of land, see subchapter E. 

19 ‘‘(3) RENTAL REAL ESTATE.—For special rules 

20 relating to the rental of real estate previously occu21 pied by an owner of the real estate, see section 232. 

22 ‘‘(4) OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES.—For spe23 cial rules relating to services performed outside the 

24 United States but used inside the United States and 

25 international services, see subchapter J. 
296 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘SEC. 206. BUSINESS ENTITY AND BUSINESS ACTIVITY. 

2 ‘‘(a) BUSINESS ENTITY.—For purposes of the busi3 ness tax, ‘business entity’ means any corporation, unincor4 porated association, partnership, limited liability company, 

5 proprietorship, independent contractor, individual, or any 

6 other person engaging in business activity in the United 

7 States. An individual shall be considered a business entity 

8 only with respect to the individual’s business activities. 

9 ‘‘(b) BUSINESS ACTIVITY.—‘Business activity’ means 

10 the sale of property or services, the leasing of property, 

11 the development of property or services for subsequent 

12 sale or use in producing property or services for subse13 quent sale. ‘Business activity’ does not include casual or 

14 occasional sales of property used by an individual (other 

15 than in a business activity), such as the sale by an indi16 vidual of a vehicle used by the individual. 

17 ‘‘(c) EXCEPTION FOR CERTAIN EMPLOYEES.— 

18 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—‘Business activity’ does not 

19 include— 

20 ‘‘(A) the performance of services by an em21 ployee for an employer that is a business entity 

22 with respect to the activity in which the em23 ployee is engaged, or 

24 ‘‘(B) the performance of regular domestic 

25 household services (including babysitting, 

26 housecleaning, and lawn cutting) by an em-
297 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ployee of an employer that is an individual or 

2 family. 

3 ‘‘(2) EMPLOYEE DEFINED.—For purposes of 

4 this subsection, ‘employee’ includes an individual 

5 partner who provides services to a partnership or an 

6 individual member who provides services to a limited 

7 liability company, or a proprietor with respect to 

8 compensation for services from his proprietorship. 

9 ‘‘SEC. 207. LOSS CARRYOVER DEDUCTION. 

10 ‘‘(a) DEDUCTION.—The ‘loss carryover deduction’ for 

11 a taxable year is the lesser of— 

12 ‘‘(1) the business entity’s gross profits for the 

13 taxable year (determined without the loss carryover 

14 deduction), or 

15 ‘‘(2) the amount of the loss carryover to the 

16 taxable year. 

17 ‘‘(b) LOSS CARRYOVER.— 

18 ‘‘(1) GENERAL RULE.—A loss for any taxable 

19 year shall be a loss carryover to each of the 215 tax20 able years following the taxable year of the loss. 

21 ‘‘(2) LOSS CARRYOVERS TO A TAXABLE YEAR.— 

22 The loss carryover to a taxable year is the sum of 

23 the loss carryovers from all prior taxable years be24 ginning on or after January 1, 2007, that can be 

25 carried over to the taxable year. 
298 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(3) REDUCTION OF LOSS CARRYOVERS AS A

2 RESULT OF THE DEDUCTION.—A business entity’s 

3 loss carryovers shall be reduced each year by the 

4 amount of the loss carryover deduction for the year. 

5 Loss carryovers shall be reduced in the order that 

6 they arose. 

7 ‘‘(c) LOSS FOR TAXABLE YEAR.—A business entity’s 

8 loss (if any) for the taxable year equals the excess (if any) 

9 of— 

10 ‘‘(1) the sum of— 

11 ‘‘(A) the cost of business purchases for the 

12 taxable year, and 

13 ‘‘(B) the transition basis adjustment for 

14 the taxable year, over 

15 ‘‘(2) taxable receipts for the taxable year. 

16 ‘‘(d) SPECIAL RULES.— 

17 ‘‘(1) CONSOLIDATED RETURNS.—In the case of 

18 a consolidated return, the loss for a taxable year 

19 shall be determined on a consolidated group basis. 

20 In the case of a deconsolidation, the loss carryovers 

21 from the consolidated group shall be allocated in ac22 cordance with rules to be prescribed by the Sec23 retary. 

24 ‘‘(2) LOSS CARRYOVERS OF ACQUIRED BUSI25 NESS ENTITY.— 
299 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—If a business entity 

2 acquires another business entity in a trans3 action that is considered the acquisition of a 

4 business entity and the two entities file a con5 solidated return or if two business entities 

6 merge, the loss carryovers will survive and can 

7 be applied against the taxable receipts attrib8 utable to the business activities carried on (or 

9 in the case of a merger formerly carried on) by 

10 either entity. 

11 ‘‘(B) ASSET ACQUISITION.—If a business 

12 entity acquires all or substantially all of the as13 sets of another entity in a transaction that is 

14 considered an asset acquisition rather than the 

15 acquisition of a business entity, the acquirer 

16 will be treated as if it acquired the loss 

17 carryovers of the selling entity. For purposes of 

18 this rule, the assets of a business entity include 

19 ownership interests in other business entities. 

20 ‘‘(C) SUBSTANTIALLY ALL.—For purposes 

21 of this paragraph ‘substantially all’ means more 

22 than 80 percent of the fair market value of a 

23 business entity’s net assets. Under rules pre24 scribed by the Secretary, the parties to a trans25 action may elect to treat acquisitions in excess 
300 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 of 70 percent of the fair market value of a busi2 ness entity’s net assets as acquisitions of ‘sub3 stantially all’ of a business entity’s net assets. 

4 ‘‘Subchapter C—Capital Contributions, 

5 Mergers, Acquisitions, and Distributions 

‘‘Sec. 210. Contributions to a business entity. 

‘‘Sec. 211. Distributions of property. 

‘‘Sec. 212. Asset acquisitions. 

‘‘Sec. 213. Mergers and stock acquisitions. 

‘‘Sec. 214. Spin-offs, split-off, etc. 

‘‘Sec. 215. Allocation of certain tax attributes. 

6 ‘‘SEC. 210. CONTRIBUTIONS TO A BUSINESS ENTITY. 

7 ‘‘(a) BY BUSINESS ENTITY.— 

8 ‘‘(1) CASH.—If a business entity contributes 

9 cash to a business entity of which it is or becomes 

10 a partial or full owner, the amount contributed is 

11 not a deductible amount to the contributor or a tax12 able receipt to the recipient. 

13 ‘‘(2) PROPERTY OR SERVICES.—If a business 

14 entity contributes property or services to a business 

15 entity of which it is or becomes a partial or full 

16 owner, the transaction will not result in taxable re17 ceipts to the contributor or a deduction for a busi18 ness purchase for the recipient and will not con19 stitute a sale resulting in taxable receipts to the con20 tributor. 

21 ‘‘(b) BY INDIVIDUAL.— 
301 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(1) CASH.—If an individual contributes cash 

2 to a business entity, the cash received is not a tax3 able receipt. 

4 ‘‘(2) NEW PROPERTY.—If an individual contrib5 utes to a business entity property that the individual 

6 purchased for the business entity but which was not 

7 used by any person after its purchase, the property 

8 shall be considered purchased by such business enti9 ty from the person from which the individual pur10 chased the property. 

11 ‘‘(3) PERSONAL USE PROPERTY.— 

12 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—If an individual con13 tributes personal use property to a business en14 tity in which the individual has an ownership 

15 interest or for which the individual receives an 

16 ownership interest, the business entity shall not 

17 be permitted to deduct the value of the property 

18 received as a business expense. The business 

19 entity will have a tax basis in the contributed 

20 property equal to the contributor’s basis. 

21 ‘‘(B) PERSONAL USE PROPERTY.—‘Per22 sonal use property’ means any property used by 

23 an individual at any time other than in a busi24 ness activity. 
302 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(4) SERVICES.—If an individual contributes 

2 services to a business entity in which the individual 

3 has an ownership interest or receives an ownership 

4 interest, the business entity shall not be permitted to 

5 deduct the value of the services received (or the 

6 value of the equity interest provided to the services 

7 provider). 

8 ‘‘SEC. 211. DISTRIBUTIONS OF PROPERTY. 

9 ‘‘(a) DISTRIBUTIONS OTHER THAN TO CONTROL10 LING BUSINESS.—If a business entity distributes all or a 

11 portion of its assets to its owners (other than a controlling 

12 business entity), the business entity will be treated as if 

13 it sold the assets to its owners at fair market value. The 

14 fair market value will be determined by the distributing 

15 corporation and those determinations, unless unreason16 able, will be binding on the recipients. 

17 ‘‘(b) DISTRIBUTIONS TO A CONTROLLING BUSI18 NESS.—If a business entity distributes all or a portion of 

19 its assets to a controlling business, the controlling busi20 ness will assume the distributing entity’s tax attributes 

21 with respect to the assets and neither entity will have tax22 able receipts or a deduction as a result of the transaction. 

23 ‘‘(c) DISTRIBUTION OF PERSONAL USE PROP24 ERTY.—If personal use property is distributed to the indi25 vidual who contributed the personal use property to a busi-
303 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ness entity, the fair market value of the property for pur2 poses of paragraph (a) shall equal the basis of the prop3 erty plus any enhancement in value of the property attrib4 utable to business purchases with respect to the property. 

5 ‘‘(d) CONTROLLING BUSINESS ENTITY.—A business 

6 entity is a ‘controlling business entity’ with respect to an7 other business entity if it owns directly or indirectly more 

8 than 50 percent of the profits or capital interest in the 

9 other business entity. 

10 ‘‘(e) APPLICATION OF THIS SECTION.—This section 

11 applies to both liquidating and nonliquidating distribu12 tions. Property shall be treated as distributed if the prop13 erty is used for a nonbusiness purpose (as defined in sec14 tion 232) for more than an insubstantial period of time 

15 during a taxable year. See section 232 for rules relating 

16 to certain rental property. 

17 ‘‘SEC. 212. ASSET ACQUISITIONS. 

18 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—If a business entity transfers 

19 some or all of its assets, the consideration received for 

20 such assets shall be allocated among the assets transferred 

21 in the same manner as was required by section 1060 of 

22 the Internal Revenue Code of 1986. If the transferee and 

23 transferor agree in writing on the allocation of any consid24 eration, or as to the fair market value of any of the assets, 

25 such agreement shall be binding on both the transferor 
304 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 and transferee unless the Secretary determines that such 

2 allocation (or fair market value) is not appropriate. 

3 ‘‘(b) TAX CONSEQUENCES.—The tax consequences of 

4 an asset acquisition shall be determined in accordance 

5 with the rules of this chapter and shall be dependent upon 

6 allocations made under subsection (a). In general, consid7 eration allocable to savings assets, such as stock in an8 other business entity, would not be included in taxable re9 ceipts of the transferor and would not be a business pur10 chase of the purchaser, but consideration allocable to the 

11 sale of tangible property and intangible property (other 

12 than savings assets) will constitute taxable receipts of the 

13 seller and a business purchase of the purchaser. 

14 ‘‘(c) ELECTION TO TREAT ASSET ACQUISITION AS A

15 STOCK ACQUISITION.—In the case of the sale of substan16 tially all of the assets of a business entity or substantially 

17 all of the assets of a line of business or a separately stand18 ing business of a business entity, the transferee and trans19 feror can jointly elect to treat the acquisition as if it were 

20 an acquisition of the stock of a business entity holding 

21 the assets so transferred. In such case, the rules of section 

22 213 shall apply. 

23 ‘‘(d) AUTHORITY TO REQUIRE ALLOCATION AGREE24 MENT AND NOTICE TO THE SECRETARY.—If the Sec25 retary determines that certain types of asset acquisitions 
305 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 have significant possibilities of tax avoidance, the Sec2 retary may require— 

3 ‘‘(1) parties to such types of acquisitions to 

4 enter into agreements allocating consideration, 

5 ‘‘(2) parties to acquisitions involving certain 

6 kinds of assets to enter into agreements allocating 

7 part of the consideration to those assets, or 

8 ‘‘(3) parties to certain acquisitions to report in9 formation to the Secretary. 

10 ‘‘(e) ASSET ACQUISITION RULES DO NOT APPLY IF

11 CONSIDERATION INCLUDES EQUITY IN PURCHASER.— 

12 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—If a business entity issues 

13 its own equity or equity in a subsidiary or other con14 trolled entity as part of the consideration for the 

15 transfer of assets to it, the transaction shall not be 

16 treated as an asset acquisition and the rules of sec17 tion 10 shall apply. 

18 ‘‘(2) EQUITY.—For purposes of this subsection, 

19 equity means— 

20 ‘‘(A) stock, in the case of a corporation, 

21 ‘‘(B) partnership or similar interest, in the 

22 case of a partnership or limited liability com23 pany, and 

24 ‘‘(C) an ownership interest or interest in 

25 profits in the case of any other business entity. 
306 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘SEC. 213. MERGERS AND STOCK ACQUISITIONS. 

2 ‘‘(a) MERGERS.—A merger of one business entity 

3 into another or two businesses entities into a third busi4 ness entity or any other similar transaction shall have no 

5 direct consequences under the business tax. The surviving 

6 entity shall assume the tax attributes of the merged cor7 porations, including any loss carryovers and credit 

8 carryovers. 

9 ‘‘(b) STOCK ACQUISITION.—The acquisition of all or 

10 substantially all of the ownership interest in one business 

11 entity either for cash or in exchange for ownership in the 

12 acquiring entity or an entity controlled by the acquired 

13 entity shall have no direct consequences under the busi14 ness tax. 

15 ‘‘SEC. 214. SPIN-OFFS, SPLIT-OFFS, ETC. 

16 ‘‘A spin-off, split-off or split-up of a business entity 

17 shall have no direct tax consequences under the business 

18 tax. 

19 ‘‘SEC. 215. ALLOCATION OF CERTAIN TAX ATTRIBUTES. 

20 ‘‘The Secretary shall prescribe rules for allocation of 

21 loss carryovers and payroll tax credit carryovers in cases 

22 of substantial shifts of assets from one business entity to 

23 another business entity. Under such rules, a portion of a 

24 business entity’s carryovers may be deemed transferred 

25 when assets are transferred. 
307 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘Subchapter D—Accounting Method Rules 

‘‘Sec. 220. General accounting rules. 

‘‘Sec. 221. Use of the cash method of accounting. 

‘‘Sec. 222. Taxable year. 

‘‘Sec. 223. Long-term contracts. 

‘‘Sec. 224. Post-sale price adjustments and refunds. 

‘‘Sec. 225. Bad debts. 

‘‘Sec. 226. Transition rules. 

2 ‘‘SEC. 220. GENERAL ACCOUNTING RULES. 

3 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—Except as provided in section 

4 221, a business entity shall use an accrual method of ac5 counting for purposes of determining the timing of rec6 ognition of taxable receipts and deduction of business pur7 chases. All business purchases shall be deducted when in8 curred (in the case of a business entity using the accrual 

9 method of accounting) or when paid (in case of a business 

10 entity using the cash method of accounting) without re11 gard to whether the business purchases are for or relate 

12 to— 

13 ‘‘(1) inventory, 

14 ‘‘(2) assets with a useful life of more than one 

15 year, or 

16 ‘‘(3) property that will be used to produce other 

17 property. 

18 ‘‘(b) ECONOMIC PERFORMANCE.—For purposes of 

19 determining whether an amount has been incurred, the all 

20 events test shall not be treated as met any earlier than 

21 when economic performance with respect to such item oc22 curs. 
308 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(c) CONSISTENT ACCOUNTING METHODS.—Except 

2 as otherwise expressly provided in this chapter, a business 

3 entity shall secure the consent of the Secretary before 

4 changing the method of accounting by which it determines 

5 gross profits. This provision shall not apply to changes 

6 required by the adoption of the business tax. 

7 ‘‘SEC. 221. USE OF THE CASH METHOD OF ACCOUNTING. 

8 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—A business entity that was per9 mitted to use and used the cash method of accounting 

10 under the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 shall be per11 mitted to continue to use the cash method of accounting. 

12 ‘‘(b) NEW BUSINESS ENTITIES.—A new business en13 tity shall be permitted to use the cash method of account14 ing if permitted to under regulations prescribed by the 

15 Secretary. 

16 ‘‘(c) CHANGE OR EXPANSION OF BUSINESS.—Sub17 section (a) shall cease to apply to a business entity that 

18 changes or expands its business such that under regula19 tions prescribed by the Secretary it is no longer eligible 

20 to use the cash method of accounting. 

21 ‘‘(d) REGULATIONS.— 

22 ‘‘(1) USE OF CASH METHOD.—The Secretary 

23 shall prescribe regulations defining which business 

24 entities may use the cash method of accounting. In 

25 general, those regulations shall be consistent with 
309 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the rules under sections 447 and 448 of the Internal 

2 Revenue Code of 1986, except that all corporations 

3 shall be treated as C corporations were treated 

4 under those sections. The regulations shall not re5 quire a business entity described in subsection (a) to 

6 convert to the accrual method prior to January 1, 

7 2008. 

8 ‘‘(2) CHANGE IN ACCOUNTING METHOD.—The 

9 Secretary shall prescribe regulations to prevent dou10 ble counting of taxable receipts and deductible ex11 penses in the case of a change in accounting method. 

12 ‘‘SEC. 222. TAXABLE YEAR. 

13 ‘‘(a) COMPUTATION OF GROSS PROFITS.—Gross 

14 profits shall be computed on the basis of a business enti15 ty’s taxable year. 

16 ‘‘(b) TAXABLE YEAR.—‘Taxable year’ means— 

17 ‘‘(1) the taxpayer’s annual accounting period, if 

18 it is a calendar year or a fiscal year; 

19 ‘‘(2) the calendar year, if subsection (g) applies; 

20 or 

21 ‘‘(3) the period for which the return is made if 

22 the return is made for a period of less than 12 

23 months. 
310 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(c) ANNUAL ACCOUNTING PERIOD.—‘Annual ac2 counting period’ means the annual period on the basis of 

3 which the business entity regularly keeps its books. 

4 ‘‘(d) CALENDAR YEAR.—‘Calendar year’ means a pe5 riod of 12 months ending on December 31. 

6 ‘‘(e) FISCAL YEAR.—‘Fiscal year’ means a period of 

7 12 months ending on the last day of any month other than 

8 December. In the case of any business entity that has 

9 made the election provided by subsection (f), the term 

10 means the annual period (varying from 52 to 53 weeks) 

11 so elected. 

12 ‘‘(f) ELECTION OF 52–53 WEEK YEAR.— 

13 ‘‘(1) GENERAL RULE.—A business entity which, 

14 in keeping its books, regularly computes its income 

15 or profits on a basis of an annual period which var16 ies from 52 to 53 weeks and ends always on the 

17 same day of the week and ends always— 

18 ‘‘(A) on whatever date such same day of 

19 the week last occurs in a calendar month, or 

20 ‘‘(B) on whatever date such same day of 

21 the week falls which is nearest to the last day 

22 of a calendar month, may elect to compute its 

23 gross profits on the basis of such annual period. 

24 ‘‘(2) REGULATIONS.—The Secretary shall pre25 scribe such regulations as he deems necessary for 
311 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the application of this subsection, including regula2 tions relating to the application of effective dates to 

3 taxpayers using a 52–53 week year. 

4 ‘‘(g) CALENDAR YEAR REQUIRED.— 

5 ‘‘(1) NO ACCOUNTING PERIOD.—A business en6 tity’s taxable year shall be the calendar year if the 

7 business entity does not have an annual accounting 

8 period or has an annual accounting period that does 

9 not qualify as a fiscal year. 

10 ‘‘(2) NEW BUSINESS ENTITY.—The taxable 

11 year of a business entity that begins business activ12 ity after December 31, 2006, shall be the calendar 

13 year (or a 52–53 week fiscal year ending in Decem14 ber) unless the business entity can demonstrate a 

15 business reason for selecting an accounting period 

16 other than the calendar year. 

17 ‘‘(h) TRANSITION RULE FOR BUSINESS ENTITIES

18 WITH A FISCAL YEAR.— 

19 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—A business entity with a 

20 taxable year that is not the calendar year shall have 

21 a short taxable year ending on December 31, 2006, 

22 and a subsequent taxable year beginning on January 

23 1, 2007, and ending on the day immediately pre24 ceding the beginning of the business entity’s next 

25 fiscal year. 
312 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) BUSINESS ENTITIES WITH 52–53 WEEK

2 YEAR ENDING IN DECEMBER.— 

3 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—If a business entity 

4 has a 52–53 week taxable year (under the In5 ternal Revenue Code of 1986) that ends in De6 cember 2006, it may elect to begin its first tax7 able year for the business tax on the first day 

8 immediately following the last day of such tax9 able year. 

10 ‘‘(B) NO ELECTION.—If a business entity 

11 that has a 52–53 week taxable year that ends 

12 in December 2006, does not make the election 

13 under subparagraph (A) or is prohibited from 

14 making such election by subparagraph (C), the 

15 business entity’s taxable year under the Inter16 nal Revenue Code of 1986 that would end in 

17 December 2006 shall end on December 31, 

18 2006. 

19 ‘‘(C) ANTI-ABUSE RULE.—Subparagraph 

20 (A) shall not apply to any taxpayer that enters 

21 into business transactions in 2006 following the 

22 scheduled end of its fiscal year with business 

23 entities that are not subject to the business tax 

24 at the time of such transactions if such trans-
313 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 actions deviate from the normal course of busi2 ness in order to achieve some tax benefit. 

3 ‘‘SEC. 223. LONG-TERM CONTRACTS. 

4 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—In the case of a long-term con5 tract— 

6 ‘‘(1) CONTRACTOR EXPENSES.—The contractor 

7 shall be entitled to deduct its business purchases 

8 when paid or incurred. 

9 ‘‘(2) CONTRACTOR RECEIPTS.—The contractor 

10 shall recognize taxable receipts— 

11 ‘‘(A) in the case of a project in which the 

12 acquirer has no ownership interest in the 

13 project until delivery— 

14 ‘‘(i) upon delivery of the project, in 

15 the case of an accrual basis contractor, or 

16 ‘‘(ii) upon the later of delivery of the 

17 project or the receipt of payment, in the 

18 case of cash-basis contractor. 

19 ‘‘(B) in the case of a project in which the 

20 acquirer obtains an ownership interest as the 

21 project is constructed— 

22 ‘‘(i) when the contractor has the right 

23 to payments, in the case of an accrual 

24 basis contractor, or 
314 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(ii) upon the later of when the con2 tractor receives the cash or has the right 

3 to payments, in the case of a cash basis 

4 contractor. 

5 ‘‘(3) ACQUIRER EXPENSES.—The acquirer that 

6 is a business entity shall be entitled to deduct its 

7 costs of the business purchase— 

8 ‘‘(A) in the case of a cash-basis acquirer, 

9 at such time as a cash basis contractor would 

10 be required to treat the amounts paid as tax11 able receipts, or 

12 ‘‘(B) in the case of an accrual-basis 

13 acquirer, at such time as an accrual basis con14 tractor would be required to treat the amounts 

15 paid or due as taxable receipts. 

16 ‘‘(b) RIGHT TO PAYMENTS.— 

17 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—A contractor shall be treat18 ed as having a right to payments with respect to a 

19 project at any time to the extent that the contractor 

20 would not be required to return payments received 

21 (or would be entitled to collect payments not yet re22 ceived) if the project were terminated at such time 

23 by the contractor. 

24 ‘‘(2) CONTRACTUAL PROVISIONS.—If a long25 term contract includes a procedure for paying the 
315 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 contractor as work is completed (for example, by 

2 reason of a draw down from a trust account), the 

3 contractual provisions shall generally govern when a 

4 contractor has a right to payment. 

5 ‘‘(3) PERCENTAGE COMPLETION METHOD OF

6 ACCOUNTING.—If a long-term contract does not in7 clude a mechanism for paying the contractor as 

8 work is completed, the percentage-of-completion 

9 method of accounting shall be used to determine the 

10 timing of taxable receipts of the contractor and busi11 ness purchases of the acquirer. 

12 ‘‘(c) LONG-TERM CONTRACT.— 

13 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—‘Long-term contract’ 

14 means— 

15 ‘‘(A) any contract that covers service or 

16 production through parts of two different cal17 endar years if the contract includes a formal 

18 deposit and draw-down mechanism, and 

19 ‘‘(B) any contract for the manufacture, 

20 building, installation, or construction of prop21 erty if such contract is not completed within the 

22 taxable year of the contractor in which such 

23 contract is entered into. 

24 ‘‘(2) EXCEPTION.—A contract for the manufac25 ture of property shall not be treated as a long-term 
316 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 contract unless such contract involves the manufac2 ture of— 

3 ‘‘(A) any unique item of a type which is 

4 not normally included in the finished goods in5 ventory of the taxpayer, or 

6 ‘‘(B) any item which normally requires 

7 more than 12 calendar months to complete. 

8 ‘‘(d) CONSISTENCY.—The Secretary may require 

9 business entities to file statements containing such infor10 mation with respect to long-term contracts as the Sec11 retary may prescribe to ensure consistency in reporting. 

12 ‘‘(e) FOREIGN CONTRACTS.—This section shall not 

13 be construed to permit a deduction for a business purchase 

14 for the cost of property produced outside the United 

15 States pursuant to a long-term contract at any time prior 

16 to the import of such property into the United States. 

17 ‘‘SEC. 224. POST-SALE PRICE ADJUSTMENTS AND REFUNDS. 

18 ‘‘(a) RECEIPT OF PRICE ADJUSTMENT.—In the case 

19 of a post-sale price adjustment attributable to a business 

20 purchase which was taken into account in computing gross 

21 profits for a prior taxable year, the amount of such adjust22 ment shall be treated as a reduction or increase, as the 

23 case may be, in the cost of business purchases for the tax24 able year in which the adjustment is made or incurred. 
317 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(b) ISSUANCE OF PRICE ADJUSTMENT.—In the case 

2 of a post-sale price adjustment attributable to a sale the 

3 receipts from which were taken into account in deter4 mining taxable receipts for a prior taxable year, the 

5 amount of such adjustment shall be treated as a reduction 

6 or increase, as the case may be, in taxable receipts for 

7 the taxable year in which the adjustment is made or in8 curred. 

9 ‘‘(c) POST-SALE PRICE ADJUSTMENT.—‘Post-sale 

10 price adjustment’ means a refund, rebate, or other price 

11 allowance attributable to a sale of property or services or 

12 an upward adjustment in price that was not previously 

13 taken into account under the business entity’s method of 

14 accounting. 

15 ‘‘SEC. 225. BAD DEBTS. 

16 ‘‘(a) SELLER.—If an amount owed to an accrual 

17 basis business entity for property or services sold— 

18 ‘‘(1) was taken into account as a taxable receipt 

19 in a prior taxable year, and 

20 ‘‘(2) becomes wholly or partially uncollectible 

21 during the taxable year, then the seller shall treat 

22 the amount as a reduction in taxable receipts for the 

23 taxable year in which it becomes wholly or partially 

24 uncollectible. 
318 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(b) NOTICE REQUIREMENT.—No reduction shall be 

2 allowed under subsection (a) unless the seller notifies the 

3 purchaser of the amount which the seller has treated as 

4 wholly or partially uncollectible. 

5 ‘‘(c) SUBSEQUENT COLLECTION.—If an amount 

6 which was treated as uncollectible under subsection (a) is 

7 subsequently collected, it shall be treated as a taxable re8 ceipt when collected. 

9 ‘‘(d) PURCHASER.—If a purchaser receives notice 

10 under subsection (b) from a seller and the purchaser has 

11 treated the amount labeled uncollectible as a business pur12 chase in a prior taxable year, then the purchaser shall 

13 treat such amount as a reduction in the cost of business 

14 purchases in the taxable year to which the notice relates. 

15 If the purchaser subsequently repays such amount, the re16 payment shall constitute the cost of a business purchase. 

17 ‘‘SEC. 226. TRANSITION RULES. 

18 ‘‘(a) NO DOUBLE DEDUCTIONS.—A business entity 

19 shall not be entitled to treat as a ‘cost of business pur20 chase’ any amount that the business entity deducted in 

21 computing taxable income under the income tax in effect 

22 prior the effective date of the business tax. 

23 ‘‘(b) NO DOUBLE INCLUSION.—A business entity 

24 shall not be required to include in taxable receipts any 

25 receipt that the business entity took into account in com-
319 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 puting taxable income under the income tax in effect prior 

2 to the effect date of the business tax. 

3 ‘‘(c) NO LOSS OF DEDUCTION.—An expense which— 

4 ‘‘(1) a business entity would have been able to 

5 deduct as a cost of a business purchase in an ac6 counting period before the effective date of the busi7 ness tax if the business tax had been in effect in 

8 such period, and 

9 ‘‘(2) the business entity would have been able to 

10 deduct as an expense in computing taxable income 

11 in a period after the business tax is effective if the 

12 income tax had continued in effect, shall be treated 

13 as a cost of a business purchase incurred or paid at 

14 the time that it would have been paid or incurred 

15 under the income tax if the income tax had contin16 ued in effect. This subsection shall not apply to any 

17 amount which is to be taken into account under sub18 chapter N (relating to amortization of transition 

19 basis, inventory costs, and safe harbor leases), any 

20 amounts which would have been deducted under the 

21 income tax through loss carryover deductions, or any 

22 deductions deferred by the uniform capitalization 

23 rules under section 263A of the Internal Revenue 

24 Code of 1986. 
320 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(d) ALL TAXABLE RECEIPTS TAXED.—A receipt 

2 which— 

3 ‘‘(1) a business entity would have been required 

4 to treat as a taxable receipt in an accounting period 

5 before the effective date of the business tax if the 

6 business tax had been in effect in such period, and 

7 ‘‘(2) the business entity would have been re8 quired to include in gross income in a period after 

9 the business tax is effective if the income tax had 

10 continued in effect 

11 shall be treated as a taxable receipt at the time that it 

12 would have been included in income if the income tax had 

13 continued in effect. 

14 ‘‘Subchapter E—Land and Rental Property 

‘‘Sec. 230. No deduction for land purchased for nonbusiness use. 

‘‘Sec. 231. Taxable receipts for land held for nonbusiness use. 

‘‘Sec. 232. Certain rental property. 

15 ‘‘SEC. 230. NO DEDUCTION FOR LAND PURCHASED FOR 

16 NONBUSINESS USE. 

17 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—The acquisition of unimproved 

18 land shall not constitute a business purchase if the unim19 proved land is not acquired to be used in a business activ20 ity or if the land is acquired for— 

21 ‘‘(1) speculation, 

22 ‘‘(2) development (including subdivision), or 

23 ‘‘(3) temporary leasing or other use not com24 mensurate with the value of the land, 
321 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(4) indefinite future use in a business activity, 

2 or 

3 ‘‘(5) use in compensating employees. 

4 ‘‘(b) FUTURE USE IN BUSINESS ACTIVITY.—Unim5 proved land will not be considered held for ‘indefinite fu6 ture use in a business activity’ if promptly upon acquisi7 tion, the purchaser or the lessee begins construction of im8 provements on the land (other than improvements, such 

9 as paving or sewage lines, intended for indefinite future 

10 development) that will be used in a business activity. Such 

11 improvement must be commensurate with the value of the 

12 land. 

13 ‘‘(c) UNIMPROVED LAND.—‘Unimproved land’ 

14 means— 

15 ‘‘(1) land with no buildings on it, 

16 ‘‘(2) land with improvements if the value of the 

17 improvements is relatively small in comparison to 

18 the value of the land and it is anticipated that the 

19 improvements will be demolished and not used, 

20 ‘‘(3) land in excess of the amount reasonably 

21 needed for the buildings located on it. 

22 ‘‘(d) CONVERSION TO BUSINESS USE.—If the acqui23 sition of land is not treated as a business purchase by rea24 son of subsection (a) and the land is subsequently used 

25 in a manner for which it could have been treated as a 
322 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 business purchase, the cost of the land will be treated as 

2 a business purchase when the improvements on the land 

3 are placed in service (or in the case of construction for 

4 sale, substantially completed and advertised for sale). 

5 ‘‘SEC. 231. TAXABLE RECEIPTS FROM SALE OF LAND HELD 

6 FOR NONBUSINESS USE. 

7 ‘‘(a) TAX BASIS.—A business entity shall have a tax 

8 basis in land equal to the cost of the land if such cost 

9 is not deductible by reason of section 230(a) and the land 

10 has not been converted to business use for purposes of 

11 section 230(d). 

12 ‘‘(b) TAXABLE RECEIPTS OF A LAND SALE.—The 

13 taxable receipts from the sale of land (or portion thereof) 

14 in which a business entity has a tax basis by reason of 

15 subsection (a) shall be the amount by which the proceeds 

16 exceed the basis of such land (or portion thereof). 

17 ‘‘SEC. 232. CERTAIN RENTAL PROPERTY. 

18 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—Except as provided in subsection 

19 (b), the activity of rental of real estate is a business activ20 ity to which the business tax applies. 

21 ‘‘(b) NOT RENTAL PROPERTY.—Subsection (a) shall 

22 not apply to property described in section 111(b)(1) (relat23 ing to property owned by individuals and used for at least 

24 14 days for a nonbusiness purpose and rented for no more 

25 than 14 days during the taxable year). 
323 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(c) RENTAL PROPERTY BECOMES NONRENTAL

2 PROPERTY.—If property which is considered rental prop3 erty for purposes of subsection (a) in one taxable year 

4 ceases to be rental property (by reason of subsection (b)) 

5 in the following taxable year, the property (and any associ6 ated debt) shall be treated as distributed by the business 

7 entity to its owners. Section 211(a) shall apply to such 

8 distribution. 

9 ‘‘Subchapter F—Insurance and Financial 

10 Products 

‘‘Sec. 235. General rules. 

‘‘Sec. 236. Fees for financial intermediation services. 

‘‘Sec. 237. Deductible insurance premiums. 

‘‘Sec. 238. Nondeductible insurance premiums. 

‘‘Sec. 239. Certain implicit fees for financial intermediate services. 

11 ‘‘SEC. 235. GENERAL RULES. 

12 ‘‘(a) TAXABLE RECEIPTS.—Except in the case of a 

13 financial intermediation business, taxable receipts do not 

14 include financial receipts (as defined in section 203(e)(2)). 

15 ‘‘(b) BUSINESS PURCHASES.—Except in the case of 

16 a financial intermediation business, business purchases do 

17 not include the cost of financial instruments (as defined 

18 in section 242(b)(3)) or payments for use of money or cap19 ital, other than fees for financial intermediation services. 

20 ‘‘SEC. 236. FEES FOR FINANCIAL INTERMEDIATION SERV21 ICES. 

22 ‘‘(a) BUSINESS PURCHASE.—Business purchases in23 clude explicit fees and implicit fees for financial intermedi-
324 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ation services (except to the extent that such fees are for 

2 services treated as performed outside the United States 

3 and not imported into the United States or for services 

4 treated as exported.). 

5 ‘‘(b) FINANCIAL INTERMEDIATION SERVICES.—The 

6 definition of ‘financial intermediation service’ in section 

7 241 applies for purposes of this section. 

8 ‘‘(c) EXPLICIT FEES.— 

9 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—‘Explicit fees for financial 

10 intermediation services’ means separately stated fees 

11 for services provided by a business entity in the fi12 nancial intermediation business. Explicit fees do not 

13 include fees for use of money or capital. 

14 ‘‘(2) EXAMPLES.—Explicit fees for financial 

15 intermediation services include (without limita16 tion)— 

17 ‘‘(A) separately listed maintenance and 

18 service charges of providers of financial inter19 mediation services, 

20 ‘‘(B) loan documentation fees, 

21 ‘‘(C) brokerage fees, 

22 ‘‘(D) loan origination fees, 

23 ‘‘(E) underwriting fees, 

24 ‘‘(F) trustees’ fees, and 

25 ‘‘(G) fees for credit checks. 
325 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(3) EXCLUSIONS.—Explicit fees for financial 

2 intermediation services do not include prepaid inter3 est and other fees for use of money or capital even 

4 if such fees are separately stated or are labeled as 

5 service fees. 

6 ‘‘(d) IMPLICIT FEES.— 

7 ‘‘(1) IMPLICIT FEES ATTRIBUTABLE TO BOR8 ROWING.— 

9 ‘‘(A) IN GENERAL.—Implicit fees attrib10 utable to borrowing from banks and other fi11 nancial institutions shall include the portion of 

12 interest payments that the Secretary designates 

13 as constituting service fees. 

14 ‘‘(B) TIMING.—Implicit fees determined 

15 under this paragraph shall not be deductible in 

16 any taxable year prior to the taxable year in 

17 which the interest is paid. If the amount of the 

18 interest to which implicit fees relate was de19 ducted as original issue discount under the In20 ternal Revenue Code of 1986, the implicit fees 

21 with respect to such interest shall not constitute 

22 a deductible business purchase. 

23 ‘‘(C) DESIGNATION BY SECRETARY.— 

24 ‘‘(i) ESTIMATE OF DIFFERENTIAL.— 

25 The Secretary shall estimate for each cal-
326 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 endar year the difference between the cost 

2 of funds for banks and the rates of interest 

3 (including discount points) charged to the 

4 most credit-worthy depositors of banks. 

5 The determinations shall be made sepa6 rately for— 

7 ‘‘(I) loans with terms of not more 

8 than 3 years, 

9 ‘‘(II) loans with terms of over 3 

10 but not over 9 years, and 

11 ‘‘(III) loans with terms of over 9 

12 years. 

13 ‘‘(ii) DESIGNATION OF IMPLICIT

14 FEES.—The Secretary shall designate the 

15 differences determined under clause (i) as 

16 the portion of interest expense on loans 

17 from banks and other financial institutions 

18 that constitutes an implicit fee for term 

19 loans originated during the following cal20 endar year for the respective periods listed 

21 in subclauses (I) through (III) of clause 

22 (i). The difference determined for loans de23 scribed in subclause (I) of clause (i) shall 

24 apply to determine the implicit fee portion 
327 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 of interest on demand loans outstanding 

2 during the following calendar year. 

3 ‘‘(iii) HISTORICAL DETERMINATION.— 

4 The Secretary shall make an historical de5 termination in accordance with the prin6 ciples of this subparagraph to designate 

7 the portion of interest on term loans made 

8 before January 1, 2006, that will con9 stitute implicit fees. 

10 ‘‘(2) IMPLICIT FEES FOR OTHER FINANCIAL

11 INTERMEDIATION ACTIVITY.—Implicit fees for finan12 cial intermediation services include the portion of the 

13 fees or other charges paid to a provider of financial 

14 intermediation services (other than lending) as such 

15 provider designates in accordance with section 39. 

16 ‘‘SEC. 237. DEDUCTIBLE INSURANCE PREMIUMS. 

17 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—The cost of insurance premiums 

18 on business loss policies that insure risks in the United 

19 States constitute costs of business purchases. Proceeds 

20 from such policies constitute taxable receipts. 

21 ‘‘(b) BUSINESS LOSS POLICY.—A ‘business loss pol22 icy’ is an insurance policy— 

23 ‘‘(1) owned by a business entity, 
328 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) the beneficiary of which is the business en2 tity or another business entity doing business with 

3 the owner of the policy, 

4 ‘‘(3) that has no inside buildup or other savings 

5 component, 

6 ‘‘(4) that covers losses on a loss incurred or 

7 claims made basis during the term of the policy, 

8 ‘‘(5) that has a term of not more than 2 years, 

9 ‘‘(6) that is not a direct or indirect form of 

10 compensation, and 

11 ‘‘(7) that covers direct losses of the business, 

12 such as— 

13 ‘‘(A) damage to or theft of property used 

14 in business activity, 

15 ‘‘(B) tort claims against the business, 

16 ‘‘(C) loss of use of business premises or 

17 services, 

18 ‘‘(D) malpractice, or 

19 ‘‘(E) alleged or actual breach of fiduciary 

20 obligations. 

21 ‘‘SEC. 238. NONDEDUCTIBLE INSURANCE PREMIUMS. 

22 ‘‘(a) NONDEDUCTIBILITY.—The cost of insurance 

23 policies that are not business loss policies are not deduct24 ible costs of business purchases. 
329 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(b) PROCEEDS OF NONDEDUCTIBLE POLICIES.—In2 surance proceeds from policies described in subsection (a) 

3 do not constitute taxable receipts. 

4 ‘‘(c) APPLICATION OF THIS SECTION TO CERTAIN

5 INSURANCE.—This section shall apply to life insurance 

6 policies. 

7 ‘‘SEC. 239. CERTAIN IMPLICIT FEES FOR FINANCIAL INTER8 MEDIATION SERVICES. 

9 ‘‘(a) DEDUCTIBILITY OF FEES.—If a financial inter10 mediation business (as defined in section 241(b)) elects 

11 to determine implicit fees for financial intermediation 

12 services pursuant to this section and notify its business 

13 customers of their share of the implicit fees in accordance 

14 with this section, a business entity which receives such no15 tice may treat the amount reported in the notice as an 

16 implicit fee for financial intermediation services in the cal17 endar year to which such notice relates. 

18 ‘‘(b) ALLOCATION AND REPORTING.— 

19 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—A financial intermediation 

20 business may— 

21 ‘‘(A) allocate fees received for services for 

22 which no separately stated fees (or implicit fees 

23 for borrowing determined under section 

24 236(d)(1)) are charged among recipients of 
330 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 such services on a reasonable and consistent 

2 basis, and 

3 ‘‘(B) report to each recipient not later 

4 than February 15th of each year the amount so 

5 allocated to it with respect to the immediately 

6 preceding calendar year. 

7 ‘‘(2) MAXIMUM FEES ALLOCATED.—The max8 imum amount that may be allocated by a financial 

9 intermediation business for a calendar is the excess 

10 of— 

11 ‘‘(A) the gross profits of the financial 

12 intermediation business for the calendar year 

13 (as reasonably estimated by the financial inter14 mediation business), over 

15 ‘‘(B) the explicit fees for financial inter16 mediation services received by the financial 

17 intermediation business. 

18 ‘‘(3) REASONABLE ALLOCATION.—An allocation 

19 will not be considered reasonable unless it takes into 

20 account and allocates fees to— 

21 ‘‘(A) both services provided to business en22 tities and services provided to individuals (other 

23 than in a business capacity), and 

24 ‘‘(B) both persons who receive money from 

25 the financial intermediation business and per-
331 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 sons who pay money to the financial intermedi2 ation business (even though amounts allocated 

3 to the former do not constitute implicit fees). 

4 ‘‘(4) REGULATIONS.—The Secretary shall pre5 scribe regulations relating to the allocations under 

6 this subsection, including regulations addressing— 

7 ‘‘(A) rules for timing of deductions of im8 plicit fees paid by fiscal year recipients, 

9 ‘‘(B) subsequent year adjustments if a fi10 nancial intermediation business allocates too 

11 much in a calendar year, 

12 ‘‘(C) rules for advance approval from the 

13 Secretary for allocation procedures, and 

14 ‘‘(D) safe-harbor alternatives to the alloca15 tion procedures described in this subsection. 

16 ‘‘(c) NOT APPLICABLE TO LENDING SERVICES.— 

17 This section shall not apply to lending services. 

18 ‘‘Subchapter G—Financial Intermediation 

19 and Financial Institutions 

‘‘Sec. 241. Activities constituting a financial intermediation business. 

‘‘Sec. 242. General rule for taxation. 

‘‘Sec. 243. Special rule for banks. 

‘‘Sec. 244. Insurance companies. 

‘‘Sec. 245. Financial pass-through entities. 

‘‘Sec. 246. Financial intermediation by other businesses. 
332 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘SEC. 241. ACTIVITIES CONSTITUTING A FINANCIAL INTER2 MEDIATION BUSINESS. 

3 ‘‘(a) FINANCIAL INTERMEDIATION BUSINESS.—The 

4 providing of financial intermediation services shall be con5 sidered a business activity. The gross profit of a business 

6 entity providing financial intermediation services shall be 

7 determined by taking into account the rules of this sub8 chapter. 

9 ‘‘(b) SEPARATE BUSINESS ACTIVITY.—The provision 

10 of financial intermediation services for unrelated persons 

11 shall be considered a separate business activity and a busi12 ness shall be considered a separate entity with respect to 

13 such activity. An entity engaging in such business is re14 ferred to in this chapter as a ‘financial intermediation 

15 business’. 

16 ‘‘(c) FINANCIAL INTERMEDIATION BY A BUSINESS.— 

17 Section 246 shall apply to a business that provides finan18 cial intermediation services for itself and related parties 

19 but generally does not provide such services for unrelated 

20 parties. 

21 ‘‘(d) DEFINITIONS.— 

22 ‘‘(1) FINANCIAL INTERMEDIATION SERVICES.— 

23 ‘Financial intermediation services’ include— 

24 ‘‘(A) lending services, 

25 ‘‘(B) insurance services, 
333 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(C) market-making and dealer services, 

2 and 

3 ‘‘(D) any other service provided as busi4 ness activity in which a person acts as an inter5 mediary in— 

6 ‘‘(i) the transfer of property, services, 

7 or financial assets, liabilities, risks or in8 struments (or income or expense derived 

9 therefrom) between two or more persons, 

10 or 

11 ‘‘(ii) the pooling of economic risk 

12 among other persons 

13 and derives all or a portion of such person’s 

14 gross receipts from streams of income or ex15 pense, discounts, or other financial flows associ16 ated with the matter with respect to which such 

17 person is acting as an intermediary. 

18 ‘‘(2) LENDING SERVICES.—‘Lending services’ 

19 means the regular making of loans and providing 

20 credit to, or taking deposits from customers, but 

21 does not include an installment or delayed payment 

22 arrangement provided by a seller of property or serv23 ices under which additional charges or fees are im24 posed by the seller for the late payment. 
334 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(3) MARKET-MAKING OR DEALER SERVICES.— 

2 ‘Market-making or dealer services’ means services 

3 provided by a person who— 

4 ‘‘(A) regularly purchases financial instru5 ments from or sells financial instruments to 

6 customers in the ordinary course of a trade or 

7 business, 

8 ‘‘(B) regularly offers to enter into, assume, 

9 offset, assign, or otherwise terminate positions 

10 in financial instruments with customers in the 

11 ordinary course of a trade or business. 

12 ‘‘SEC. 242. GENERAL RULE FOR TAXATION. 

13 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—In the case of a financial inter14 mediation business, gross profits shall be computed by— 

15 ‘‘(1) substituting financial receipts for taxable 

16 receipts, and 

17 ‘‘(2) including financial expenses as business 

18 purchases. 

19 ‘‘(b) DEFINITIONS.— 

20 ‘‘(1) FINANCIAL RECEIPTS.—‘Financial re21 ceipts’ means all receipts other than amounts re22 ceived as contributions to capital. 

23 ‘‘(2) FINANCIAL EXPENSES.—‘Financial ex24 penses’ include— 
335 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(A) payments for principal and interest 

2 that is properly allocable to the provision of fi3 nancial intermediation services, 

4 ‘‘(B) the cost of and payments under fi5 nancial instruments (other than financial in6 struments in the person subject to the tax im7 posed under this chapter and any person re8 lated to such person), 

9 ‘‘(C) claims and cash surrender values paid 

10 in connection with insurance or reinsurance 

11 services, and 

12 ‘‘(D) amounts paid for reinsurance. 

13 ‘‘(3) FINANCIAL INSTRUMENT.—‘Financial in14 strument’ means any— 

15 ‘‘(A) share of stock in a corporation, 

16 ‘‘(B) equity ownership in any widely held 

17 or publicly traded partnership, trust, or other 

18 business entity, 

19 ‘‘(C) note, bond, debenture, or other evi20 dence of indebtedness, 

21 ‘‘(D) interest rate, currency, or equity no22 tional principal contract, 

23 ‘‘(E) evidence or interest in, or a derivative 

24 financial instrument in, any financial instru25 ment described in subparagraph (A), (B), (C), 
336 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 or (D), or any currency, including any option, 

2 forward contract, short position, and any simi3 lar financial instrument in such a financial in4 strument or currency, and 

5 ‘‘(F) a position which— 

6 ‘‘(i) is not a financial instrument de7 scribed in subparagraph (A), (B), (C), (D) 

8 or (E), 

9 ‘‘(ii) is a hedge with respect to such 

10 a financial instrument, and 

11 ‘‘(iii) is clearly identified in the deal12 er’s records as being described in this sub13 paragraph before the close of the day on 

14 which it was acquired or entered into. 

15 ‘‘(c) INTERNATIONAL MATTERS.—For purposes of 

16 this section in the case of a financial intermediation busi17 ness with activity in and outside the United States— 

18 ‘‘(1) INCLUSION REGARDLESS OF SOURCE.— 

19 ‘‘(A) Financial receipts shall be determined 

20 without regard to whether they are received for 

21 property or service provided in or outside the 

22 United States, except that financial receipts do 

23 not include amounts that— 

24 ‘‘(i) are not taxable receipts (as deter25 mined without regard to this section), but 
337 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(ii) would have been taxable receipts 

2 (as determined without regard to this sec3 tion) if they had been received for services 

4 or property in the United States. 

5 ‘‘(B) Financial expenses shall be deter6 mined without regard to whether they are re7 ceived for property or services acquired in or 

8 outside the United States. 

9 ‘‘(2) ALLOCATION.—Under regulations pre10 scribed by the Secretary, gross profits (as deter11 mined without regard to this paragraph) shall be re12 duced by the amount of financial intermediation 

13 gross profit attributable to financial intermediation 

14 activity provided outside the United States. 

15 ‘‘(3) GROSS PROFIT ATTRIBUTABLE TO FINAN16 CIAL INTERMEDIATION ACTIVITY.—‘Gross profits at17 tributable to financial intermediation activity’ means 

18 the excess of— 

19 ‘‘(A) gross profits as determined under 

20 this section (but without regard to paragraph 

21 (2)), over 

22 ‘‘(B) gross profits as determined without 

23 regard to this subchapter. 
338 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘SEC. 243. SPECIAL RULES FOR BANKS. 

2 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—In the case of a bank, gross prof3 its shall be determined in accordance with section 242, ex4 cept that— 

5 ‘‘(1) FINANCIAL RECEIPTS.—Financial receipts 

6 shall include only— 

7 ‘‘(A) taxable receipts (as determined with8 out regard to this subchapter), 

9 ‘‘(B) interest on loans made or acquired by 

10 the bank, 

11 ‘‘(C) gain on the sale of loans, 

12 ‘‘(D) discount points received, and 

13 ‘‘(E) any explicit fees for financial or fidu14 ciary services not included in subparagraphs 

15 (A) through (E). 

16 ‘‘(2) FINANCIAL EXPENSES.—Financial ex17 penses shall include only— 

18 ‘‘(A) interest paid to depositors and on 

19 other funds borrowed by the bank, and 

20 ‘‘(B) reasonable additions to reserves for 

21 bad debts. 

22 ‘‘(3) FORECLOSURE PROPERTY.—Gross profits 

23 shall properly take into account proceeds from the 

24 operation or sale of foreclosure property. 

25 ‘‘(b) BANK.— 
339 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—‘Bank’ means a bank or 

2 trust company incorporated and doing business 

3 under the laws of the United States, the District of 

4 Columbia, or any State, a substantial part of the 

5 business of which consists of receiving deposits and 

6 making loans and discounts, or of exercising fidu7 ciary powers similar to those exercised by national 

8 banks under the authority of the Comptroller of the 

9 Currency, and which is subject by law to supervision 

10 and examination by State or Federal authority hav11 ing supervision over banking institutions or credit 

12 unions. Such term includes domestic building and 

13 loan associations and credit unions. 

14 ‘‘(2) OTHER ACTIVITIES.—If a bank is engaged 

15 in significant amounts of activities other than those 

16 described in paragraph (1), the bank shall be consid17 ered as a separate business entity with respect to 

18 such other activity. 

19 ‘‘SEC. 244. INSURANCE COMPANIES. 

20 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—In the case of companies pro21 viding insurance services, gross profits shall be determined 

22 in accordance with section 242, except— 

23 ‘‘(1) subsection (c) of section 242 (relating to 

24 international operations) shall not apply, and 
340 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) the rules of subchapter J (sourcing rules) 

2 shall apply to determine financial receipts and finan3 cial expenses. 

4 ‘‘(b) RESULT INCONSISTENT WITH STATUTORY IN5 TENT.—If an insurance company determines that the ap6 plication of subsection (a) produces results inconsistent 

7 with the territorial approach of the business tax, it may 

8 apply to the Secretary for permission to apply section 

9 242(c) in lieu of subsection (a). 

10 ‘‘SEC. 245. FINANCIAL PASS-THROUGH ENTITIES. 

11 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—In the case of a financial pass12 thru entity, gross profits shall be determined in accord13 ance with section 242, except— 

14 ‘‘(1) financial receipts shall include contribu15 tions to capital, 

16 ‘‘(2) financial expenses shall include— 

17 ‘‘(A) distributions to persons holding inter18 ests in the pass-thru entity, 

19 ‘‘(B) investments in related entities (in20 cluding wholly owned entities) engaging in real 

21 estate investment. 

22 ‘‘(b) PASS-THRU ENTITY.— 

23 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—‘Pass-thru entity’ means a 

24 business entity that is intended to serve as a con-
341 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 duit. The Secretary shall prescribe regulations defin2 ing pass-thru entity. Such term shall include— 

3 ‘‘(A) entities that would qualify as regu4 lated investment companies under the Internal 

5 Revenue Code of 1986, 

6 ‘‘(B) entities that would qualify as real es7 tate investment trusts under the Internal Rev8 enue Code of 1986, 

9 ‘‘(C) entities that would qualify as 

10 REMICs under the Internal Revenue Code of 

11 1986, and 

12 ‘‘(D) partnerships whose purposes are to 

13 invest the funds of the partners in financial in14 struments, distribute or reinvest the income 

15 from such investments, and distribute or rein16 vest the proceeds from the sale of such instru17 ments. 

18 ‘‘(2) ENGAGEMENT IN BUSINESS ACTIVITY.— 

19 An entity will not qualify as a pass-thru entity if it 

20 engages in more than an insubstantial amount of 

21 rental or other business activity (other than invest22 ing in and selling financial instruments). The pre23 ceding sentence will not apply if the business entity 

24 treats the business activity as engaged in by a sepa-
342 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 rate business entity (separately subject to tax under 

2 this chapter). 

3 ‘‘SEC. 246. FINANCIAL INTERMEDIATION BY OTHER BUSI4 NESSES. 

5 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—If a business entity that is not 

6 regularly in the business of providing financial intermedi7 ation services to unrelated parties engages in significant 

8 financial intermediation activity, its gross profits shall be 

9 increased by its gross profits from financial intermediation 

10 activity (determined as if such activity were activity of a 

11 pass-thru entity that paid all costs of such financial inter12 mediation activity including— 

13 ‘‘(1) compensation for persons engaging in such 

14 activity, 

15 ‘‘(2) equipment involved in such activity, and 

16 ‘‘(3) office space for persons involved in such 

17 activity). 

18 ‘‘(b) PROXY.—A business entity to which subsection 

19 (a) applies will be treated as satisfying the requirements 

20 of that subsection if it increases its gross receipts by the 

21 portion of employee compensation properly allocable to the 

22 provision of financial intermediation services. 

23 ‘‘(c) SIGNIFICANT FINANCIAL INTERMEDIATION.—A 

24 business will be considered as engaging in substantial fi25 nancial intermediation if— 
343 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(1) more than 5 percent of the compensation 

2 paid by the business to its employees is for employ3 ees whose primary activity is the management of the 

4 business’s investments in financial instruments, or 

5 ‘‘(2) at all times during the taxable year and 

6 the immediately preceding full taxable year, more 

7 than 10 percent of its assets are financial instru8 ments other than— 

9 ‘‘(A) equity interests in business entities in 

10 which it holds more than 50 percent in value of 

11 the outstanding equity, 

12 ‘‘(B) equity interests in joint ventures in 

13 which the company is actively participating, 

14 ‘‘(C) purchase money loans to its cus15 tomers, and 

16 ‘‘(D) business loans and equity invest17 ments that serve a direct business purpose. 

18 ‘‘Subchapter H—Tax-exempt Organizations 

‘‘Sec. 251. Exemption for governmental entities. 

‘‘Sec. 252. Taxable activity of governmental entities. 

‘‘Sec. 253. Tax-exempt organizations. 

‘‘Sec. 254. Special rules for (c)(3) organizations. 

‘‘Sec. 255. Tax on unrelated business activity. 

‘‘Sec. 256. Unrelated business activity. 

19 ‘‘SEC. 251. EXEMPTION FOR GOVERNMENTAL ENTITIES. 

20 ‘‘(a) STATES.—Except as provided in section 252, a 

21 state, political subdivision thereof and the District of Co22 lumbia shall be exempt from taxation under this chapter 
344 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 on any gross profits derived from the exercise of any es2 sential governmental function. 

3 ‘‘(b) POSSESSIONS.—The government of any posses4 sion of the United States shall be exempt from taxation 

5 under this chapter on any gross profits earned by the pos6 session. 

7 ‘‘SEC. 252. TAXABLE ACTIVITY OF GOVERNMENTAL ENTI8 TIES. 

9 ‘‘(a) CERTAIN ACTIVITIES TAXABLE.—A govern10 mental entity shall be considered a business and subject 

11 to tax on any business activity of a type frequently pro12 vided by business entities subject to tax under this chap13 ter. 

14 ‘‘(b) CERTAIN ACTIVITIES TREATED AS ESSENTIAL

15 GOVERNMENT FUNCTIONS.—Subsection (a) shall not 

16 apply to the following activities, which shall be treated as 

17 essential government functions: 

18 ‘‘(1) Provision of mass transportation services. 

19 ‘‘(2) Provision of public utility services. 

20 ‘‘SEC. 253. TAX-EXEMPT ORGANIZATIONS. 

21 ‘‘(a) EXEMPTION FROM TAXATION.—An organiza22 tion described in subsection (c) or (d) shall be exempt 

23 from taxation under this chapter. 

24 ‘‘(b) TAX ON UNRELATED BUSINESS ACTIVITY.—An 

25 organization exempt from taxation under subsection (a) 
345 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 shall be subject to tax to the extent provided in sections 

2 255 and 256, but shall be considered a tax-exempt organi3 zation for purposes of any law that refers to tax-exempt 

4 organizations. 

5 ‘‘(c) LIST OF EXEMPT ORGANIZATIONS.—The fol6 lowing organizations are referred to in subsection (a): 

7 ‘‘(1) INSTRUMENTALITY OF THE UNITED

8 STATES.—Any corporation organized under Act of 

9 Congress which is an instrumentality of the United 

10 States but only if such corporation— 

11 ‘‘(A) is exempt from Federal income 

12 taxes— 

13 ‘‘(i) under such Act as amended and 

14 supplemented before July 18, 1984, or 

15 ‘‘(ii) under this title without regard to 

16 any provision of law which is not contained 

17 in this title and which is not contained in 

18 a revenue Act, or 

19 ‘‘(B) is described in subsection (h). 

20 ‘‘(2) TITLE HOLDING COMPANIES.—Corpora21 tions organized for the exclusive purpose of holding 

22 title to property, collecting income therefrom, and 

23 turning over the entire amount thereof, less ex24 penses, to an organization which itself is exempt 

25 under this section. Rules similar to the rules of sub-
346 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 paragraph (G) of paragraph (25) shall apply for 

2 purposes of this paragraph. 

3 ‘‘(3) CHARITABLE, EDUCATIONAL AND RELI4 GIOUS ORGANIZATIONS.—Corporations, and any 

5 community chest, fund, or foundation, organized and 

6 operated exclusively for religious, charitable, sci7 entific, testing for public safety, literary, or edu8 cational purposes, or to foster national or inter9 national amateur sports competition (but only if no 

10 part of its activities involve the provision of athletic 

11 facilities or equipment), or for the prevention of cru12 elty to children or animals, no part of the net earn13 ings of which inures to the benefit of any private 

14 shareholder or individual, no substantial part of the 

15 activities of which is carrying on propaganda, or oth16 erwise attempting, to influence legislation (except as 

17 otherwise provided in subsection (g)), and which 

18 does not participate in, or intervene in (including the 

19 publishing or distributing of statements), any polit20 ical campaign on behalf of (or in opposition to) any 

21 candidate for public office. 

22 ‘‘(4) SOCIAL WELFARE ORGANIZATIONS, ETC.— 

23 ‘‘(A) Civic leagues or organizations not or24 ganized for profit but operated exclusively for 

25 the promotion of social welfare, or local associa-
347 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 tions of employees, the membership of which is 

2 limited to the employees of a designated person 

3 or persons in a particular municipality, and the 

4 net earnings of which are devoted exclusively to 

5 charitable, educational, or recreational pur6 poses. 

7 ‘‘(B) Subparagraph (A) shall not apply to 

8 an entity unless no part of the net earnings of 

9 such entity inures to the benefit of any private 

10 shareholder or individual. 

11 ‘‘(5) LABOR AND AGRICULTURAL ORGANIZA12 TIONS.—Labor, agricultural, or horticultural organi13 zations. 

14 ‘‘(6) TRADE ASSOCIATIONS.—Business leagues, 

15 chambers of commerce, real-estate boards, boards of 

16 trade, or professional football leagues (whether or 

17 not administering a pension fund for football play18 ers) not organized for profit and no part of the net 

19 earnings of which inures to the benefit of any pri20 vate shareholder or individual. 

21 ‘‘(7) SOCIAL CLUBS.—Clubs organized for 

22 pleasure, recreation, and other nonprofitable pur23 poses, substantially all of the activities of which are 

24 for such purposes and no part of the net earnings 
348 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 of which inures to the benefit of any private share2 holder. 

3 ‘‘(8) CERTAIN FRATERNAL SOCIETIES.—Fra4 ternal beneficiary societies, orders, or associations— 

5 ‘‘(A) operating under the lodge system or 

6 for the exclusive benefit of the members of a 

7 fraternity itself operating under the lodge sys8 tem, and 

9 ‘‘(B) providing for the payment of life, 

10 sick, accident, or other benefits to the members 

11 of such society, order, or association or their 

12 dependents. 

13 ‘‘(9) VEBA’S.—Voluntary employees’ beneficiary 

14 associations providing for the payment of life, sick, 

15 accident, or other benefits to the members of such 

16 association or their dependents or designated bene17 ficiaries, if no part of the net earnings of such asso18 ciation inures (other than through such payments) 

19 to the benefit of any private shareholder or indi20 vidual. 

21 ‘‘(10) OTHER FRATERNAL ORGANIZATIONS.— 

22 Domestic fraternal societies, orders, or associations, 

23 operating under the lodge system— 
349 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(A) the net earnings of which are devoted 

2 exclusively to religious, charitable, scientific, lit3 erary, educational, and fraternal purposes, and 

4 ‘‘(B) which do not provide for the payment 

5 of life, sick, accident, or other benefits. 

6 ‘‘(11) LOCAL TEACHERS’ RETIREMENT

7 FUNDS.—Teachers’ retirement fund associations of a 

8 purely local character, if— 

9 ‘‘(A) no part of their net earnings inures 

10 (other than through payment of retirement ben11 efits) to the benefit of any private shareholder 

12 or individual, and 

13 ‘‘(B) the income consists solely of amounts 

14 received from public taxation, amounts received 

15 from assessments on the teaching salaries of 

16 members, and income in respect of investments. 

17 ‘‘(12) CERTAIN COOPERATIVES.— 

18 ‘‘(A) Benevolent life insurance associations 

19 of a purely local character, mutual ditch or irri20 gation companies, mutual or cooperative tele21 phone companies, or like organizations; but only 

22 if 85 percent or more of the income consists of 

23 amounts collected from members for the sole 

24 purpose of meeting losses and expenses. 
350 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) In the case of a mutual or coopera2 tive telephone company, subparagraph (A) shall 

3 be applied without taking into account any in4 come received or accrued— 

5 ‘‘(i) from a nonmember telephone 

6 company for the performance of commu7 nication services which involve members of 

8 the mutual or cooperative telephone com9 pany, 

10 ‘‘(ii) from qualified pole rentals, 

11 ‘‘(iii) from the sale of display listings 

12 in a directory furnished to the members of 

13 the mutual or cooperative telephone com14 pany, or 

15 ‘‘(iv) from the prepayment of a loan 

16 under section 306A, 306B, or 311 of the 

17 Rural Electrification Act of 1936 (as in ef18 fect on January 1, 1987). 

19 ‘‘(C) In the case of a mutual or cooperative 

20 electric company, subparagraph (A) shall be ap21 plied without taking into account any income 

22 received or accrued— 

23 ‘‘(i) from qualified pole rentals, or 

24 ‘‘(ii) from the prepayment of a loan 

25 under section 306A, 306B, or 311 of the 
351 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 Rural Electrification Act of 1936 (as in ef2 fect on January 1, 1987). 

3 ‘‘(D) For purposes of this paragraph, the 

4 term ‘qualified pole rental’ means any rental of 

5 a pole (or other structure used to support 

6 wires) if such pole (or other structure)— 

7 ‘‘(i) is used by the telephone or elec8 tric company to support one or more wires 

9 which are used by such company in pro10 viding telephone or electric services to its 

11 members, and 

12 ‘‘(ii) is used pursuant to the rental to 

13 support one or more wires (in addition to 

14 the wires described in clause (i)) for use in 

15 connection with the transmission by wire 

16 of electricity or of telephone or other com17 munications. 

18 For purposes of the preceding sentence, the 

19 term ‘rental’ includes any sale of the right to 

20 use the pole (or other structure). 

21 ‘‘(13) NONPROFIT CEMETERIES.—Cemetery 

22 companies owned and operated exclusively for the 

23 benefit of their members or which are not operated 

24 for profit; and any corporation chartered solely for 

25 the purpose of the disposal of bodies by burial or 
352 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 cremation which is not permitted by its charter to 

2 engage in any business not necessarily incident to 

3 that purpose and no part of the net earnings of 

4 which inures to the benefit of any private share5 holder or individual. 

6 ‘‘(14) GRANDFATHERED MUTUAL FINANCIAL

7 INSTITUTIONS.— 

8 ‘‘(A) Credit unions without capital stock 

9 organized and operated for mutual purposes 

10 and without profit, but only if organized before 

11 July 1, 2006. 

12 ‘‘(B) Certain corporations or associations 

13 organized before September 1, 1957, and de14 scribed in subparagraphs (B) or (C) of section 

15 501(c)(14) of the Internal Revenue Code of 

16 1986. 

17 ‘‘(15) GRANDFATHERED SMALL INSURANCE

18 COMPANIES.—Insurance companies organized before 

19 July 1, 2006, and described in section 501(c)(15) of 

20 the Internal Revenue Code of 1986. 

21 ‘‘(16) CROP FINANCING ASSOCIATIONS.—Cor22 porations organized by an association subject to part 

23 IV of this subchapter or members thereof, for the 

24 purpose of financing the ordinary crop operations of 

25 such members or other producers, and operated in 
353 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 conjunction with such association. Exemption shall 

2 not be denied any such corporation because it has 

3 capital stock, if the dividend rate of such stock is 

4 fixed at not to exceed the legal rate of interest in the 

5 State of incorporation or 8 percent per annum, 

6 whichever is greater, on the value of the consider7 ation for which the stock was issued, and if substan8 tially all such stock (other than nonvoting preferred 

9 stock, the owners of which are not entitled or per10 mitted to participate, directly or indirectly, in the 

11 profits of the corporation, on dissolution or other12 wise, beyond the fixed dividends) is owned by such 

13 association, or members thereof; nor shall exemption 

14 be denied any such corporation because there is ac15 cumulated and maintained by it a reserve required 

16 by State law or a reasonable reserve for any nec17 essary purpose. 

18 ‘‘(17) SUPPLEMENTAL EMPLOYMENT BENEFIT

19 TRUST.— 

20 ‘‘(A) A trust or trusts forming part of a 

21 plan providing for the payment of supplemental 

22 unemployment compensation benefits, if— 

23 ‘‘(i) under the plan, it is impossible, 

24 at any time prior to the satisfaction of all 

25 liabilities, with respect to employees under 
354 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the plan, for any part of the corpus or in2 come to be (within the taxable year or 

3 thereafter) used for, or diverted to, any 

4 purpose other than the providing of supple5 mental unemployment compensation bene6 fits, 

7 ‘‘(ii) such benefits are payable to em8 ployees under a classification which is set 

9 forth in the plan and which is found by the 

10 Secretary not to be discriminatory in favor 

11 of employees who are highly compensated 

12 employees (within the meaning of section 

13 414(q)), and 

14 ‘‘(iii) such benefits do not discrimi15 nate in favor of employees who are highly 

16 compensated employees (within the mean17 ing of section 414(q). A plan shall not be 

18 considered discriminatory within the mean19 ing of this clause merely because the bene20 fits received under the plan bear a uniform 

21 relationship to the total compensation, or 

22 the basic or regular rate of compensation, 

23 of the employees covered by the plan. 

24 ‘‘(B) Rules similar to those contained in 

25 subparagraphs (B) through (E) of section 
355 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 501(c)(7) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 

2 shall apply to subparagraph (A). 

3 ‘‘(18) GRANDFATHERED TRUSTS.—A trust or 

4 trusts created before June 25, 1959, and described 

5 in section 501(c)(18) of the Internal Revenue Code 

6 of 1986. 

7 ‘‘(19) CERTAIN VETERANS’ ORGANIZATIONS.— 

8 A post or organization of past or present members 

9 of the Armed Forces of the United States, or an 

10 auxiliary unit or society of, or a trust or foundation 

11 for, any such post or organization— 

12 ‘‘(A) organized in the United States or any 

13 of its possessions, 

14 ‘‘(B) at least 75 percent of the members of 

15 which are past or present members of the 

16 Armed Forces of the United States and sub17 stantially all of the other members of which are 

18 individuals who are cadets or are spouses, wid19 ows, or widowers of past or present members of 

20 the Armed Forces of the United States or of 

21 cadets, and 

22 ‘‘(C) no part of the net earnings of which 

23 inures to the benefit of any private shareholder 

24 or individual. 
356 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(20) LEGAL SERVICE PLAN TRUSTS.—An or2 ganization or trust created or organized in the 

3 United States, the exclusive function of which is to 

4 form part of a qualified group legal services plan or 

5 plans. 

6 ‘‘(21) BLACK LUNG ACT TRUSTS.—A trust or 

7 trusts established in writing, created or organized in 

8 the United States, and contributed to by any person 

9 (except an insurance company) if— 

10 ‘‘(A) the purpose of such trust or trusts is 

11 exclusively— 

12 ‘‘(i) to satisfy, in whole or in part, the 

13 liability of such person for, or with respect 

14 to, claims for compensation for disability 

15 or death due to pneumoconiosis under 

16 Black Lung Acts, 

17 ‘‘(ii) to pay premiums for insurance 

18 exclusively covering such liability, 

19 ‘‘(iii) to pay administrative and other 

20 incidental expenses of such trust in connec21 tion with the operation of the trust and the 

22 processing of claims against such person 

23 under Black Lung Acts, and 

24 ‘‘(iv) to pay accident or health bene25 fits for retired miners and their spouses 
357 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 and dependents (including administrative 

2 and other incidental expenses of such trust 

3 in connection therewith) or premiums for 

4 insurance exclusively covering such bene5 fits; and 

6 ‘‘(B) such trusts meets requirements simi7 lar to those contained in section 501(c)(21) of 

8 the Internal Revenue Code of 1986. 

9 ‘‘(22) MULTIEMPLOYER ERISA TRUST.—A trust 

10 created or organized in the United States and estab11 lished in writing by the plan sponsors of multiem12 ployer plans if— 

13 ‘‘(A) the purpose of such trust is exclu14 sively— 

15 ‘‘(i) to pay any amount described in 

16 section 4223(c) or (h) of the Employee Re17 tirement Income Security Act of 1974, and 

18 ‘‘(ii) to pay reasonable and necessary 

19 administrative expenses in connection with 

20 the establishment and operation of the 

21 trust and the processing of claims against 

22 the trust, 

23 ‘‘(B) no part of the assets of the trust may 

24 be used for, or diverted to, any purpose other 

25 than— 
358 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(i) the purposes described in sub2 paragraph (A), or 

3 ‘‘(ii) prudent investment in securities, 

4 obligations, or time or demand deposits, 

5 ‘‘(C) such trust meets the requirements of 

6 paragraphs (2), (3), and (4) of section 4223(b), 

7 4223(h), or, if applicable, section 4223(c) of the 

8 Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 

9 1974, and 

10 ‘‘(D) the trust instrument provides that, 

11 on dissolution of the trust, assets of the trust 

12 may not be paid other than to plans which have 

13 participated in the plan or, in the case of a 

14 trust established under section 4223(h) of such 

15 Act, to plans with respect to which employers 

16 have participated in the fund. 

17 ‘‘(23) GRANDFATHERED VETERANS’ INSURANCE

18 ORGANIZATION.—Any association organized before 

19 1880 more than 75 percent of the members of which 

20 are present or past members of the Armed Forces 

21 and a principal purpose of which is to provide insur22 ance and other benefits to veterans or their depend23 ents. 

24 ‘‘(24) ERISA TRUST.—A trust described in sec25 tion 4049 of the Employee Retirement Income Secu-
359 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 rity Act of 1974 (as in effect on the date of the en2 actment of the Single-Employer Pension Plan 

3 Amendments Act of 1986). 

4 ‘‘(25) REAL TITLE HOLDING CORPORATION OR

5 TRUST.— 

6 ‘‘(A) Any corporation or trust which— 

7 ‘‘(i) has no more than 35 shareholders 

8 or beneficiaries, 

9 ‘‘(ii) has only 1 class of stock or bene10 ficial interest, and 

11 ‘‘(iii) is organized for the exclusive 

12 purposes of— 

13 ‘‘(I) acquiring real property and 

14 holding title to, and collecting income 

15 from, such property, and 

16 ‘‘(II) remitting the entire amount 

17 of income from such property (less ex18 penses) to 1 or more organizations de19 scribed in subparagraph (C) which are 

20 shareholders of such corporation or 

21 beneficiaries of such trust. 

22 For purposes of clause (iii), the term ‘real prop23 erty’ shall not include any interest as a tenant 

24 in common (or similar interest) and shall not 

25 include any indirect interest. 
360 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) A corporation or trust shall be de2 scribed in subparagraph (A) without regard to 

3 whether the corporation or trust is organized by 

4 1 or more organizations described in subpara5 graph (C). 

6 ‘‘(C) An organization is described in this 

7 subparagraph if such organization is— 

8 ‘‘(i) a qualified pension, profit shar9 ing, or stock bonus plan that meets the re10 quirements of section 401(a), 

11 ‘‘(ii) a governmental plan (within the 

12 meaning of section 414(d)), 

13 ‘‘(iii) the United States, any State or 

14 political subdivision thereof, or any agency 

15 or instrumentality of any of the foregoing, 

16 or 

17 ‘‘(iv) any organization described in 

18 paragraph (3). 

19 ‘‘(D) A corporation or trust shall in no 

20 event be treated as described in subparagraph 

21 (A) unless such corporation or trust permits its 

22 shareholders or beneficiaries— 

23 ‘‘(i) to dismiss the corporation’s or 

24 trust’s investment adviser, following rea25 sonable notice, upon a vote of the share-
361 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 holders or beneficiaries holding a majority 

2 of interest in the corporation or trust, and 

3 ‘‘(ii) to terminate their interest in the 

4 corporation or trust by either, or both, of 

5 the following alternatives, as determined by 

6 the corporation or trust: 

7 ‘‘(I) by selling or exchanging 

8 their stock in the corporation or inter9 est in the trust (subject to any Fed10 eral or State securities law) to any or11 ganization described in subparagraph 

12 (C) so long as the sale or exchange 

13 does not increase the number of 

14 shareholders or beneficiaries in such 

15 corporation or trust above 35, or 

16 ‘‘(II) by having their stock or in17 terest redeemed by the corporation or 

18 trust after the shareholder or bene19 ficiary has provided 90 days notice to 

20 such corporation or trust. 

21 ‘‘(E)(i) For purposes of this paragraph— 

22 ‘‘(I) a corporation which is a qualified 

23 subsidiary shall not be treated as a sepa24 rate corporation, and 
362 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(II) all assets, liabilities, and items 

2 of income, deduction, and credit of a quali3 fied subsidiary shall be treated as assets, 

4 liabilities, and such items (as the case may 

5 be) of the corporation or trust described in 

6 subparagraph (A). 

7 ‘‘(ii) For purposes of this subparagraph, 

8 the term ‘qualified subsidiary’ means any cor9 poration if, at all times during the period such 

10 corporation was in existence, 100 percent of the 

11 stock of such corporation is held by the cor12 poration or trust described in subparagraph 

13 (A). 

14 ‘‘(iii) For purposes of this subtitle, if any 

15 corporation which was a qualified subsidiary 

16 ceases to meet the requirements of clause (ii), 

17 such corporation shall be treated as a new cor18 poration acquiring all of its assets (and assum19 ing all of its liabilities) immediately before such 

20 cessation from the corporation or trust de21 scribed in subparagraph (A) in exchange for its 

22 stock. 

23 ‘‘(F) For purposes of subparagraph (A), 

24 the term ‘real property’ includes any personal 

25 property which is leased under, or in connection 
363 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 with, a lease of real property, but only if the 

2 rent attributable to such personal property for 

3 the taxable year does not exceed 15 percent of 

4 the total rent for the taxable year attributable 

5 to both the real and personal property leased 

6 under, or in connection with, such lease. 

7 ‘‘(G)(i) An organization shall not be treat8 ed as failing to be described in this paragraph 

9 merely by reason of the receipt of any otherwise 

10 disqualifying income which is incidentally de11 rived from the holding of real property. 

12 ‘‘(ii) Clause (i) shall not apply if the 

13 amount of gross income described in such 

14 clause exceeds 10 percent of the organization’s 

15 gross income for the taxable year unless the or16 ganization establishes to the satisfaction of the 

17 Secretary that the receipt of gross income de18 scribed in clause (i) in excess of such limitation 

19 was inadvertent and reasonable steps are being 

20 taken to correct the circumstances giving rise to 

21 such income. 

22 ‘‘(26) STATE ESTABLISHED MEDICAL CARE IN23 SURER.—Any membership organization if— 

24 ‘‘(A) such organization is established by a 

25 State exclusively to provide coverage for medical 
364 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 care on a not-for-profit basis to individuals de2 scribed in subparagraph (B) through— 

3 ‘‘(i) insurance issued by the organiza4 tion, or 

5 ‘‘(ii) a health maintenance organiza6 tion under an arrangement with the orga7 nization, 

8 ‘‘(B) the only individuals receiving such 

9 coverage through the organization are individ10 uals— 

11 ‘‘(i) who are residents of such State, 

12 and 

13 ‘‘(ii) who, by reason of the existence 

14 or history of a medical condition— 

15 ‘‘(I) are unable to acquire med16 ical care coverage for such condition 

17 through insurance or from a health 

18 maintenance organization, or 

19 ‘‘(II) are able to acquire such 

20 coverage only at a rate which is sub21 stantially in excess of the rate for 

22 such coverage through the member23 ship organization, 
365 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(C) the composition of the membership in 

2 such organization is specified by such State, 

3 and 

4 ‘‘(D) no part of the net earnings of the or5 ganization inures to the benefit of any private 

6 shareholder or individual. A spouse and any 

7 qualifying child) of an individual described in 

8 subparagraph (B) (without regard to this sen9 tence) shall be treated as described in subpara10 graph (B). 

11 ‘‘(27) GRANDFATHERED WORKERS COMPENSA12 TION ORGANIZATION.—Any membership organiza13 tion established before June 1, 1996, by a State ex14 clusively to reimburse its members for losses arising 

15 under workmen’s compensation acts, and described 

16 in section 501(c)(27) of the Internal Revenue Code 

17 of 1986. 

18 ‘‘(d) RELIGIOUS AND APOSTOLIC ORGANIZATIONS.— 

19 The following organizations are referred to in subsection 

20 (a): Religious or apostolic associations or corporations, if 

21 such associations or corporations have a common treasury 

22 or community treasury, even if such associations or cor23 porations engage in business for the common benefit of 

24 the members, but only if such activity is treated as unre25 lated business activity. 
366 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(e) COOPERATIVE HOSPITAL SERVICE ORGANIZA2 TIONS.—For purposes of this chapter, an organization 

3 shall be treated as an organization organized and operated 

4 exclusively for charitable purposes, if— 

5 ‘‘(1) such organization is organized and oper6 ated solely— 

7 ‘‘(A) to perform, on a centralized basis, 

8 one or more of the following services which, if 

9 performed on its own behalf by a hospital which 

10 is an organization described in subsection (c)(3) 

11 and exempt from taxation under subsection (a), 

12 would constitute activities in exercising or per13 forming the purpose or function constituting 

14 the basis for its exemption: data processing, 

15 purchasing (including the purchasing of insur16 ance on a group basis), warehousing, billing 

17 and collection, food, clinical, industrial engi18 neering, laboratory, printing, communications, 

19 record center, and personnel (including selec20 tion, testing, training, and education of per21 sonnel) services; and 

22 ‘‘(B) to perform such services solely for 

23 two or more hospitals each of which is— 
367 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(i) an organization described in sub2 section (c)(3) which is exempt from tax3 ation under subsection (a), 

4 ‘‘(ii) a constituent part of an organi5 zation described in subsection (c)(3) which 

6 is exempt from taxation under subsection 

7 (a) and which, if organized and operated 

8 as a separate entity, would constitute an 

9 organization described in subsection (c)(3), 

10 or 

11 ‘‘(iii) owned and operated by the 

12 United States, a State, the District of Co13 lumbia, or a possession of the United 

14 States, or a political subdivision or an 

15 agency or instrumentality of any of the 

16 foregoing; 

17 ‘‘(2) such organization is organized and oper18 ated on a cooperative basis and allocates or pays, 

within 81 19 ⁄2 months after the close of its taxable year, 

20 all net earnings to patrons on the basis of services 

21 performed for them; and 

22 ‘‘(3) if such organization has capital stock, all 

23 of such stock outstanding is owned by its patrons. 

24 For purposes of this title, any organization which, by rea25 son of the preceding sentence, is an organization described 
368 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 in subsection (c)(3) and exempt from taxation under sub2 section (a), shall be treated as a hospital and as an organi3 zation referred to in section 101(b)(1)(A)(iii). 

4 ‘‘(f) COOPERATIVE SERVICE ORGANIZATIONS OF OP5 ERATING EDUCATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS.—For purposes 

6 of this chapter, if an organization is— 

7 ‘‘(1) organized and operated solely to hold, 

8 commingle, and collectively invest and reinvest (in9 cluding arranging for and supervising the perform10 ance by independent contractors of investment serv11 ices related thereto) in stocks and securities, the 

12 moneys contributed thereto by each of the members 

13 of such organization, and to collect income there14 from and turn over the entire amount thereof, less 

15 expenses, to such members, 

16 ‘‘(2) organized and controlled by one or more 

17 such members, and 

18 ‘‘(3) comprised solely of members that are orga19 nizations described in clause (ii) or (iv) of section 

20 101(b)(1)(A)— 

21 ‘‘(A) which are exempt from taxation 

22 under subsection (a), or 

23 ‘‘(B) the gross profits of which are ex24 cluded from taxation under section 251(a), then 

25 such organization shall be treated as an organi-
369 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 zation organized and operated exclusively for 

2 charitable purposes. 

3 ‘‘(g) EXPENDITURES BY PUBLIC CHARITIES TO IN4 FLUENCE LEGISLATION.— 

5 ‘‘(1) GENERAL RULE.—In the case of an orga6 nization to which this subsection applies, exemption 

7 from taxation under subsection (a) shall be denied 

8 because a substantial part of the activities of such 

9 organization consists of carrying on propaganda, or 

10 otherwise attempting, to influence legislation, but 

11 only if such organization normally— 

12 ‘‘(A) makes lobbying expenditures in ex13 cess of the lobbying ceiling amount for such or14 ganization for each taxable year, or 

15 ‘‘(B) makes grass roots expenditures in ex16 cess of the grass roots ceiling amount for such 

17 organization for each taxable year. 

18 ‘‘(2) DEFINITIONS.—For purposes of this sub19 section— 

20 ‘‘(A) LOBBYING EXPENDITURES.—‘Lob21 bying expenditures’ means expenditures for the 

22 purpose of influencing legislation (as defined in 

23 section 4911(d)). 

24 ‘‘(B) LOBBYING CEILING AMOUNT.—The 

25 lobbying ceiling amount for any organization 
370 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 for any taxable year is 150 percent of the lob2 bying nontaxable amount for such organization 

3 for such taxable year, determined under section 

4 4911. 

5 ‘‘(C) GRASS ROOTS EXPENDITURES.— 

6 ‘Grass roots expenditures’ means expenditures 

7 for the purpose of influencing legislation (as de8 fined in section 4911(d) without regard to para9 graph (1)(B) thereof). 

10 ‘‘(D) GRASS ROOTS CEILING AMOUNT.— 

11 The grass roots ceiling amount for any organi12 zation for any taxable year is 150 percent of 

13 the grass roots nontaxable amount for such or14 ganization for such taxable year, determined 

15 under section 4911. 

16 ‘‘(3) ORGANIZATIONS TO WHICH THIS SUB17 SECTION APPLIES.—This subsection shall apply to 

18 any organization which has elected (in such manner 

19 and at such time as the Secretary may prescribe) to 

20 have the provisions of this subsection apply to such 

21 organization and which, for the taxable year which 

22 includes the date the election is made, is described 

23 in subsection (c)(3) and is not described in para24 graph (4) and is not a private foundation. 
371 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(4) DISQUALIFIED ORGANIZATIONS.—This 

2 subsection does not apply to— 

3 ‘‘(A) a church, 

4 ‘‘(B) an integrated auxiliary of a church or 

5 of a convention or association of churches, or 

6 ‘‘(C) a member of an affiliated group of or7 ganizations (within the meaning of section 

8 4911(f)(2)) if one or more members of such 

9 group is described in subparagraph (A) or (B). 

10 ‘‘(5) YEARS FOR WHICH ELECTION IS EFFEC11 TIVE.—An election by an organization under this 

12 subsection shall be effective for all taxable years of 

13 such organization which— 

14 ‘‘(A) end after the date the election is 

15 made, and 

16 ‘‘(B) begin before the date the election is 

17 revoked by such organization (under regulations 

18 prescribed by the Secretary). 

19 ‘‘(6) NO EFFECT ON CERTAIN ORGANIZA20 TIONS.—With respect to any organization for a tax21 able year for which— 

22 ‘‘(A) such organization is described in 

23 paragraph (5), or 

24 ‘‘(B) an election under this subsection is 

25 not in effect for such organization, nothing in 
372 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 this subsection or in section 4911 shall be con2 strued to affect the interpretation of the phrase, 

3 ‘no substantial part of the activities of which is 

4 carrying on propaganda, or otherwise attempt5 ing, to influence legislation,’ under subsection 

6 (c)(3). 

7 ‘‘(h) GOVERNMENT CORPORATIONS EXEMPT UNDER

8 SUBSECTION (C)(1).—For purposes of subsection (c)(1), 

9 the following organizations are described in this sub10 section: 

11 ‘‘(1) The Central Liquidity Facility established 

12 under title III of the Federal Credit Union Act (12 

13 U.S.C. 1795 et seq.). 

14 ‘‘(2) The Resolution Trust Corporation estab15 lished under section 21A of the Federal Home Loan 

16 Bank Act. 

17 ‘‘(3) The Resolution Funding Corporation es18 tablished under section 21B of the Federal Home 

19 Loan Bank Act. 

20 ‘‘(i) CERTAIN EDUCATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS.—An 

21 organization shall not be eligible for exemption as an edu22 cational organization under subsection (c)(3) if a substan23 tial amount of its activities and funds are devoted to— 

24 ‘‘(1) conducting seminars and other similar pro25 grams, 
373 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) conducting research to educate Congress 

2 or the general public about public policy issues, 

3 ‘‘(3) producing books and pamphlets, or 

4 ‘‘(4) a combination of the foregoing. 

5 ‘‘SEC. 254. SPECIAL RULES FOR (C)(3) ORGANIZATIONS. 

6 ‘‘(a) NEW ORGANIZATIONS MUST NOTIFY SEC7 RETARY.—Except as provided in subsection (c), an organi8 zation shall not be treated as an organization described 

9 in section 253(c)(3)— 

10 ‘‘(1) unless that it has given notice to the Sec11 retary, in such manner as the Secretary may pre12 scribe, that it is applying for recognition of such sta13 tus, or 

14 ‘‘(2) for any period before giving of such notice, 

15 if such notice is given after the time prescribed by 

16 the Secretary by regulations for giving notice under 

17 this subsection. 

18 ‘‘(b) PRESUMPTION THAT ORGANIZATIONS ARE PRI19 VATE FOUNDATIONS.—Except as provided in subsection 

20 (c), any organization described in section 253(c)(3) and 

21 which does not notify the Secretary, at such time and in 

22 such manner as the Secretary may by regulations pre23 scribe, that it is not a private foundation (as defined in 

24 section 102) shall be presumed to be a private foundation. 
374 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(c) EXCEPTIONS.—Subsections (a) and (b) shall not 

2 apply to— 

3 ‘‘(1) organizations organized before October 10, 

4 1969; 

5 ‘‘(2) organizations which obtained recognition 

6 of tax-exempt status under section 501(c)(3) of the 

7 Internal Revenue Code of 1986 (in the case of sub8 section (a) only); 

9 ‘‘(3) organizations which were determined not 

10 to be private foundations under the Internal Rev11 enue Code of 1986; 

12 ‘‘(4) churches, their integrated auxiliaries, and 

13 conventions and associations of churches; 

14 ‘‘(5) any organization that is not a private 

15 foundation and the gross receipts of which in each 

16 taxable year are not more than $25,000, or 

17 ‘‘(6) such other classes of organizations which 

18 the Secretary may exempt. 

19 ‘‘SEC. 255. TAX ON UNRELATED BUSINESS ACTIVITY. 

20 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—Each organization described in 

21 subsection (b) shall be subject to the Simplified USA Tax 

22 for businesses under section 201 on its gross profits from 

23 its unrelated business activity. 

24 ‘‘(b) ORGANIZATIONS SUBJECT TO TAX.—This sec25 tion shall apply to— 
375 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(1) organizations exempt from the business 

2 tax under section 253(a), other than instrumental3 ities of the United States described in section 

4 253(c)(1). 

5 ‘‘(2) colleges and universities which are instru6 mentalities of any government and corporations 

7 owned by one or more such colleges or universities. 

8 ‘‘SEC. 256. UNRELATED BUSINESS ACTIVITY. 

9 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—‘Unrelated business activity’ 

10 means any trade or business the conduct of which is not 

11 substantially related (aside from the need of such organi12 zation for income or funds or the use it makes of the prof13 its derived) to the exercise or performance by such organi14 zation of its charitable, educational, or other purpose or 

15 function constituting the basis for its exemption under 

16 section 253, except that such term does not include any 

17 trade or business— 

18 ‘‘(1) in which substantially all the work in car19 rying on such trade or business is performed for the 

20 organization without compensation; or 

21 ‘‘(2) which is carried on, in the case of an orga22 nization described in section 253(c)(3) or in the case 

23 of a college or university described in section 255(b), 

24 by the organization primarily for the convenience of 

25 its members, students, patients, officers, or employ-
376 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ees, which is the selling by the organization of items 

2 of work-related clothes and equipment and items 

3 normally sold through vending machines, through 

4 food dispensing facilities, or by snack bars, for the 

5 convenience of its members at their usual places of 

6 employment; or 

7 ‘‘(3) which is the selling of merchandise, sub8 stantially all of which has been received by the orga9 nization as gifts or contributions. 

10 ‘‘(b) ADVERTISING, ETC., ACTIVITIES.—For purposes 

11 of this section, ‘trade or business’ includes any activity 

12 which is carried on for the production of income from the 

13 sale of goods or the performance of services. For purposes 

14 of the preceding sentence, an activity does not lose identity 

15 as a trade or business merely because it is carried on with16 in a larger aggregate of similar activities or within a larger 

17 complex of other endeavors which may, or may not, be 

18 related to the exempt purposes of the organization. Where 

19 an activity carried on for profit constitutes an unrelated 

20 trade or business, no part of such trade or business shall 

21 be excluded from such classification merely because it does 

22 not result in profit. 

23 ‘‘(c) TRADE OR BUSINESS.— 

24 ‘‘(1) CERTAIN BUSINESS ACTIVITIES.—An ac25 tivity shall not be considered a ‘trade or business’ 
377 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 solely because the activity is a business activity 

2 (such as certain passive rental activity) that would 

3 be subject to the business tax if conducted by a busi4 ness entity other than a tax-exempt organization. 

5 ‘‘(2) REGULATIONS.—The Secretary shall pre6 scribe regulations defining a ‘trade or business.’ 

7 Such regulations shall be consistent with the provi8 sions under sections 511 through 513 of the Internal 

9 Revenue Code of 1986, except to the extent such 

10 provisions are inconsistent with other principles of 

11 the business tax. The regulations shall include exclu12 sions from the definition of ‘trade or business’ simi13 lar to those contained in section 513 of the Internal 

14 Revenue Code for— 

15 ‘‘(A) certain bingo games, 

16 ‘‘(B) certain hospital services, and 

17 ‘‘(C) certain public entertainment activity 

18 at fairs and expositions by an organization 

19 which regularly conducts, as one of its substan20 tial exempt purposes, an agricultural or edu21 cational fair or exhibition. 

22 ‘‘(3) TRADE SHOWS.—The conduct of trade 

23 shows and conventions shall not be excluded from 

24 the definition of trade or business. 
378 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘Subchapter I—Cooperatives 

‘‘Sec. 260. Patronage dividends of cooperatives. 

2 ‘‘SEC. 260. PATRONAGE DIVIDENDS OF COOPERATIVES. 

3 ‘‘(a) PATRONAGE DIVIDENDS PAID BY SUPPLY CO4 OPERATIVES.—A qualified patronage dividend paid by a 

5 supply cooperative to a patron shall be treated as if it is 

6 a refund of a portion of the amounts paid by the patron 

7 for goods, services, or use of capital. In general, if the 

8 supply cooperative included the amount received from the 

9 patron in taxable receipts, the dividend shall reduce tax10 able receipts in the year incurred. If the recipient of the 

11 dividend is a business entity which deducted the cost of 

12 business purchases to which the dividend related, the re13 cipient will reduce its cost of business purchases by the 

14 amount of the dividend in the year the dividend is paid 

15 or incurred. 

16 ‘‘(b) PATRONAGE DIVIDENDS PAID BY MARKETING

17 COOPERATIVES.—A qualified patronage dividend paid to 

18 a patron by a marketing cooperative shall be treated as 

19 an upward price adjustment in the amount received by the 

20 patron for its goods marketed by the cooperative. In gen21 eral, the cooperative will increase its cost of business pur22 chases by the amount of the qualified patronage dividend 

23 and the recipient will increase its taxable receipts by the 

24 amount of the qualified patronage dividend. 
379 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(c) DIVIDEND TREATMENT.—Only the portion of a 

2 patronage dividend that is not a qualified patronage divi3 dend shall be treated as a dividend under this chapter and 

4 chapter 2. 

5 ‘‘(d) DEFINITIONS.— 

6 ‘‘(1) QUALIFIED PATRONAGE DIVIDEND.—A 

7 ‘qualified patronage dividend’ is that part of a pa8 tronage dividend that is attributable to the patron’s 

9 allocable share of patronage earnings of a marketing 

10 cooperative or a supply cooperative. 

11 ‘‘(2) SUPPLY COOPERATIVE.—A ‘supply cooper12 ative’ is a cooperative that sells goods or service to 

13 patrons and provided patronage dividends with re14 spect to the quantity of purchases of the patrons. 

15 ‘‘(3) MARKETING COOPERATIVE.—A ‘marketing 

16 cooperative’ is a cooperative that sells goods pro17 duced by its members and provides patronage divi18 dends to the members based on the quantities of 

19 goods sold or provided for sale. 

20 ‘‘(e) SPECIAL RULES.— 

21 ‘‘(1) NOTICES OF ALLOCATION AND PER-UNIT

22 RETAIN CERTIFICATES.—Except as provided in 

23 paragraph (2), a notice of allocation, per-unit retain 

24 certificate, or other similar document shall not be 
380 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 treated as a patronage dividend until it is redeemed 

2 in cash or property. 

3 ‘‘(2) OPPORTUNITY TO RECEIVE CASH.—If a 

4 patron is given an opportunity to receive a patron5 age dividend in cash, but instead chooses to accept 

6 a per-unit retain certificate or a qualified notice of 

7 allocation, the patron will be treated as receiving 

8 cash and simultaneously contributing to the capital 

9 of the cooperative. 

10 ‘‘(3) APPLICATION LIMITED TO QUALIFIED CO11 OPERATIVES.—Under rules to be prescribed by the 

12 Secretary, this section shall apply only to coopera13 tives to which one of the following provisions of the 

14 Internal Revenue Code of 1986 would have applied: 

15 ‘‘(A) Section 501(c)(12) (relating to coop16 erative telephone companies and similar organi17 zations). 

18 ‘‘(B) Section 501(c)(14) (relating to cer19 tain cooperative banks). 

20 ‘‘(C) Section 521 (relating to farm co21 operatives). 

22 ‘‘(D) Section 1381 (relating to coopera23 tives generally). 

24 ‘‘(4) REGULATIONS.—The Secretary shall pre25 scribe regulations for the application of this section. 
381 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 The regulations shall generally be consistent with 

2 subchapter T of chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue 

3 Code of 1986 except to the extent that such rules 

4 are inconsistent with provisions of this chapter. 

5 ‘‘Subchapter J—Sourcing Rules 

‘‘Sec. 265. Exports of property or services. 

‘‘Sec. 266. Imports of property or services. 

‘‘Sec. 267. Import or export of services. 

‘‘Sec. 268. International transportation services. 

‘‘Sec. 269. International communications. 

‘‘Sec. 270. Insurance. 

6 ‘‘SEC. 265. EXPORTS OF PROPERTY OR SERVICES. 

7 ‘‘(a) GENERAL RULE.—Taxable receipts do not in8 clude amounts received by the exporter thereof for prop9 erty or services exported from the United States for use 

10 or consumption outside the United States. 

11 ‘‘(b) EXPORT THROUGH NONBUSINESS ENTITY.— 

12 For purposes of subsection (a), if property or services are 

13 sold to a governmental entity or a tax-exempt organization 

14 for export and are exported other than in an activity of 

15 such entity which is subject to the business tax, then the 

16 seller of such property or services is deemed to be the ex17 porter thereof. 

18 ‘‘(c) EXPORT OF SERVICES.—See section 267 for 

19 rules for determining whether services are exported or im20 ported. 
382 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘SEC. 266. IMPORTS OF PROPERTY OR SERVICES. 

2 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—The import of property or serv3 ices for consumption in the United States shall constitute 

4 a business purchase if such property or service is to be 

5 used in a business activity in the United States. Property 

6 being held for sale or retail by a business entity that is 

7 in the business of selling goods shall be considered held 

8 for ‘use in a business activity’. 

9 ‘‘(b) AMOUNT OF BUSINESS PURCHASE.— 

10 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—The cost of business pur11 chases with respect to the import of property or 

12 services for use or consumption in the United States 

13 is the customs value, price or other amount used for 

14 purposes of determining the import tax under sec15 tion 286 or section 287. 

16 ‘‘(2) IMPORT TAX.—The cost of business pur17 chases does not include any import tax paid. No de18 duction shall be allowed with respect to property or 

19 service imported by a business entity unless the im20 port tax is paid with respect to such import. 

21 ‘‘SEC. 267. IMPORT OR EXPORT OF SERVICES. 

22 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—Except as otherwise provided in 

23 this subchapter or in rules prescribed under subchapter 

24 G (relating to financial intermediation business), services 

25 shall not be treated as imported or exported from the loca26 tion in which they are performed. 
383 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(b) IMPORT OF SERVICES.—A business entity shall 

2 be treated as importing a service if— 

3 ‘‘(1) the entire benefit of the service will be re4 alized in the United States, and 

5 ‘‘(2) the benefit will be realized in connection 

6 with the United States business activities of the 

7 business entity. 

8 ‘‘(c) EXPORT OF SERVICES.—A business will be 

9 treated as exporting a service if— 

10 ‘‘(1) the entire benefit of the service will be re11 alized outside of the United States, and 

12 ‘‘(2) the benefit will be realized solely in con13 nection with the activities of the purchaser occurring 

14 outside the United States. 

15 ‘‘(d) SERVICES ACQUIRED FROM SERVICE PROVIDER

16 THAT PROVIDES SERVICES IN AND OUTSIDE THE

17 UNITED STATES.— 

18 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—If a business entity ac19 quires services from a service provider that provides 

20 services both in and outside the United States and 

21 the service provider shows on the invoice where the 

22 services are provided— 

23 ‘‘(A) the business entity shall treat the 

24 services as provided where stated on the invoice, 

25 and 
384 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) the service provider shall treat as tax2 able receipts any services listed as provided in 

3 the United States. 

4 ‘‘(2) NO INVOICE.—If a business entity acquires 

5 services from a service provider that provides serv6 ices both in and outside the United States and the 

7 service provider does not show on an invoice where 

8 such services are provided— 

9 ‘‘(A) the business entity shall treat the 

10 services as if provided in the location to which 

11 payment is sent, and 

12 ‘‘(B) the service provider shall treat as tax13 able receipts any payments received in the 

14 United States. 

15 ‘‘(e) SPECIAL RULES PREVAIL.—See sections 268 

16 and 269 for special rule relating to transportation and 

17 communication services. 

18 ‘‘SEC. 268. INTERNATIONAL TRANSPORTATION SERVICES. 

19 ‘‘(a) TRANSPORTATION OF PROPERTY.— 

20 ‘‘(1) TAXABLE RECEIPTS.— 

21 ‘‘(A) EXPORTS.—Taxable receipts do not 

22 include receipts from the transportation of 

23 property exported from the United States. 

24 ‘‘(B) IMPORTS.—Taxable receipts include 

25 receipts from transportation of property im-
385 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ported into the United States only if such costs 

2 are not taken into account in determining the 

3 import tax. 

4 ‘‘(C) PRESUMPTIONS.—The Secretary shall 

5 prescribe regulations describing situations in 

6 which a transporter of property must presume 

7 that no import tax has been paid on the cost of 

8 its services. 

9 ‘‘(2) BUSINESS PURCHASES.— 

10 ‘‘(A) EXPORTS.—Business purchases do 

11 not include amounts paid or incurred for the 

12 cost of transportation of property exported from 

13 the United States. 

14 ‘‘(B) IMPORTS.—Amounts paid or incurred 

15 for transportation of goods imported into the 

16 United States, shall constitute a cost of busi17 ness purchase only to the extent that they are 

18 taken into account in determining the customs 

19 value for purposes of section 286(a) (relating to 

20 the import tax). 

21 ‘‘(b) TRANSPORTATION OF PASSENGERS.— 

22 ‘‘(1) TAXABLE RECEIPTS.—Taxable receipts— 

23 ‘‘(A) include receipts from the transpor24 tation of passengers from the United States to 

25 a destination outside the United States, but 
386 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(B) do not include receipts from the 

2 transportation of passengers from outside the 

3 United States to a destination in the United 

4 States. 

5 ‘‘(2) BUSINESS PURCHASES.—Business pur6 chases— 

7 ‘‘(A) include amounts paid or incurred in 

8 a business activity for the transportation of 

9 passengers from the United States to a destina10 tion outside the United States, but 

11 ‘‘(B) do not include amounts paid or in12 curred for transportation of passengers from 

13 outside the United States to a destination in 

14 the United States. 

15 ‘‘(3) SIMPLIFYING RULES.—The Secretary may 

16 provide rules that simplify this subsection, including 

17 rules under which— 

18 ‘‘(A) half of receipts attributable to trans19 portation to or from the United States are 

20 treated as taxable receipts, 

21 ‘‘(B) half of the cost for business trips to 

22 and from the United States are treated as busi23 ness purchases, and 

24 ‘‘(C) all transportation expenses of a busi25 ness entity that has no regular business outside 
387 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the United States are treated as business pur2 chases. 

3 ‘‘SEC. 269. INTERNATIONAL COMMUNICATIONS. 

4 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—For purposes of section 266, 

5 communications services shall be treated as provided at 

6 the point of origin of the communications and shall not 

7 be treated as imported or exported. 

8 ‘‘(b) COMMUNICATIONS SERVICES.—Communications 

9 services include— 

10 ‘‘(1) telephone communications services, 

11 ‘‘(2) courier services (except in the case of 

12 transportation of property that is imported or ex13 ported), 

14 ‘‘(3) satellite transmission services, 

15 ‘‘(4) telegraph services, 

16 ‘‘(5) facsimile transmission services, and 

17 ‘‘(6) other similar services. 

18 ‘‘SEC. 270. INSURANCE. 

19 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—Insurance services will be treat20 ed as provided at the location of the insurance company 

21 providing the services. Except as the Secretary may pre22 scribe by regulations, insurance companies will be treated 

23 as providing services at the location to which insurance 

24 payments are made. 
388 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(b) INSURED RISKS IN THE UNITED STATES.—If 

2 insurance services are provided outside the United States 

3 and the insured risk is located in the United States— 

4 ‘‘(1) the insurance service shall be treated as 

5 imported, 

6 ‘‘(2) the insurance premiums shall be subject to 

7 the import tax, and 

8 ‘‘(3) payments of insurance benefits shall not be 

9 treated as imported. 

10 ‘‘(c) INSURED RISK OUTSIDE THE UNITED

11 STATES.—If insurance services are provided inside the 

12 United States and the insured risk is located outside the 

13 United States— 

14 ‘‘(1) insurance services shall be treated as ex15 ported, 

16 ‘‘(2) payments of insurance benefits shall be 

17 treated as payments for services outside the United 

18 States, and shall not be deducted as business pur19 chases. 

20 ‘‘(d) INSURANCE SERVICES.—Insurance services 

21 means the provision of insurance and services related to 

22 insurance other than insurance that is treated as a savings 

23 asset. 
389 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘SEC. 271. BANKING SERVICES. 

2 ‘‘The Secretary shall prescribe regulations on the lo3 cation of banking services and the extent to which such 

4 services are to be treated as imported or exported. 

5 ‘‘Subchapter K—Business Conducted in a 

6 Possession 

‘‘Sec. 276. Treatment of possessions. 

7 ‘‘SEC. 276. TREATMENT OF POSSESSIONS. 

8 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—For purposes of the business tax 

9 imposed by this chapter, the U.S. possessions shall not 

10 be treated as part of the United States. 

11 ‘‘(b) EFFECT ON PAYROLL TAX CREDIT.—A busi12 ness entity may not claim a payroll tax credit with respect 

13 to any payroll taxes paid with respect to income of resi14 dents of the U.S. possessions. 

15 ‘‘(c) POSSESSION.—For purposes of this subchapter, 

16 ‘U.S. possession’ or ‘possession’ means a possession of the 

17 United States and includes the Commonwealth of Puerto 

18 Rico and the Virgin Islands. 

19 ‘‘Subchapter L—Payroll Tax Credit 

‘‘Sec. 281. Amount of credit. 

‘‘Sec. 282. Current-year payroll tax credit. 

‘‘Sec. 283. Credit carryover. 

20 ‘‘SEC. 281. AMOUNT OF CREDIT. 

21 ‘‘(a) AMOUNT OF CREDIT.—The payroll tax credit for 

22 a business entity for a taxable year is the lesser of— 

23 ‘‘(1) the sum of— 
390 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(A) the current-year payroll tax credit, 

2 and 

3 ‘‘(B) the credit carryovers to the taxable 

4 year, or 

5 ‘‘(2) the business entity’s business tax for the 

6 taxable year (determined without regard to the pay7 roll tax credit). 

8 ‘‘(b) CONSOLIDATED RETURNS.—In the case of busi9 ness entities filing consolidated returns, the amount of the 

10 credit shall be determined using the combined payroll tax 

11 credits and credit carryovers of the business entities and 

12 the combined business tax of the business entities. 

13 ‘‘SEC. 282. CURRENT-YEAR PAYROLL TAX CREDIT. 

14 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—The ‘current-year payroll tax 

15 credit’ is an amount equal to the sum of— 

16 ‘‘(1) the employer’s share of the FICA tax im17 posed on wages of its employees during the taxable 

18 year, 

19 ‘‘(2) the employer’s share of the tier 1 railroad 

20 retirement tax for its employees during the taxable 

21 year, 

22 ‘‘(3) one-half of the allocable portion of the 

23 SECA tax imposed on individuals (other than inde24 pendent contractors and other business entities) who 

25 provide services to the business entity. 
391 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(b) DEFINITIONS.— 

2 ‘‘(1) EMPLOYER’S SHARE OF THE FICA TAX.— 

3 ‘Employer’s share of the FICA tax’ means the old4 age, survivors, disability and hospital insurance 

5 taxes imposed by section 3111. 

6 ‘‘(2) EMPLOYER’S SHARE OF THE TIER 1 RAIL7 ROAD RETIREMENT TAX.—‘Employer’s share of the 

8 tier 1 railroad retirement tax’ means— 

9 ‘‘(A) the tier 1 railroad retirement tax im10 posed by section 3221(a), and 

11 ‘‘(B) the portion of the tax imposed by sec12 tion 3211(a)(1) on employee representatives at13 tributable to the tax imposed by section 3111. 

14 ‘‘(3) ONE-HALF OF THE ALLOCABLE PORTION

15 OF THE SECA TAX.— 

16 ‘‘(A) SECA TAX.—‘SECA tax’ means the 

17 self-employment tax imposed by section 1401. 

18 ‘‘(B) PARTNERSHIPS.—Until such time as 

19 the SECA tax and the Federal Insurance Con20 tributions Acts are amended to treat partners 

21 of partnerships as employees, if a partner des22 ignates a partnership as a principal source of 

23 employment income for the taxable year, one24 half of the partnership’s allocable portion of the 

25 SECA tax of such partner equals the FICA tax 
392 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 that the employer would have been required to 

2 pay under section 3111 with respect to such 

3 partner if the partner’s self-employment income 

4 as reported by the partnership were wages sub5 ject to the FICA tax. A partner and partner6 ship can agree to treat no portion of a partner’s 

7 SECA tax as allocable to the partnership. 

8 ‘‘(C) PROPRIETORSHIP.—In the case of an 

9 individual who is a proprietor or sole owner and 

10 provider of service to a business entity, the indi11 vidual shall allocate the portion of one-half of 

12 his SECA tax not allocated pursuant to sub13 paragraph (B) to his business entities in ac14 cordance with rules prescribed by the Secretary. 

15 ‘‘(c) SPECIAL RULE.—Under rules prescribed by the 

16 Secretary, an individual subject to the self-employment tax 

17 shall pay half of the self-employment tax on an amount 

18 of self employment income not less than the amount of 

19 the individual’s self-employment income taken into ac20 count by partnerships under subparagraph (B) of sub21 section (b)(3). 

22 ‘‘SEC. 283. CREDIT CARRYOVER. 

23 ‘‘(a) CARRYOVER.—A current-year credit that is not 

24 applied in the taxable year in which earned shall constitute 
393 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 a credit carryover until applied but for no more than 15 

2 taxable years. 

3 ‘‘(b) ORDER OF USE.—For purposes of determining 

4 which credits are applied under section 281, if the total 

5 credit allowable in a taxable year is less than the sum of 

6 the current-year payroll credit and the carryover credits, 

7 the current-year payroll credit shall be considered applied 

8 first and then credit carryovers shall be considered applied 

9 in the order earned. 

10 ‘‘Subchapter M—Import Tax 

‘‘Sec. 286. Imposition of tax on property. 

‘‘Sec. 287. Imposition of tax on import of services. 

‘‘Sec. 288. General rules for the import tax. 

11 ‘‘SEC. 286. IMPOSITION OF TAX ON PROPERTY. 

12 ‘‘(a) GENERAL RULE.—There is hereby imposed a 

13 tax equal to 11 percent of the customs value of all prop14 erty entered into the United States for consumption, use 

15 or warehousing. 

16 ‘‘(b) LIABILITY FOR TAX.—The tax imposed on the 

17 import of property by subsection (a) shall be paid by the 

18 person entering the property into the United States for 

19 consumption, use or warehousing. Such tax shall be due 

20 and payable at the time of import. 

21 ‘‘(c) IMPORTS OF PREVIOUSLY EXPORTED PROP22 ERTY.—In the case of any article that is classified under 

23 a heading or subheading of subchapter I or II of chapter 

24 98 of the Tariff Schedules of the United States, the tax 
394 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 under this section shall be imposed only on that portion 

2 of the customs value of such article that is dutiable under 

3 such heading or subheading. 

4 ‘‘(d) IMPORTS FOR PERSONAL CONSUMPTION.—The 

5 import tax imposed by this section shall not apply to any 

6 article entered into the United States duty free under sub7 chapters I through VII of chapter 98 of the Tariff Sched8 ules of the United States. 

9 ‘‘(e) EXCEPTION FOR CERTAIN COMMODITIES AND

10 PRODUCTS.—The import tax imposed by this section shall 

11 not apply to petroleum, petroleum products or such com12 modities or products as the President shall by Executive 

13 Order determine to be in short supply and vital to national 

14 security. 

15 ‘‘SEC. 287. IMPOSITION OF TAX ON IMPORT OF SERVICES. 

16 ‘‘(a) GENERAL RULE.—There is hereby imposed a 

17 tax equal to 11 percent of the cost of all services treated 

18 as imported into the United States during the taxable year 

19 of the service recipient. 

20 ‘‘(b) LIABILITY FOR THE TAX.—The tax on the im21 port of services imposed by subsection (a) shall be paid 

22 by the person who receives the imported services. The tax 

23 shall be payable as if it were an addition to the business 

24 tax imposed by section 201. 
395 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(c) IMPORTED SERVICES.—For purposes of this sec2 tion, services shall be treated as imported if they are treat3 ed as imported under section 267 (general rules on import 

4 of services) or section 270 (related to insurance). 

5 ‘‘(d) SPECIAL RULE FOR INSURANCE.—The seller of 

6 insurance that is treated as imported under section 270 

7 shall be liable for the collection of the tax imposed by sub8 section (a) on the insurance and for paying such tax to 

9 the Secretary. The first sentence of subsection (b) (relat10 ing to the person liable for the tax) shall apply to insur11 ance only to the extent that the seller of the insurance 

12 services does not collect such tax. 

13 ‘‘SEC. 288. GENERAL RULES FOR THE IMPORT TAX. 

14 ‘‘(a) IMPORT TAX.—‘Import tax’ means the tax im15 posed by section 286 on the import of property and the 

16 tax imposed by section 287 on the import of services. 

17 ‘‘(b) NO PAYROLL TAX CREDIT.—The payroll tax 

18 credit shall not be allowed against the import tax. 

19 ‘‘Subchapter N—Transition Rules 

‘‘Sec. 290. Amortization of transition basis. 

‘‘Sec. 291. Sales of transition basis property. 

‘‘Sec. 292. Safe harbor leases. 

‘‘Sec. 293. Carryovers. 

‘‘Sec. 294. Section 481 adjustments. 

20 ‘‘SEC. 290. AMORTIZATION OF TRANSITION BASIS. 

21 ‘‘(a) TRANSITION BASIS DEDUCTION.—The ‘transi22 tion basis deduction’ for a taxable year is the sum of the 
396 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 amortization allowance determined under this section for 

2 the taxable year. 

3 ‘‘(b) AMORTIZATION RULES.—The amortization al4 lowance for each category of amortizable basis shall be de5 termined by amortizing the amortizable basis of such cat6 egory ratably over the amortization period for the category 

7 beginning January 1, 2007. 

8 ‘‘(c) AMORTIZATION PERIOD.—The amortization pe9 riods shall be determined in accordance with the following 

10 table: 

‘‘In the case of: The amortization period is: 

Category I basis ....................................................................... 15 years

Category II basis ...................................................................... 30 years

Category III basis .................................................................... 40 years

Unrecovered inventory costs .................................................... 5 years.

11 ‘‘(d) CATEGORIES.— 

12 ‘‘(1) CATEGORY I BASIS.—‘Category I basis’ is 

13 the sum of the unrecovered bases as of January 1, 

14 2007, of all depreciable property placed in service 

15 prior to January 1, 2007, and the unamortized por16 tion of amortizable costs incurred before January 1, 

17 2007, if— 

18 ‘‘(A) cost recovery or amortization began 

19 before January 1, 2007, and 

20 ‘‘(B) the remaining recovery period or am21 ortization period as of January 1, 2007, is less 

22 than 15 years. 
397 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) CATEGORY II BASIS.—‘Category II basis’ 

2 is the sum of the unrecovered bases as of January 

3 1, 2007, of all depreciable property placed in service 

4 prior to January 1, 2007, and the unamortized por5 tion of amortizable costs incurred before January 1, 

6 2007, if— 

7 ‘‘(A) cost recovery or amortization began 

8 before January 1, 2007, and 

9 ‘‘(B) the remaining recovery period or am10 ortization period as of January 1, 2007, is 15 

11 years or more. 

12 ‘‘(3) CATEGORY III BASIS.—‘Category III basis’ 

13 is the sum of the adjusted basis of each asset satis14 fying the following requirements: 

15 ‘‘(A) The asset was placed in service prior 

16 to January 1, 2007. 

17 ‘‘(B) The asset was used in a business ac18 tivity in 2007. 

19 ‘‘(C) The cost of the asset was capitalized 

20 and not depreciable or otherwise recoverable 

21 under the Internal Revenue Code of 1986. 

22 ‘‘(D) The cost of the asset would have con23 stituted deductible expenses under the business 

24 tax if such cost had been incurred after 2006. 
398 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(4) UNRECOVERED INVENTORY COSTS.—‘Un2 recovered inventory costs’ means the cost of goods 

3 sold (as determined under the Internal Revenue 

4 Code of 1986) if a business entity sold all of its in5 ventory (including inventory being produced) on the 

6 effective date of the business tax. 

7 ‘‘(e) RULES OF APPLICATION.— 

8 ‘‘(1) REMAINING RECOVERY PERIOD.— 

9 ‘‘(A) TIME OF MEASURE.—The remaining 

10 recovery period shall be determined as of De11 cember 31, 2006, and shall include each taxable 

12 year ending after such date in which a deduc13 tion would have been allowed under the Internal 

14 Revenue Code of 1986. 

15 ‘‘(B) ACCOUNTING METHOD.—The remain16 ing recovery period shall be determined using 

17 the cost recovery method and rules applicable 

18 for determining taxable income under the Inter19 nal Revenue Code of 1986. 

20 ‘‘(2) DEPLETABLE ASSETS.—Under rules pre21 scribed by the Secretary, this section shall apply to 

22 the remaining cost basis of depletable property and 

23 to other property for which a cost recovery method 

24 other than one based on time is used. 
399 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘SEC. 291. SALES OF TRANSITION BASIS PROPERTY. 

2 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—Except as provided in subsection 

3 (b), for purposes of determining the tax consequences of 

4 a sale, retirement, casualty or conversion to personal use 

5 of an asset whose basis or cost is taken into account under 

6 section 90, the amount to be amortized shall be treated 

7 as fully deducted upon the adoption of the business tax. 

8 ‘‘(b) SUBSTANTIAL SALES.— 

9 ‘‘(1) IN GENERAL.—In the case of a substantial 

10 sale of assets to which the amortization rules of sec11 tion 90 apply, the purchaser and seller may jointly 

12 elect to have the purchaser assume the amortization 

13 deductions attributable to such assets, in which 

14 case— 

15 ‘‘(A) the seller’s taxable receipts from such 

16 sale shall be reduced by the amount of 

17 unamortized basis or cost assumed by the pur18 chaser, 

19 ‘‘(B) the purchaser may treat as a cost of 

20 a business purchase only the portion of the pur21 chase price in excess of the amount of 

22 unamortized basis or cost assumed, 

23 ‘‘(C) the unamortized basis or cost as24 sumed shall continue to be amortized in the 

25 manner amortized by the seller. 
400 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) SUBSTANTIAL SALE.—A sale of assets by 

2 a business entity to another business entity is a sub3 stantial sale if— 

4 ‘‘(A) more than 20 percent (in fair market 

5 value or in original cost) of the assets of the 

6 seller are sold, 

7 ‘‘(B) the total consideration for the sale 

8 exceeds $1 million or 20 percent of the taxable 

9 receipts of the seller for the taxable year pre10 ceding the year of the sale, or 

11 ‘‘(C) the sale satisfies other criteria estab12 lished by the Secretary to prevent distortions in 

13 gross profits resulting from asset sales. 

14 ‘‘SEC. 292. SAFE HARBOR LEASES. 

15 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—In the case of a safe harbor 

16 lease, rental payments deemed to occur under the lease 

17 and interest payments deemed to be made under the leases 

18 shall constitute costs of business purchases, and rental in19 come and interest income deemed to be earned under the 

20 lease shall constitute taxable receipts. The transition basis 

21 deduction rules shall apply to the lessor’s adjusted basis 

22 in assets subject to a safe harbor lease. 

23 ‘‘(b) SAFE HARBOR LEASE.—‘Safe harbor lease’ 

24 means a sale and leaseback transaction entered into pur25 suant to section 168(f)(8) of the Internal Revenue Code, 
401 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 as added by the Economic Recovery Tax Act of 1981, 

2 when such provision was in effect but only if such trans3 action would not be treated as a sale and leaseback for 

4 tax purposes but for that provision. 

5 ‘‘SEC. 293. CARRYOVERS. 

6 ‘‘(a) NO LOSS CARRYOVERS.—No deduction shall be 

7 allowed under the business tax for net operating loss 

8 carryovers, capital loss carryovers, or any other loss 

9 carryovers from the income tax under the Internal Rev10 enue Code of 1986. 

11 ‘‘(b) NO CREDIT CARRYOVERS.—No credits shall be 

12 allowed under the business tax for business credit 

13 carryovers, minimum tax credit carryovers, or any other 

14 credit carryovers from the income tax under the Internal 

15 Revenue Code of 1986. 

16 ‘‘SEC. 294. SECTION 481 ADJUSTMENTS. 

17 ‘‘(a) POSITIVE NET SECTION 481 ADJUSTMENT

18 AMOUNT.—If, as of January 1, 2007, a business entity 

19 has a positive net section 481 adjustment amount, the 

20 amount shall be applied to reduce the transition basis in 

21 accounts (for purposes of section 290) in the following 

22 order: 

23 ‘‘(1) First, to reduce the category I basis (but 

24 not below zero), 
402 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(2) Second, to reduce the category II basis 

2 (but not below zero), 

3 ‘‘(3) Third, to reduce the unrecovered inventory 

4 costs. 

5 ‘‘(b) NEGATIVE NET SECTION 481 ADJUSTMENT

6 AMOUNT.—If, as of January 1, 2007, a business entity 

7 has a negative net section 481 adjustment amount, the 

8 amount shall be applied to increase category I basis for 

9 purposes of section 290. 

10 ‘‘(c) SECTION 481 ADJUSTMENT.—A business enti11 ty’s net section 481 adjustment is determined by sub12 tracting— 

13 ‘‘(1) the sum of all additional deductions to 

14 which a business entity would be entitled by reason 

15 of section 481 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 

16 for periods beginning on or after the effective date 

17 of the business tax with respect to changes in ac18 counting methods made before such effective date, 

19 from 

20 ‘‘(2) the sum of all additional income which a 

21 business entity would recognize by reason of section 

22 481 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 for peri23 ods beginning on or after the effective date of the 

24 business tax with respect to changes in accounting 

25 methods made before such effective date, in each 
403 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 case assuming that the income tax under the Inter2 nal Revenue Code of 1986 remained in effect. 

3 ‘‘Subchapter O—Rules for Administration, 

4 Consolidated Returns 

‘‘Sec. 301. Returns, due dates, etc. 

‘‘Sec. 302. Consolidated returns. 

5 ‘‘SEC. 301. RETURNS, DUE DATES, ETC. 

6 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—Until subtitle F is amended to 

7 reflect the adoption of this chapter, the rules of subtitle 

8 F relating to C corporations shall apply to business enti9 ties with respect to— 

10 ‘‘(1) returns and records; 

11 ‘‘(2) time and place for paying tax; 

12 ‘‘(3) assessment of taxes; 

13 ‘‘(4) collections and liens; 

14 ‘‘(5) abatements, credits, and refunds; 

15 ‘‘(6) interest on underpayments and overpay16 ments; 

17 ‘‘(7) additions to tax and penalties; 

18 ‘‘(8) closing agreements and compromises; 

19 ‘‘(9) crimes; 

20 ‘‘(10) judicial proceedings; 

21 ‘‘(11) discovery of liability and enforcement; 

22 and 

23 ‘‘(12) estimated taxes. 
404 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(b) INDIVIDUALS ENGAGING IN BUSINESS ACTIVI2 TIES.—Under rules prescribed by the Secretary, individ3 uals engaging in business activities on their own or with 

4 their spouses shall be permitted to file their business tax 

5 returns with their individual tax returns and shall be sub6 ject to estimated tax rules for individual income tax re7 turns. 

8 ‘‘SEC. 302. CONSOLIDATED RETURNS. 

9 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—Business entities may file con10 solidated returns of business tax if they would have been 

11 permitted to file consolidated returns under section 1501 

12 of the Internal Revenue Code and such section were ap13 plied by treating each business entity as a corporation and 

14 its owners or partners as shareholders. 

15 ‘‘(b) FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS.—Financial inter16 mediation businesses may be included in consolidated re17 turns, but each financial intermediation business must 

18 compute its gross profits separately. 

19 ‘‘(c) INTERCOMPANY TRANSACTIONS.—In computing 

20 the gross profits of a consolidated group, intercompany 

21 transactions can be taken into account, or at the election 

22 of the filer, be disregarded (except in the case of trans23 actions with financial intermediation businesses). 
405 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘Subchapter P—Definitions and Rules of 

2 Application 

‘‘Sec. 310. Definitions. 

‘‘Sec. 311. Rules of application. 

3 ‘‘SEC. 310. DEFINITIONS. 

4 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—When used in this chapter, 

5 where not otherwise distinctly expressed or manifestly in6 compatible with the intent thereof— 

7 ‘‘(1) USA INCOME TAX.—‘USA Income Tax’ 

8 and ‘Simplified USA Tax’ for individuals mean the 

9 tax imposed by chapter 1. 

10 ‘‘(2) INTERNAL REVENUE CODE OF 1986.—‘In11 ternal Revenue Code of 1986’ means the Internal 

12 Revenue Code of 1986 as in effect immediately be13 fore the enactment of the Simplified USA Tax. 

14 ‘‘(3) UNITED STATES.—‘United States’ means 

15 the States and the District of Columbia. 

16 ‘‘(b) TERMS DEFINED IN CHAPTER 2.—If a term 

17 that is used but not defined in this chapter or in section 

18 7701 is defined in chapter 1, the definition in chapter 1 

19 shall apply except if manifestly incompatible with the in20 tent of the provision in which the term is used. 

21 ‘‘SEC. 311. RULES OF APPLICATION. 

22 ‘‘(a) DEFINITIONS.—Any definition included in this 

23 chapter shall apply for all purposes of this chapter un24 less— 
406 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 ‘‘(1) such definition is limited to the purposes 

2 of a particular chapter, section, or subsection, or 

3 ‘‘(2) the definition clearly would not be applica4 ble in a particular context. 

5 ‘‘(b) INTERPRETATIONS CONSISTENT WITH INTER6 NAL REVENUE CODE OF 1986.—Terms not defined in this 

7 chapter or elsewhere in this title, but defined in the Inter8 nal Revenue Code of 1986, shall be interpreted in a man9 ner consistent with the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, 

10 except to the extent such interpretation would be incon11 sistent with the principles and purposes of this chapter.’’ 

12 (b) The amendments made by this section shall be 

13 effective on January 1, 2007, except to the extent other14 wise specifically provided in the text of such amendments. 

15 SEC. 302. REPEAL OF CHAPTER 6. 

16 Chapter 6 of the Code (relating to consolidated re17 turns) is repealed as of January 1, 2007. 

18 TITLE IV—DEFERRED 

19 COMPENSATION PLANS 

20 SEC. 401. PROVISIONS SAVED. 

21 (a) IN GENERAL.—Except as otherwise provided in 

22 this title, the sections contained in subchapter D of chap23 ter 1 of the Code (relating to deferred compensation, etc.) 

24 are hereby saved as chapter 3. 
407 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 (b) LIMITATIONS ON CHAPTER 3.—The following 

2 new section is inserted before section 401 of the Code (as 

3 saved by subsection (a)): 

4 ‘‘SEC. 400. EFFECT OF CHAPTER 3. 

5 ‘‘(a) IN GENERAL.—The provisions of chapter 3 (sec6 tions 401 through 420) are included in this subtitle for 

7 purposes of cross-reference and for purposes of deter8 mining whether plans are exempt from the business tax 

9 and whether contributions to plans are deductible or ex10 cludable from gross income under chapter 1. 

11 ‘‘(b) EFFECT ON BUSINESS TAX DEDUCTIONS.— 

12 Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in this 

13 chapter, no provision of this chapter shall cause any 

14 amount to be treated as a cost of business purchase or 

15 to otherwise be deducted from gross receipts for purposes 

16 of computing the Simplified USA for Tax Businesses 

17 under chapter 2. 

18 ‘‘(c) NO CREDITS.—Notwithstanding any provision 

19 to the contrary in this chapter, no provision of this chapter 

20 shall result in a tax credit against any tax imposed by 

21 chapter 1 or chapter 2. 

22 ‘‘(d) EFFECT OF FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH PROVI23 SIONS.—A failure to comply with applicable provisions in 

24 this chapter could cause a plan to lose its exemption from 

25 the business tax and, thereby subject certain business ac-
408 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 tivities of the plan to the business tax and/or result in 

2 the constructive distribution of plan assets to plan partici3 pants.’’ 

4 (c) SECTION 408A SUSPERSEDED BY SECTION 30.— 

5 Section 408A is repealed. 

6 SEC. 402. CLERICAL AMENDMENTS. 

7 (a) TABLE OF SECTIONS.—The table of sections for 

8 subpart A of part 1 of chapter 3 of the USA Tax Code 

9 (formerly subchapter D of chapter 1 of the Code) is 

10 amended by inserting at the beginning of the table: 

11 ‘‘CHAPTER 3—DEFERRED COMPENSATION, 

12 ETC’’. 

13 (b) RENUMBERING OF CHAPTERS.— 

14 (1) RENUMBER CHAPTERS.—Chapters 2 and 3 

15 of the Code are renumbered 4 and 5 respectively. 

16 Such renumbering shall be reflected in all tables and 

17 headings in the Code. 

18 (2) CROSS REFERENCES.—Any cross reference 

19 to chapter 2 or 3 of the Code contained in any provi20 sion of the Code that is not amended by this Act or 

21 in any other statute shall be treated as a reference 

22 to such chapter as renumbered by paragraph (1). 
409 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 TITLE V—REPEAL OF ESTATE 

2 AND GIFT TAXES 

3 SEC. 501. REPEAL OF GRATUITOUS TRANSFER TAXES. 

4 Subtitle B of the Code (relating to estate and gift 

5 taxes) is repealed. 

6 SEC. 502. EFFECTIVE DATE. 

7 Section 501 shall apply to— 

8 (1) gifts made after December 31, 2006; 

9 (2) the estates of decedents dying after Decem10 ber 31, 2006; and 

11 (3) generating skipping transfers (within the 

12 meaning of subchapter B of chapter 13 as in effect 

13 before its repeal by this Act) occurring after Decem14 ber 31, 2006. 

15 TITLE VI—TECHNICAL AND AD16 MINISTRATIVE CHANGES: EF17 FECTIVE DATES 

18 SEC. 601. USA TAX CODE. 

19 (a) REDESIGNATION OF THE CODE.—The Internal 

20 Revenue Title enacted August 16, 1954, and as heretofore 

21 and hereby amended may be cited as the ‘‘USA Tax 

22 Code’’. The USA Tax Code, as hereinafter amended, may 

23 be cited as the ‘‘USA Tax Code, as amended’’. 
410 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 (b) REFERENCES IN LAWS, ETC.—Except where in2 appropriate, any reference in any law, Executive order, or 

3 other document— 

4 (1) to the Internal Revenue Code of 1954 or 

5 the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 shall include a 

6 reference to the USA Tax Code or the USA Tax 

7 Code, as amended, 

8 (2) to the USA Tax Code or the USA Tax 

9 Code, as amended, shall include a reference, with re10 spect to periods before January 1, 2007, to the In11 ternal Revenue Code of 1954 or the Internal Rev12 enue Code of 1986. 

13 SEC. 602. REVISIONS TO THE CODE. 

14 Not later than January 1, 2008, the Secretary shall 

15 submit to Congress proposed changes in the USA Tax 

16 Code that— 

17 (1) eliminate cross-references to the Internal 

18 Revenue Code of 1986 (except with respect to tran19 sition issues) and insert provisions similar to the 

20 cross-referenced sections of the Internal Revenue 

21 Code of 1986, 

22 (2) revise subtitles C through J of the USA 

23 Tax Code to fully reflect the amendments to subtitle 

24 A of the Code made by this Act and the repeal of 

25 subtitle B, 
411 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 (3) include statutory definitions or rules in 

2 cases where the Secretary concludes that the defini3 tions or rules cannot or should not be addressed by 

4 regulation, 

5 (4) revise chapter 4 of the USA Tax Code (as 

6 renumbered by section 402 of this Act) (relating to 

7 the self-employment tax) to conform to changes 

8 made by this Act, and 

9 (5) revise chapter 5 of the USA Tax Code (as 

10 renumbered by section 402 of this Act) (relating to 

11 withholding on nonresident aliens and foreign cor12 porations) to reflect changes made in this Act. 

13 SEC. 603. APPLICATION OF SUBTITLE F. 

14 Until such time as subtitle F of the Code is amended 

15 to reflect the amendments made by this Act, the provisions 

16 of subtitle F shall be treated as generally applying to the 

17 Simplified USA Tax— 

18 (1) without regard to specific cross references, 

19 (2) without regard to provisions relating to 

20 partnerships, and 

21 (3) as if the business tax under chapter 2 were 

22 the corporate income tax and all business entities 

23 were corporations (except for purposes of collection, 

24 in which case the owners of noncorporate entities 

25 shall be obligated for taxes owned by the entities to 
412 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 the same extent as they would if the entity owed the 

2 tax prior to the amendment of the Code). 

3 SEC. 604. CLERICAL AMENDMENT. 

4 The portion of the table at the beginning of the Code 

5 listing subtitles and chapters of subtitle A is amended to 

6 read as follows: 

‘‘Subtitle A. Simplified USA Tax 

‘‘Subtitle B. [deleted] 

‘‘Subtitle C. Employment taxes 

‘‘Subtitle D. Miscellaneous excise taxes 

‘‘Subtitle E. Alcohol, tobacco and certain other excise taxes 

‘‘Subtitle F. Procedure and administration 

‘‘Subtitle G. The joint committee on taxation 

‘‘Subtitle H. Financing of presidential election campaigns 

‘‘Subtitle I. Trust fund code 

‘‘Subtitle K. Group health plan requirements 

‘‘Subtitle A—Simplified USA Tax 

‘‘CHAPTER 1. SIMPLIFIED USA TAX FOR INDIVIDUALS

‘‘CHAPTER 2. SIMPLIFIED USA TAX FOR BUSINESSES

‘‘CHAPTER 3. DEFERRED COMPENSATION PLANS

‘‘CHAPTER 4. TAX ON SELF-EMPLOYMENT INCOME

‘‘CHAPTER 5. WITHHOLDING OF TAX ON NONRESIDENT ALIENS AND FOREIGN

CORPORATIONS’’. 

7 SEC. 605. EFFECTIVE DATES. 

8 (a) IN GENERAL.—Except as otherwise provided in 

9 this Act, the amendments made by this Act shall be effec10 tive on January 1, 2007, with respect to tax years begin11 ning on such date. 
413 

•HR 4707 IH 

1 (b) SPECIAL RULES FOR BUSINESSES WITH 52–53 

2 WEEK YEAR.—If a business uses a 52–53 week taxable 

3 year the amendments made by this Act shall apply to the 

4 business with respect to its tax year beginning in the last 

5 week in December except with respect to any transactions 

6 occurring during 2006 that were structured to take advan7 tage of the application of this Act to such business at a 

8 time when this Act did not apply to other businesses or 

9 to individuals. 

Æ